ADS FlowShark Triton User manual

ADS FlowShark Triton User manual
ADS Intrinsically-Safe
FlowShark Triton
Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual
April 2015
QR 775013 A6
1300 Meridian Street, Suite 3000
Huntsville, Alabama 35801
(256) 430-3366
www.adsenv.com
ii ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
 2015 ADS LLC. All rights reserved.
ADS , ADS Environmental Services, Profile, IntelliServe,
FlowShark, and Qstart are either trademarks or registered
trademarks of ADS LLC.
Enfora is a trademark of Enfora, Incorporated.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Scotchkote is a trademark of 3M.
Teflon is a registered trademark of E.I. du Pont de Nemours and
Company.
Telog is a registered trademark of Telog Instruments.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
Notice of Proprietary Information
The information contained herein represents the latest information
available at the time of publication. ADS LLC reserves the right to
make any changes or modifications to the content of this document,
without notice, to reflect the latest changes to the equipment. No
part of this document may be reproduced in any form without the
written consent of ADS LLC.
Table of Contents
iii
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction……………………..1-1
Intrinsic Safety ............................................................... 1-2
FlowShark Triton System Certification ................... 1-3
Installation and IS Considerations ........................... 1-5
Special Conditions for Safe Use.............................. 1-6
Other Conditions for Safe Use ................................ 1-7
Maintenance Restrictions ............................................... 1-8
Warnings, Certifications, GSM/GPRS Compliance,
and Conformity .............................................. 1-10
Changes or Modifications ..................................... 1-10
Control Drawing.................................................... 1-11
European ATEX Hazardous Area Compliance ..... 1-13
IECEx (International Electrotechnical
Commission Explosive) Hazardous Area
Compliance .................................................... 1-21
CSA Hazardous Area Compliance ........................ 1-24
Installation and Configuration ...................................... 1-26
Product Warranty ......................................................... 1-28
New Product Warranty.......................................... 1-28
Out-of-Warranty Product Repairs ......................... 1-28
Troubleshooting Fee ............................................. 1-29
Shipping ................................................................ 1-29
North American Service ........................................ 1-29
Chapter 2 System Overview ..................... 2-1
ADS FlowShark Triton Flow Monitor ........................... 2-4
Communications...................................................... 2-4
Processor Board ...................................................... 2-8
Connector Ports ..................................................... 2-10
Power .................................................................... 2-12
iv ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Sensors ......................................................................... 2-15
Peak Combo Sensor .............................................. 2-15
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor ....................................... 2-18
Surface Combo Sensor .......................................... 2-20
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor ................................ 2-24
Chapter 3 Sensor Installation and
Connection……………………………..... 3-1
Investigating Site Characteristics ................................... 3-4
Flow Hydraulics ...................................................... 3-4
Pipe and Manhole Characteristics ........................... 3-5
Installing the Sensors in the Pipe.................................... 3-7
Standard Installation................................................ 3-7
Special Installations .............................................. 3-33
Securing the Sensor Cables in the Pipe and Manhole .. 3-54
Connecting the Sensors to the Monitor ........................ 3-57
Securing the Dryer Tube to the Monitor ............... 3-59
Chapter 4 Communication… .................... 4-1
GSM-Based Wireless Communication ........................... 4-3
Installing the GSM Module ............................................ 4-5
Gathering Parts and Supplies .................................. 4-6
Installing the Wireless Antenna............................... 4-8
Installing the SIM Card ......................................... 4-12
Installing the GSM Module ................................... 4-16
Installing an EMU ........................................................ 4-19
Installing the Communication Cable ..................... 4-19
Installing the EMU ................................................ 4-25
Installing an EMUX ..................................................... 4-38
Installing the Communication Cable ..................... 4-38
Installing the EMUX ............................................. 4-39
Connecting the Communication Cable to the
Monitor .......................................................... 4-44
Installing a Wireless Antenna................................ 4-45
Connecting the RTU to the EMUX ....................... 4-47
Providing External Power to the EMUX ............... 4-47
Connecting to the Monitor in the Field (Direct
Connection) .................................................... 4-50
Table of Contents
v
Chapter 5 External Power…. .................... 5-1
Installation ...................................................................... 5-2
DC Power Requirements and Consumption ............ 5-3
Installing and Wiring an ADS Power Supply to
the EMU or EMUX.......................................... 5-4
Chapter 6 Configuration and Activation .. 6-1
Hardware and Software Compatibility .................... 6-2
Configuring the Monitor Location ................................. 6-3
Starting the Profile Software ................................... 6-3
Creating a Monitor Location ................................... 6-5
Adding a Second Monitoring Point ....................... 6-10
Creating an Installation Table ............................... 6-11
Selecting and Editing Devices ............................... 6-17
Setting the Communication Parameters ........................ 6-59
Activating the Monitor ................................................. 6-64
Setting Up the RTU to Retrieve the Current Data
through Modbus ............................................. 6-68
Designating the Data for Retrieval ........................ 6-68
Verifying the Modbus Output Data ....................... 6-68
Running Sensor Diagnostics ......................................... 6-70
Ultrasonic Depth Diagnostics................................ 6-72
Pressure Depth Diagnostics ................................... 6-75
Velocity Diagnostics ............................................. 6-77
Smart Depth Diagnostics ....................................... 6-80
Temperature Diagnostics....................................... 6-83
Activating the Monitor .......................................... 6-85
Collecting Data from the Monitor ................................ 6-87
Upgrading the Monitor Firmware................................. 6-97
Viewing Diagnostic and Data Logs ............................ 6-100
Chapter 7 Monitor Installation .................. 7-1
Mounting the Monitor on Manhole Rung ....................... 7-3
Mounting the Monitor to the Manhole Wall................... 7-4
Mounting the Monitor to the Manhole Rim.................... 7-7
vi ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Chapter 8 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting………… ..................... 8-1
Maintaining the System Components ............................. 8-2
Gathering Replacement Parts and Supplies ............. 8-2
Inspecting the Monitor ............................................ 8-3
Inspecting, Cleaning, and Handling the Sensors ... 8-17
Replacing the SIM Card and Desiccant in the
GSM Module ................................................. 8-21
Replacing EMU Components ................................ 8-25
Replacing the SIM Card in the EMUX ................. 8-30
Replacing the Regulator and Fuses in the
Monitor .......................................................... 8-31
Troubleshooting ........................................................... 8-38
General Monitor Problems .................................... 8-39
Communication Problems ..................................... 8-43
Ultrasonic Depth Subsystem ................................. 8-47
Upward Depth Subsystem ..................................... 8-52
Peak Velocity Subsystem ...................................... 8-55
Surface Velocity Subsystem .................................. 8-58
Pressure Depth Subsystem .................................... 8-60
Temperature Subsystem ........................................ 8-61
Appendix A Specifications…… ................ A-1
FlowShark Triton Flow Monitor ............................ A-1
Intrinsically-Safe Sensors ....................................... A-5
Direct Connect Cable ........................................... A-12
Wireless GSM Module......................................... A-13
External Modem Unit ........................................... A-14
External Modem Unit/Multiplexer ....................... A-15
ADS Power Supply .............................................. A-16
Appendix B Part Numbers…… ................. B-1
Appendix C Monitor Activity Codes ......... C-1
Table of Contents
vii
Appendix D Modbus/EMUX Configuration
and Diagnostics……………… ............... D-1
Setting up PC-to-EMUX Communication .............. D-2
Running the Onboard Diagnostics.......................... D-3
Modbus Data Registers .......................................... D-7
EMUX LED Window .......................................... D-10
Appendix E System Configuration and
Setup to Support the Telog Ru-33 ....... E-1
Configuring the Monitor to Support the Ru-33 ....... E-2
Connecting the Monitor to the Ru-33 ...................... E-2
1-1
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
The ADS Intrinsically-Safe FlowShark Triton flow monitor
measures open channel flow in sanitary sewers, storm sewers,
combined sewers, and other environments to assist municipalities
and other industry in addressing the following issues:

Planning sewer systems (sizing and rehabilitation)

Reducing infiltration and inflow (I/I)

Monitoring combined sewer overflows (CSOs)

Detecting and monitoring surcharges

Managing inter-agency billing

Monitoring sewage handling facilities (wastewater treatment
plants and pump stations)
The battery- or externally-powered FlowShark Triton monitor
provides exceptional accuracy and reliability in measuring openchannel flow depth and velocity to determine flow rate (quantity) in
pipes. This flow data is the essential element required to
successfully perform investigative, analytical, and reporting
activities.
This manual offers detailed instructions on installing, maintaining,
and troubleshooting the FlowShark Triton flow monitor, sensors,
and communication hardware.
1-2 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Intrinsic Safety
Intrinsic safety is an electronic hardware protection concept that
ensures there are no conditions under which the equipment can
operate that could cause a release of energy sufficient to ignite a
hazardous gas or dust mixture. Devices that meet the low power,
current-limited design criteria are deemed Intrinsically Safe (IS).
Special design, testing, quality, and inspection rules apply to
manufacturers and users of IS equipment due to the critical nature
of their deployment in hazardous areas. Areas where hazardous
conditions can be expected to be present on a constant basis are
classified (rated) as Class I, Division 1 or Zone 0.
The FlowShark Triton flow monitor (Models 8000-FST and 8000FST-60C) is certified for use in North America in areas where the
Class/Division system is observed. The FlowShark Triton has been
tested to worldwide IECEx (International Electrotechnical
Commission Explosive) standards and is certified for use in areas
requiring Class I, Division 1, equipment. The IECEx scheme
allows demonstrated compliance for use in Class I, Division 1,
Group C & D or Zone 0, areas in the following countries.
United States
Germany
Poland
Australia
Hungary
Romania
Brazil
India
Russia
Canada
Italy
Singapore
China
Japan
Slovenia
Croatia
Korea
South Africa
Czech Republic
Malaysia
Sweden
Denmark
Netherlands
Switzerland
Finland
New Zealand
Turkey
France
Norway
United Kingdom
The FlowShark Triton has also been certified for use in Zone 0 via
testing to ATEX standards.
Introduction
1-3
The FlowShark Triton flow monitor has been tested to CSA
(Canadian Standards Association) standards and certified for use in
Canada in Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive Systems – For
Hazardous Locations. The CSA certification allows demonstrated
compliance for use in Ex ia IIB T4 Ga areas in Canada.
It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure that the certification(s)
provided for the ADS equipment meets the applicable regulatory
requirements.
Note: FlowShark Triton models include only the 8000FST and 8000-FST-60C.
FlowShark Triton System Certification
The FlowShark Triton unit and associated telemetry equipment are
certified for use only with approved ADS sensors, communication
cables, and telemetry equipment. Connection of any non-approved
devices could result in unsafe operation and will immediately void
the warranty and IS certification.
Note: Connecting the Telog® Ru-33 to the ADS
FlowShark Triton is an approved application and,
therefore, will not void the FlowShark Triton warranty.
However, because the Telog unit is not IS certified, the
installation will not be considered intrinsically safe if the
Ru-33 is installed in the manhole with the monitor.
Sensors
The FlowShark Triton monitor supports several approved IS
sensors that vary in measurement methodology, redundancy, and
other features. The monitor is approved for accommodating up to
two of the same or different types of IS sensors. Following are the
approved IS sensors:

Peak Combo Sensor Performs upward ultrasonic depth,
pressure depth, and peak velocity measurement and mounts at
1-4 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
or near the bottom of the pipe under the flow surface (ADS p/n
-CS4-05-35, 8K-CS4-15-35, or 8K-CS4-30-1H).

Surface Combo Sensor Performs downward ultrasonic
depth, surcharge pressure depth, surcharge peak velocity, and
surface velocity measurement and mounts at the top (or crown)
of the pipe above the flow (ADS p/n 8K-CS5-V2-05-30 or 8KCS5-V2-15-30).

Ultrasonic Depth Sensor (ultrasonic and optional
pressure depth only) Performs downward ultrasonic depth
and pressure depth (optional) measurement alone and mounts
at the top (or crown) of the pipe above the flow (ADS p/n 8KCS3-V0-00-30, 8K-CS3-V0-05-30, or 8K-CS3-V0-15-30).

Slimline Peak Combo Sensor Performs upward ultrasonic
depth and peak velocity measurement and mounts at or near the
bottom of the pipe under the flow surface (ADS p/n 8K-CS435).
Extension cables are available for these sensors in lengths up to
maximum of 300 feet (91 m).
Note: Detailed descriptions and specifications for the
sensors are available in Chapter 2, System Overview, and
Appendix A, Specifications.
Power
The FlowShark Triton flow monitor can be powered by an internal
12-volt IS battery pack (ADS p/n 8000-0043) or an external DC
power source through an external modem unit (EMU, ADS p/n
3800-0148) or EMU/multiplexer (EMUX, ADS p/n 106226E)).
Telemetry
Wireless communication is available to the FlowShark Triton
monitor via connection to an IS quad-band GSM/GPRS module
(ADS p/n 8000-0052), an EMU (ADS p/n 3800-0148), or an
EMUX (ADS p/n 106226E). Connecting the FlowShark Triton to
the Telog RTU (Model Ru-33) also supports wireless
communication via the Telog “passthrough” mode.
Introduction
1-5
The GSM module is certified for installation and operation in the
hazardous area and draws its power from the FlowShark Triton.
The antenna may be located either inside or outside the manhole;
however, ADS recommends installing the antenna outside the
manhole to maximize signal strength. Several antenna models are
available to mitigate signal strength issues.
The EMU is mounted outside the hazardous area and receives
power from an external DC power source supplied by the user. It is
delivered with the antenna installed on the inside of the EMU
enclosure. However, the antenna may require installation outside
the EMU if the material and/or construction of the enclosure and/or
housing in which the EMU enclosure is installed impedes the signal
from the wireless provider.
The EMUX is mounted outside the hazardous area and receives
power from an external DC power source supplied by the user. It is
delivered without an antenna; therefore, an antenna must be
attached to the EMUX. However, it may require installation outside
the enclosure in which the EMUX is installed if the material and
construction of the enclosure impedes the signal from the wireless
provider.
The Telog Ru-33 is mounted next to the FlowShark Triton in the
hazardous area and connected to the monitor using the Triton-Telog
Comm Cable (ADS p/n 8000-0054-01). However, please note that,
because the Telog unit does not possess IS certification, the
installation will not be considered intrinsically safe if the Telog unit
is installed in the manhole with the monitor.
Installation and IS Considerations
When installing the FlowShark Triton flow monitor, carefully
follow any local regulations for the installation of IS equipment.
For example, many clients only allow the use of special hazardous
area tools (flashlights, radios, etc.) in manholes. Some clients will
not allow the use of an electric drill, either battery-powered or ACpowered, in a manhole. In this case, air (pneumatic) tools must be
1-6 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
used. When in doubt as to the applicable regulations, check with
the client or the client’s designated safety representative.
Special Conditions for Safe Use
During the ATEX/IECEx/CSA approval process, certain conditions
are set forth that must be observed when using the certified
equipment. These Special Conditions for Safe Use can be found in
the body of each certification (referenced in this manual).
Following is a summary of these Safe Use Instructions:

Parts of the enclosure may be non-conducting and may generate
an ignition-capable level of electrostatic charge under certain
extreme conditions. Therefore, do not install this equipment in
a location where it may be subject to external conditions (such
as high-pressure steam or dust) that may cause a buildup of
electrostatic charge on non-conducting surfaces.

As aluminum is used at the accessible surface of this unit, in the
event of rare incidents, ignition sources due to impact and
friction sparks may occur. This shall be considered when it is
being installed, particularly in locations that require equipment
with a Group II Ga level of protection.

The equipment (ADS Models 8000-FST and 8000-FST-60C)
shall be used in the hazardous area only when fully assembled.
Do not perform any maintenance of internal parts, replacement
of battery packs, or replacement of fuses unless the unit is
located in a safe area.

(applicable to the USB Serial Interface) Measures shall be
taken to limit transient over voltages to the USB Serial
Interface to an appropriately low level in accordance with
Overvoltage Category 1 (IEC 60664-1)

The equipment shall be installed as per installation drawing
8000BK0009.

The external modem unit (EMU) or EMU/multiplexer (EMUX)
may only be mounted in a non-hazardous location.
Introduction
1-7
Other Conditions for Safe Use

The ADS Models 8000-FST and 8000-FST-60C shall use only
the 12-volt IS Battery Pack (ADS p/n 8000-0043) for internal
power.

Only ADS-approved sensors shall be connected to the ADS
Models 8000-FST and 8000-FST-60C: ADS sensor types 8KCS1, 8K-CS3, 8K-CS4, and 8K-CS5.
Note: The 8K-CS1 is no longer available; however, ADS
will continue to provide support for this sensor.

The only communication devices that may be connected to the
COMM connector on the FlowShark Triton are the GSM
Wireless Module (ADS p/n 8000-0052), the External 3G Cell
Modem (ADS p/n 8000-0430), the EMU/EMUX
Communication Cable (ADS p/n 106227B), the Direct Connect
Interface (ADS p/n 8000-0054), and the USB Serial Interface
(ADS p/n 8000-0337).
1-8 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Maintenance Restrictions
As mentioned earlier, all ADS FlowShark Triton flow monitors are
manufactured to meet IS standards. The monitor’s IS certification
can be voided instantly if proper maintenance and service
procedures are not followed. ADS must restrict certain
maintenance tasks to ADS IS-certified technicians.
ADS-certified technicians carefully inspect and document their
repairs of IS monitors. This inspection and documentation process
provides legal protection should the monitor's performance or safety
be in question.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, please refer to this
manual for troubleshooting guidelines. The following maintenance
procedures may be performed in the field, but they must be
performed as described in this manual:

Install and swap monitor

Install and swap sensors

Install and swap battery pack

Swap fuses in power regulator in monitor

Install and swap GSM wireless module

Install and swap EMU and modem in EMU

Install and swap EMUX

Install and swap SIM cards (EMU, EMUX, and GSM module)

Replace pressure depth sensor dryer tube and desiccant beads

Replace desiccant pack (GSM module)

Clean sensors

Confirm sensors
Note: Please note that, in all applications, only ADS IScertified Service Technicians are authorized to perform
component-level service on the FlowShark Triton.
Introduction
1-9
If you have any questions about the procedures, warranty
information, or the level of service you are allowed to perform on a
monitor, contact ADS through the contact information listed at the
end of this chapter.
1-10 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Warnings, Certifications, GSM/GPRS
Compliance, and Conformity
Manhole and sewer system work involves confined space entry and
is inherently dangerous. Therefore, installers and technicians
should comply with all federal, state, and municipal regulations
concerning confined space entry.
In addition, personnel installing and maintaining this equipment
should follow all guidelines presented in this manual concerning
monitor installation and maintenance. Failure to strictly adhere to
these guidelines can result in personal injury and/or damage to the
monitor.
Changes or Modifications
Changes or modifications to the FlowShark Triton flow monitor not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance will
void the IS certification.
Personnel performing installation of the FlowShark Triton flow
monitor should carefully follow the guidelines contained in this
manual when installing and maintaining the monitor. Failure to
strictly adhere to these guidelines can result in personal injury and
can cause damage to the monitor, which would invalidate its
warranty.
The FlowShark Triton flow monitor is designed to be installed in
combined and sanitary sewer lines and manholes. This installation
work is inherently dangerous. All applicable safety guidelines
should be followed and carried out by at least two fully trained and
qualified persons.
Introduction
1-11
Control Drawing
This drawing depicts the allowed interconnections for the
FlowShark Triton. It is intended for use by inspection professionals
for audit certificate compliance; however, it is a good tool to
understand the FlowShark Triton flow monitoring system structure.
This drawing is divided in two sections with a match point
indicated.
Control Drawing – Part 1 (right side from part 1 continues on part 2)
1-12 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Control Drawing – Part 2 (left side on 2 continues from drawing 1)
Note: These are excerpts from an agency-controlled
document for illustration purposes only. Changes to the
base controlled document require agency approval. For a
full-size copy of this drawing, please contact ADS and
request drawing number 8000BK0009-CERT.
Note: The Telog Ru-33 can be connected to the COMM
port on the FlowShark Triton monitor using the TelogTriton Comm Cable (ADS p/n 8000-0054-01). However,
this configuration has not been included on this drawing
because the Telog unit is not certified for IS operation.
Therefore, an installation involving this configuration will
not be considered intrinsically safe, unless the Ru-33 is
installed outside the hazardous area.
Introduction
1-13
GSM/GPRS Modem Information
Wireless telemetry is provided via attachment of the ADS GSM
Module to the FlowShark Triton monitor. The GSM Module
contains a third-party, FCC-approved, commercial GSM/GPRS
modem. Integration of the modem into the GSM Module was
performed in accordance with guidelines set forth in the third
party’s Integration Manual in order to maintain the FCC approval.
Use of the modem, as installed in the ADS Module, is considered a
fixed Mobile wireless application, meaning the module is capable of
being moved between locations. However, it is NOT considered a
Portable device, which indicates it is used in close proximity to a
user’s body (like a handset). Users of the ADS GSM Module must
maintain a distance from the antenna of at least 7.87 inches (200
mm) when the unit is operational.
Users cannot provide their own antennas due to strict limitations on
antenna gains and other variables that may produce a dangerous RF
condition and violate IS and FCC requirements. Only antennas
provided by ADS for use with the GSM Module may be used.
European ATEX Hazardous Area Compliance
The following instructions apply to equipment covered by
certificates numbered Sira 09ATEX2027X (FlowShark Triton,
Direct Connect Interface, and Combo Sensors CSX Series),
09ATEX2053X (IS GSM modem), and 03ATEX2482 (IS Comm
Interface). Reference European ATEX Directive 94/9/EC, Annex
II, 1.0.6:

The equipment may be used with flammable gases and vapors
with apparatus groups IIA and IIB and with temperature classes
T3 (152oC), T4, T5, and T6.

The equipment is only certified for use in ambient temperatures
in the range of -20oC to +60oC and should not be used outside
this range.
1-14 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual

The certificate number has an ‘X’ suffix, which indicates that
special conditions apply to installation and use. Those installing
or inspecting this equipment must have access to the contents
of the certificate.

Installation shall be carried out in accordance with the
applicable code of practice by suitably-trained personnel.

Repair of this equipment shall be carried out in accordance
with the applicable code of practice.

If the equipment is likely to come into contact with aggressive
substances, then it is the responsibility of the user to take
suitable precautions that prevent it from being adversely
affected, thus ensuring that the type of protection is not
compromised.
 Aggressive substances such as acidic liquids or gases that
may attack metals, or solvents that may affect polymeric
materials
 Suitable precautions such as regular checks as part of
routine inspections or establishing from the material’s data
sheet that it is resistant to specific chemicals

There are no special inspections or maintenance conditions
other than a periodic check.

FlowShark Triton monitors and GSM modem modules
delivered outside the U.S. must bear the following label to
substantiate conformance to ATEX standards as certified
through Sira Certification Services:
Introduction
Sira FlowShark Triton Certification Label
Sira Combo Sensor CSX Series Certification Label
1-15
1-16 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Sira Direct Connect Interface Certification Label
Sira GSM Certification Label
Sira Communication Interface (EMU/EMUX) Certification Label
EC Type Examination Certificates Sira 09ATEX2027X, Sira
09ATEX2053X, and Sira 03ATEX2482 can also be used to
substantiate conformance to applicable EU laws for IS equipment.
Introduction
The following pages provide a copy of the first page of each
certificate.
Note: These copies were current at the time of
publication of this manual. To access the latest version
and entire content of each certificate, please contact ADS.
1-17
1-18 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
First page of the FlowShark Triton ATEX Certificate
Introduction
First page of the GSM Module ATEX Certificate
1-19
1-20 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
First page of the Communications Interface Unit (from the EMU/EMUX)
ATEX Certificate
Introduction
1-21
IECEx (International Electrotechnical
Commission Explosive) Hazardous Area
Compliance
The FlowShark Triton is covered by certificates IECEx SIR
09.0020X (FlowShark Triton) and IECEx SIR 09.0021X (IS GSM
modem). Reference IECEx standards IEC 60079-0 : 2004; IEC
60079-11 : 2006; and IEC 60079-26 : 2006. These IECEx
certificates can also be used to substantiate conformance to
applicable international standards for IS equipment. The following
pages provide a copy of the first page of each certificate.
Note: The copies were current at the time of publication
of this manual. To access the latest version and entire
content of each certificate, please contact ADS.
1-22 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
First page of the FlowShark Triton IECEx Certificate of Conformity
Introduction
First page of the GSM Module IECEx Certificate of Conformity
1-23
1-24 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
CSA Hazardous Area Compliance
The FlowShark Triton is covered by certificate CSA 2517095
(FlowShark Triton and Combo Sensors, IS GSM modem, and
Direct Connect Interface). Reference CSA requirements C22.2 No.
0-10; CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60079-0:11; and CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.
60079-11:11.
The following CSA certificate can also be used to substantiate
conformance to applicable Canadian standards for IS equipment:
Note: The certificate displayed on the following page was
current at the time of publication of this manual. To access
the latest certificates, please contact ADS.
Introduction
CSA Certificate of Compliance
1-25
1-26 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Installation and Configuration
Following is the general procedure for installing and configuring a
FlowShark Triton monitor. Refer to Chapters 3 through 7 for more
details.
 Investigate Site Characteristics
•
Flow Hydraulics
•
Pipe and Manhole Characteristics
 Prepare Monitor and Sensors for Installation
•
Assemble Ring (when applicable)
•
Mount Sensors to Ring or Special Bands
•
Secure Sensor Cables to Ring or Special Bands
 Install the Sensors in the Pipe
•
Install Ring or Band in Pipe
•
Secure Sensor Cables Along Pipe and Up Manhole
 Install Monitor in Manhole
•
Connect Sensors to Monitor
 Establish Wireless or On-Site Communication with
Monitor
Note: This manual provides instructions on performing
the remaining activities through the ADS Profile®
Software. However, ADS also offers another software
utility, Qstart™, through which these tasks may be
accomplished. Qstart primarily serves as a streamlined
configuration, activation, and diagnostic tool for setting up
monitors quickly in the field. It also provides several other
powerful and useful functions, such as data collection,
archival, and display. Although this manual does not
include instructions on completing these remaining
procedures using Qstart, the application’s integrated
Introduction
1-27
online help provides comprehensive information on
successfully conducting these tasks.
 Configure Monitor (Profile software)
•
Create Monitor Location
•
Create Installation Table
•
Select and Edit Devices
 Set Communication Parameters (Profile software)
 Activate Monitor (Profile software)
 Run Diagnostics and Perform Confirmations (Profile
software)
1-28 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Product Warranty
This section includes the warranty information for the ADS
FlowShark Triton flow monitor.
New Product Warranty
All new products manufactured by ADS will be free from defects in
material and workmanship for up to one (1) year following the
delivery date to the customer. During this warranty period, upon
satisfactory proof of a defect, the product may be returned for repair
or replacement, at ADS’s sole option. No returns will be accepted
unless the Owner has prepaid shipping and has received a prior
authorization return number from ADS. Please contact ADS to
obtain an authorization return number. Warranty repairs and
replacements will be performed only by ADS. Any unauthorized
repair or replacement will void this product warranty. Any repair or
replacement will be covered by this new product warranty for ninety
(90) days from the date that such repaired or replaced product is
shipped from ADS. This warranty is available only if the product
has been installed and operated in accordance with the procedures
outlined in the ADS Operations and Maintenance Manual. This
warranty does not apply to damage by catastrophes of nature, fire,
explosion, acts of God (including, but not limited to, lightning
damage and power surges), accidents, improper use or service,
damage during transportation, or other similar causes beyond
ADS’s control.
Out-of-Warranty Product Repairs
After the new product warranty expires, a product may be returned,
at the owner’s prepaid expense, to ADS for repair. The owner will
pay for all parts and labor associated with the repair. Any repair part
Introduction
1-29
will be covered by the new product warranty for 90 days from the
date of shipment from ADS.
Troubleshooting Fee
ADS will charge a troubleshooting fee if the reported product defect
cannot be found and/or the reported defect is not due to a defect in
materials or workmanship.
Shipping
All repaired products will be returned via transportation prepaid by
ADS. Import duties, fees, taxes, and other related charges are the
responsibility of the owner.
THIS IS THE ONLY WARRANTY FOR ADS PRODUCTS. NO
OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
MERCHANTABILITY. PRODUCT REPAIR OR
REPLACEMENT IS THE ONLY REMEDY. IN NO EVENT
WILL ADS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, OR SPECIAL DAMAGES.
Warranty Return Information for International
Customers
Please use U.S. Harmonized Schedule Number 9801.00.1012 on
your shipping documents and customs forms to indicate “U.S.
made goods being returned for repair”.
North American Service
Contact ADS customer service by telephone at 1-877-237-9585 or
email at [email protected]
2-1
CHAPTER 2
System Overview
The ADS® FlowShark® Triton flow monitor supports four flow
measurement devices for gathering flow data:
•
Peak Combo Sensor This sensor, which mounts at or near
the bottom of the pipe, contains an upward-looking ultrasonic
depth sensor, Doppler peak velocity sensor, and pressure depth
sensor.
•
Surface Combo Sensor This sensor, which mounts at the
top of the pipe, contains an ultrasonic depth sensor, a surface
velocity sensor, a surcharge peak velocity sensor, and surcharge
pressure depth sensor.
•
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor This sensor, which mounts at the
top of the pipe, contains only a quadredundant ultrasonic depth
sensor and an optional pressure depth sensor.
•
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor This sensor, which mounts
at or near the bottom of the pipe, contains an upward-looking
ultrasonic depth sensor and a Doppler peak velocity sensor.
The monitor receives the raw flow depth and velocity data from the
sensors based on a defined time interval and then processes the
data, which may involve calculating the flow rate. The monitor
memory can store up to 150 days of data based on logging 6 entities
at a 15-minute sample rate. The storage capacity varies according
to the number of sensors attached to the monitor, the number of
entities stored, the rate at which the entity data is logged, and the
functions activated for the sensors. This data is available to the user
2-2 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
for collection, further processing, analysis, and reporting. These
reports include critical information that can assist municipalities and
other industries in planning improvements and additions to sewer
systems, improving the accuracy of billing information, and
providing overall management of sewer systems.
The FlowShark Triton monitor and sensors are primarily designed
for monitoring flow in sanitary and storm sewers. The monitor
mounts to the manhole rim or wall slightly below the manhole cover
or to a rung on the ladder; the sensors typically attach to a ring or
band installed in the sewer pipe a short distance upstream from the
manhole invert. The FlowShark Triton monitor can support up to
two sensors at one or two separate locations in the pipe. These
sensors display exceptional durability and accuracy, even under
harsh and turbulent flow monitoring conditions.
Typical FlowShark Triton flow monitoring system installation
System Overview
2-3
Communication between the monitor and the user’s office or field
computer can occur over TCP/IP (remote, wireless communication)
or a direct connect interface cable (on-site communication).
The FlowShark Triton is powered either by a 12-volt IS battery
pack or through external power. Externally-powered units receive
power from an independent source through an intermediate EMU
(external modem unit) or EMUX (EMU/Multiplexer) and support
wireless communication.
The EMUX also serves as a Modbus interface to provide real-time
data from the monitor to a SCADA (supervisory control and data
acquisition) or other process control system through an RTU
(remote terminal unit) or another comparable instrument.
The ADS Profile® and Qstart software applications enable the
user to configure and communicate with the monitor for activation,
data collection, and diagnostic purposes. Configuration involves
defining the Location Information File (LIF) for storage in the user's
local directory and building the necessary code and variables for the
site. The LIF contains information such as pipe characteristics,
monitor identification, active sensors, sensor offsets, data log rate,
and other parameters necessary for measuring the flow both
accurately and efficiently.
Activation involves downloading the site-specific information from
the LIF (stored in the user's local directory or network drive) to the
monitor. It also includes initiating monitor activities such as taking
sensor readings, logging flow data, and managing event notification.
Profile also enables the user to process the flow data, generate
graphical and tabular reports, organize data in the user's local
directory, and maintain logs of communication between the monitor
and the user's PC.
Note: Refer to the Profile User's Guide #950015 (version
B4 or greater) or the Profile or Qstart online help for more
information.
2-4 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
ADS FlowShark Triton Flow Monitor
The FlowShark Triton flow monitor is contained in a waterproof,
airtight, cylindrical, high-impact ABS plastic canister housing. It
contains a single processor board attached to the inside of the
aluminum monitor top, a power regulator built into a protective
dome, and a replaceable battery pack.
Note: The FlowShark Triton also can receive power from
an external DC source when used in conjunction with an
ADS EMU (External Modem Unit) or EMUX (EMU/
Multiplexer).
Exploded view of FlowShark Triton (processor board resides between the
monitor top and protective regulator dome)
Communications
ADS offers both remote (wireless) and on-site (direct)
communication options for the FlowShark Triton monitor.
Wireless Communication
Wireless communication occurs over the GSM/GPRS cellular
network using TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol). GPRS TCP/IP facilitates high-speed, low-cost, efficient
digital communication in areas with GSM/GPRS coverage using
static IP address services.
System Overview
2-5
Remote communication with the monitor occurs over the network
through one of three kinds of modems:

ADS GSM Module The GSM module (ADS p/n 8000-0052)
is typically installed in the manhole at the monitor location.
GSM Module
2-6 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual

ADS External Modem Unit (EMU) The EMU (ADS p/n
3800-0148) is installed outside the manhole near an external
power source.
EMU
System Overview

2-7
ADS EMUX (External Modem Unit/Multiplexer) The
EMUX (ADS p/n 106226E) is installed outside the manhole in
a weatherproof enclosure or indoors near an RTU (remote
terminal unit) and/or external power source. The EMUX
serves as both a conduit through which the monitor can receive
operating power from an external DC source and a
communication interface through which the monitor can
provide flow data serially to the SCADA RTU (real-time) and
wirelessly to the ADS Profile or IntelliServe® software.
EMUX
Direct Communication
On-site (or direct) communication with all monitors is available
through an IS PC communication direct connect cable (ADS p/n
8000-0054).
Modbus
Modbus is a protocol that allows for communication to occur
among multiple devices connected to the same network. It often is
used to connect a supervisory computer with a remote terminal unit
(RTU) in supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA)
systems. ADS uses the Modbus protocol to enable a SCADA RTU
2-8 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
to interface with a FlowShark Triton directly through an EMUX
(ADS p/n 106226E) to obtain current data. The multiplexer in the
EMUX facilitates both serial communication between a flow
monitor and the RTU and wireless communication between a flow
monitor and the ADS Profile or IntelliServe® software application.
ADS also uses Modbus protocol to allow a Telog® Ru-33 to request
data from a FlowShark Triton directly through a Triton – Telog
Comm Cable (ADS p/n 8000-0054-01). Refer to Appendix E,
System Configuration and Setup to Support the Telog Ru-33, for
more information.
Processor Board
FlowShark Triton top with processor board attached
System Overview
2-9
The processor board is the source of all monitor activity. The board
is responsible for all of the monitor's high-level functions, including
the following:

Managing user communication with the monitor

Controlling the timing at which the sensors fire (i.e., take
readings)

Retrieving and storing sensor data

Maintaining the monitor time and date

Performing power management

Storing the parameters required to accomplish the
associated system operations

Transmitting the stored and current data to the user's PC

Initiating event notification through alarms
The board allocates portions of memory to firmware (embedded
software in the monitor that can be upgraded remotely) and data
storage. The board also includes the monitor clock, random access
memory (RAM), and Flash. The monitor uses RAM while taking
readings and processing the flow data. The RAM then downloads
the data to NVRAM or non-volatile memory, which is backed up by
an on-board battery. Firmware programs concerning operation are
stored in Flash.
2-10 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Connector Ports
A
CH
NN E L
A
CH
2
NN E L
1
0518
II 1 G
Ex ia IIB T4 Ga
Sira 09ATEX2027X
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST
ST ONLY
TE
M
AX
. 12 PS
Use only battery pack 106152
I
R
CO M M
W W W.A
D S E N V.C O M
Monitor top with sensor and communication connector ports
The connector ports located on top of the monitor can receive up to
two sensors and one communication device:

Channel 1 and Channel 2 Ports These ports can receive
up to two of the following sensors:
 Peak Combo Sensor
 Surface Combo Sensor
 Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
 Slimline Peak Combo Sensor
Note: The channel ports on the FlowShark Triton receive
any combination of two sensors, including two of the same
sensor type. However, the sensors attached to the channel
ports must accurately reflect the channel assignments for
the sensor devices in Profile or Qstart. In addition, two
sensors of the same type may not be assigned to the same
monitoring point. Refer to Connecting Sensors to the
System Overview
2-11
Monitor in Chapter 3, Sensor Installation and Connection,
for more information.

COMM (Communication) Port This port supports the
following communication options:
 Wireless communications with the FlowShark Triton
monitor through a GSM/GPRS modem typically installed
in the manhole, an EMU installed outside the manhole
adjacent to an external power source, or an EMUX
installed outside the manhole adjacent to an RTU and/or
external power source
 Direct on-site communications with the FlowShark Triton
monitor through the Profile or Qstart software installed on
a field computer using a direct connect cable
The connector ports are keyed to receive only the proper sensor or
communication cables.
The FlowShark Triton also has an air pressure valve that exists only
for factory and maintenance testing.
2-12 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Power
Internal Power
Internal power is supplied to the FlowShark Triton flow monitor by
an internal 12-volt IS battery pack (ADS p/n 8000-0043). The
battery pack resides within the FlowShark Triton enclosure and
powers monitor operations. An on-board backup battery sustains
the monitor memory (RAM).
FlowShark Triton 12-volt battery
The power regulator, built into the dome assembly that covers and
protects the processor board, is critical to intrinsically safe
operation. It regulates the voltage supplied from the internal IS
battery pack to the FlowShark Triton, ensuring that the monitor
always operates within its IS certification requirements. It also
includes replaceable fuses and current-limiting components that will
limit and/or interrupt power if a fault condition occurs.
System Overview
2-13
Power regulator dome with IS regulator board
The user receives a warning when the internal 12-volt IS battery
pack drops below a specified threshold (ADS recommends 7.5
volts).
External Power
The FlowShark Triton flow monitor also can receive power from an
external DC source through an external modem unit (EMU, ADS
p/n 3800-0148) or external modem unit/multiplexer (EMUX, ADS
p/n 106226E) located outside the manhole near the power source.
These units regulate the power coming to the monitor and provide
the communication interface between the user and the monitor. The
EMU houses the GSM/GPRS modem, wireless antenna, and
communication interface/barrier box. The EMUX, serving as the
communication interface/barrier box, houses the modem. The
wireless antenna mounts to a port on top of the EMUX.
Note: The standard FlowShark Triton flow monitor (ADS
p/n 8000-FST-60C includes an internal 12-volt IS battery
pack that must be disconnected or completely removed
from the monitor before connecting the external DC power
source to the monitor. However, ADS offers another
version of the FlowShark Triton flow monitor (ADS p/n
2-14 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
8000-FST-EP-60C) specifically designed for receiving
external DC power that does not include the battery pack.
Powering the monitor through an external source is particularly
advantageous at a location that requires logging an extensive
amount of data at a short interval and eliminates the periodic need
for battery replacement and disposal.
System Overview
2-15
Sensors
The FlowShark Triton flow monitor can support up to 2 of the 4
sensor types available (3 combination sensors and a stand-alone
ultrasonic depth sensor) at one time to gather raw flow data. It also
can support 2 of the same sensor type at one time. Using
independent measurement techniques, ultrasonic and pressure depth
sensors collect information used to determine the depth of the flow.
Velocity sensors use Doppler technology to determine the average
or peak velocity of the flow. This variety of sensor options
provides the versatility of measuring the depth and velocity of the
flow from the top or bottom of the pipe and/or from within or
outside of the flow.
A sewer system's hydraulics are much more stable and uniform in
the incoming pipe than in the manhole invert or outgoing pipe.
Therefore, the sensors mount to a stainless steel expandable ring or
stainless steel bands installed in the pipe upstream from the
manhole. Installing them upstream minimizes the hydraulic effects
and erroneous data readings caused by foamy waters, flow waves,
sewer noise, non-laminar flow, and obstructions in the manhole.
Peak Combo Sensor
The Peak Combo Sensor with a standard 35-foot (10.6-m) or 100foot (30.5-m) cable (ADS p/n 8K-CS4-XX-35/1H) typically mounts
at the bottom of the pipe and measures ultrasonic depth, pressure
depth, and peak velocity using three independent sensors.
2-16 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Peak Combo Sensor
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
To provide the depth of the flow, the sensor sends an ultrasonic
signal upward that bounces off the water surface – air interface.
The travel time from the sensor to the flow surface and back is
converted to distance, which translates into the depth of the flow.
Upward ultrasonic depth signals bouncing off water surface
Pressure Depth Sensor
A pressure transducer in the Peak Combo Sensor also measures the
depth of the flow over the sensor. The monitor can use this data for
comparison with other depth measurement devices in less than fullpipe conditions. The pressure depth sensor also can measure depths
System Overview
2-17
greater than full pipe that may extend up into the manhole during
surcharge conditions.
Water pressure impacts a diaphragm in the transducer that varies an
electrical current. This current is digitized by a sensor processor
board and the value is sent to the monitor processor board. A vent
tube on the back of the diaphragm equalizes for atmospheric
pressure. Three versions of pressure transducers are available with
this combo sensor: 0 - 5 PSI (0 - 0.34 Bar), 0 - 15 PSI (0 - 1.03
Bar), and 0 - 30 PSI (0 - 2.07 Bar).
Peak Velocity Sensor
To obtain peak velocity, this sensor sends an ultrasonic signal at an
angle up through the velocity layers in the oncoming flow. It emits
a wide, omni-directional sound wave at a specific frequency upward
into the flow. The sound wave bounces off particles in the flow and
returns to the sensor. The velocity sensor measures the change in
the sound wave's frequency from transmission to reception. This
change is used to determine the peak velocity of the flow based on
the Doppler effect.
Peak Combo Sensor peak velocity transducer
The Doppler effect describes the shift in frequency of a sound wave
emitted by a moving object in relation to a stationary point. The
moving objects represent particles in the flow, the stationary point is
2-18 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
the velocity sensor, and the signal received is the reflection of the
sound wave (emitted by the velocity sensor) off the particles.
Based on this information, the sensor determines the peak velocity
of the oncoming flow. Profile calculates an average velocity from
this peak by applying a user-defined average-to-peak ratio.
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
The Ultrasonic Depth Sensor with a standard 30-foot (9.1-m) cable
(ADS p/n 8K-CS3-V0-XX-30) mounts at the crown of the pipe and
measures ultrasonic depth. This sensor also is available with a
pressure depth capability.
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
This sensor first transmits sound waves from the sensor face to the
surface of the flow, and then these sound waves return to the sensor.
The monitor measures the time elapsed between transmission and
reception of the reflected sound signal. Based on the elapsed time
and the speed of sound, the monitor determines the range. The
range represents the distance between the sensor face and flow
surface. The monitor calculates the depth of the flow by subtracting
the range from the pipe diameter. It compensates for the speed of
System Overview
2-19
sound in the air using the temperature recorded by a temperature
sensor housed within the ultrasonic depth sensor.
Ultrasonic depth sensor sending signals to flow surface to determine range
Quadredundancy
The sensor contains four ultrasonic transducers for taking readings
to give the sensor quadredundancy, which ensures greater sensor
reading reliability. To take a reading, one transducer transmits a
sound wave while a second transducer listens for the returning echo.
Each transducer has its own electronic circuitry and dedicated
wiring for true redundancy.
Depth Processing
The standard method for processing ultrasonic depth involves firing
the sensor once to take readings for predefined transducer pairs.
The return signals for all sensor pairs are converted to digital data
and referenced in time. When all sensor pairs are added together,
the results indicate that the strongest echoes off the water surface
increase in relative significance while noise and other random return
signals become relatively less significant. Finding the leading edge
of the return echo can be done with high confidence, and travel time
can be converted to a range.
2-20 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
This method of processing data in the monitor also replaces the
need for a separate data-scrubbing process to eliminate random
pops in the data. If not identified and discarded, these outliers—
created by pipe and manhole noise, turbulent or wavy flow, a foamy
flow surface, side connections, rungs, broken pipes, or drop
connections—can make it more difficult to determine the true depth
of the flow.
Pressure Depth Sensor
The optional pressure depth sensor in the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
measures pressure depth using the same technique as the other
combo sensors, except from the top of the pipe. Since it can
provide an accurate depth only when submerged, the data from this
sensor is useful only under full-pipe or surcharge conditions. The
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor offers two options for pressure
measurement: 0 - 5 PSI (0 - 0.34 Bar) and 0 - 15 PSI (0 - 1.03 Bar).
Surface Combo Sensor
The Surface Combo Sensor with a standard 30-foot (9.1-m) cable
(ADS p/n 8K-CS5-V2-XX-30) mounts at the top of the pipe and
measures ultrasonic depth, surcharge pressure depth, surface
velocity, and surcharge peak velocity using four independent
sensors.
System Overview
Surface Combo Sensor
Note: The new version of the Surface Combo Sensor
(shown above) referenced here and throughout this manual
is undergoing final testing and evaluation and will be
available toward the end of 2012. However, the existing
version of the Surface Combo Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS3V2-XX-30) is currently available through ADS. Refer to
the previous version of the FlowShark Triton Installation,
Operation, and Maintenance Manual (QR 775013 A3) for
detailed information and installation instructions
concerning the current Surface Combo Sensor.
2-21
2-22 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
This sensor first transmits an ultrasonic signal downward from one
of the crystals on the sensor face that bounces off the flow surface
and returns to the other crystal. The monitor measures the travel
time elapsed between transmission and reception of the reflected
sound signal. Based on the elapsed time and the speed of sound, the
monitor determines the range. The range represents the distance
between the sensor face and flow surface. The monitor calculates
the depth of the flow by subtracting the range from the pipe
diameter. It compensates for the speed of sound in the air using the
temperature recorded by a temperature sensor housed within the
ultrasonic depth sensor.
The ultrasonic depth sensor is located in the front, horizontal
portion of the sensor and has two downward-facing ultrasonic
crystals covered with a clear, moisture-shedding Teflon® coating.
Surface Velocity Sensor
This sensor measures the velocity of the flow also by bouncing
signals off the flow surface using a method similar to the ultrasonic
depth sensor, but the velocity signals are angled toward the
oncoming flow surface.
The surface velocity sensor crystals reside in the two descended
portions toward the rear end of the sensor.
ADS does not recommend using this sensor for measuring velocity
at locations with smooth flow surfaces or velocities of less than 1
foot per second (0.3 m/s).
System Overview
2-23
SURFACE VELOCITY
FLOW
Measuring velocity using the surface velocity sensor
Surcharge Peak Velocity Sensor
This sensor measures the velocity of the flow during surcharge
conditions using the same methodology as the Peak Combo
Velocity Sensor. It will measure velocity only when the pipe is full.
The surcharge peak velocity sensor resides in the angled, front
portion of the sensor in front of the ultrasonic depth crystals.
Surcharge Pressure Depth Sensor
The surcharge pressure depth sensor in the Surface Combo Sensor
measures pressure depth using the same technique as the other
combo sensors, except from the top of the pipe. Since it can
provide an accurate depth only when submerged, the data from this
sensor is useful only under full-pipe or surcharge conditions. The
Surface Combo Sensor offers two options for pressure
measurement: 0 - 5 PSI (0 - 0.34 Bar) and 0 - 15 PSI (0 - 1.03 Bar).
2-24 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor
The Slimline Peak Combo Sensor with a standard 35-foot (10.6-m)
cable (ADS p/n 8K-CS4-35) typically mounts at the bottom of the
pipe and measures ultrasonic depth and peak velocity using two
independent sensors.
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
This sensor measures ultrasonic depth using the same method as the
corresponding sensor in the Peak Combo Sensor.
Peak Velocity Sensor
This sensor measures peak velocity using the same method used by
the corresponding sensor in the Peak Combo Sensor.
3-1
CHAPTER 3
Sensor Installation and
Connection
The ADS® FlowShark® Triton flow monitor and sensors are
primarily designed for monitoring flow in sanitary, storm, and
combined sewers. The monitor mounts to the manhole rim or wall
slightly below the manhole cover or to a rung in the manhole.
A sewer system’s hydraulics are much more stable and uniform in
the incoming pipe than in the manhole invert or outgoing pipe.
Therefore, the sensors mount to a stainless steel expandable ring or
stainless steel bands installed in the sewer pipe a short distance
upstream from the manhole invert. Installing the sensors upstream
minimizes the hydraulic effects and erroneous data readings caused
by foamy waters, waves in the flow, sewer noise, non-laminar flow,
and obstructions in the manhole.
Following is the basic procedure for installing the FlowShark
Triton monitor and sensors at a location:

Investigate the Site Characteristics These
characteristics include pipe size and shape, silt level, flow
depth, and hydraulic conditions.

Prepare the Equipment for Installation The monitor,
communication module, and sensors must be prepared and
tested for installation (See Chapters 4, 5, and 6 for
communication, external power (when applicable), and initial
monitor setup).
3-2 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual

Install the Sensors in the Pipe This process primarily
includes assembling the ring (for standard installations) or
preparing the bands (for special installations) to which the
sensors attach, mounting the sensors to the ring or bands,
securing the sensor cables to the ring or band, and installing
the ring or bands in the pipe.

Secure and Connect the Cables This procedure involves
securing the sensor cables from the ring or band to the monitor
location in the manhole and connecting the sensors to the
FlowShark Triton monitor.
Typical FlowShark Triton flow monitor and sensor installation
This chapter contains instructions for properly installing the sensors
in sanitary, storm, and combined sewer lines and manholes.
Note: Manhole and sewer system work involves
confined space entry and is inherently dangerous.
Therefore, installers and technicians must comply with all
federal, state, and municipal regulations concerning
confined space entry. ADS is not responsible for any
Sensor Installation and Connection
injuries, damages, claims, or liability resulting directly or
indirectly from the use of this installation guide or the
installation of any ADS equipment.
3-3
3-4 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Investigating Site Characteristics
Before beginning installation activities, conduct a thorough
investigation of hydraulic and site conditions.
Flow Hydraulics
The hydraulics of a site directly affect the monitor's ability to
accurately measure flow depth and velocity. The following
characteristics indicate when a site exhibits hydraulic conditions
favorable for effective flow monitoring activities:

Smooth Flow with Central Peak Velocities The
potential site should exhibit minimal ripples or waves. Choppy
or foamy flow will adversely affect sensor accuracy. Bulging
pipe joints, upstream curves, or upstream merging of pipes can
contribute to choppy surfaces and off-center peak flow
velocities.

Absence of Significant Silt Buildup at Pipe Bottom
Silt present at an otherwise favorable site must be accounted
for to obtain accurate flow measurements. The mounting ring
or band may require rotation (up to 15 degrees) to position the
Peak Combo Sensor up the side of the pipe and out of the silt.
(Refer to Installing the Ring in the Pipe on page 3-25.)

No Evidence of Surcharging Debris present on ladder
rungs or joints in the manhole may indicate the site
experiences surcharging. If this occurs on a regular basis,
consider finding an alternate location for monitoring the flow.

Relatively Quiet Pipe A monitoring point in a pipe
experiencing loud noises, such as active drop connections, can
adversely affect the accuracy of air ultrasonic depth
measurements.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-5

Flow Traveling at Least One Foot Per Second Slower
flows enable debris to settle in the pipe, limiting the accuracy
of flow measurements.

Higher Elevation than High Water Level that Occurs
in Wet Well at Downstream Pump Station Pipes that are
below the high water level of the pump station wet well could
experience frequent backup and surcharging. This will
increase sensor maintenance and possibly reduce data
accuracy.
Pipe and Manhole Characteristics
The physical characteristics of the pipe affect the flow and
determine the procedure for installing the sensors. Consider the
following factors and perform the following activities when
installing the sensors and monitor:

Sensor Installation Method Pipe size and shape determine
the installation method to employ for installing the sensors.
 Standard Installation Select this option to install
sensors in round pipes from 8 inches (200 mm) to 48
inches (1219 mm) in diameter. Standard installations
involve attaching sensors to an adjustable stainless steel
ring that mounts inside the pipe.
 Special Installation Select this option to install sensors
in non-round pipes or round pipes larger than 48 inches.
(1219 mm) in diameter. Special installations involve
attaching sensors to steel bands secured to the inside of the
pipe.

Pipe Height and Width Measure and record the horizontal
and vertical pipe dimensions carefully. Inaccurate pipe
measurements—even slightly inaccurate measurements--can
skew and misrepresent flow data.
3-6 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual

Pipe Shape Taking the appropriate measurements that
precisely reflect the exact pipe shape is essential to obtaining
accurate flow calculations. Therefore, irregularly-shaped pipes
will require additional measurements. Refer to the Profile
User’s Guide #950015 (version B4 or greater) for more
information.
Note: All relevant pipe dimensions and measurements
are required for entry in the Profile software during
monitor configuration and activation. Qstart also requires
pipe shape, height, and width during these activities.

Manhole Depth Measure the distance from the rim to the
manhole invert. Distances beyond 30 feet could require
extension cables for the sensors. See Appendix B.
Sensor Installation and Connection
Installing the Sensors in the Pipe
This section includes the procedures for performing sensor
installations using one of the following methods:

Standard Installations

Special Installations
Note: When installing a monitor with wireless
communications, it is very important to test the FlowShark
Triton and GSM module, EMU, or EMUX with the SIM
card installed to be sure the entire system functions and to
verify network quality of service before installation. This
check should be done before field deployment and again at
the monitoring site before installing the monitor. Refer to
Chapter 4, Communication, for more information.
Standard Installation
Performing a standard sensor installation involves the following
process:

Gathering the parts and supplies

Gathering the tools and equipment

Assembling the ring

Mounting the sensors on the ring

Securing the cables to the ring

Installing the ring in the pipe
3-7
3-8 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Gathering Parts and Supplies
Obtain the following supplies before installing the ring and sensors
to prevent any costly delays. When ordering, specify the
FlowShark Triton flow monitor installation hardware for ring
mounting. In addition, please indicate the type of mounting
hardware desired for mounting the monitor: mounting bracket
(wall/rim mount) or hook (rung mount).
Qty
Description
ADS P/N
1
FlowShark Triton flow monitor (includes internal
battery)
8000-FST-60C
1
Monitor mounting bracket/flange (for mounting
monitor to manhole rim or wall)
I40–0009
3
Monitor mounting bracket bolt, hex, SS, M8 x
30mm
508058
3
Monitor mounting bracket washer, flat, SS
517-8001254-00
3
Monitor mounting bracket washer, split lock, SS
517-8001274-00
1 as
needed
Hook, SS, 2-piece w/ hardware
(for hanging monitor on manhole rung;
Alternative to ADS p/n I40-0009)
8000-0021
1 as
needed
Bracket, sliding, Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
(mounting plate)
I25-0001
1 as
needed
Bracket, sliding, Surface Combo Sensor
(mounting plate)
8000-0307
1
Stainless steel ring (sized for pipe)
I25-0081 to 0094
See Appendix B
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Peak Combo Sensor – upward ultrasonic depth
sensor, pressure depth sensor, & peak velocity
sensor w/ M3 x 6mm stainless steel, flathead
screws
8K-CS4-xx-35/1H
(35 ft./10.6m or 100
1
ft./30.5m cable)
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Surface Combo Sensor – downward ultrasonic
depth sensor, surcharge pressure depth
sensor, surface velocity sensor, & surcharge
peak velocity sensor
8K-CS5–V2-xx-30
1
(30 ft./9.1m cable)
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Ultrasonic depth sensor (downward ultrasonic
depth only)
8K-CS3-V0-00-30
2
(30 ft./9.1m cable)
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-9
Qty
Description
ADS P/N
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Ultrasonic depth sensor with pressure option –
downward ultrasonic depth sensor & pressure
depth sensor
8K-CS3–V0-xx-30
1
(30 ft./9.1m cable)
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor – upward
ultrasonic depth sensor & peak velocity sensor
w/ M3 x 6mm stainless steel, flathead screws
8K-CS4-35
(35 ft./10.6m cable)
1 as
needed
IS standard or custom sensor extension cable
for Ultrasonic Depth Sensor without Pressure
Sensor
8000-0023–xxx
2
1 as
needed
IS Standard or Custom Sensor Extension Cable
for Peak Combo, Slimline Peak Combo,
Surface Combo, and Ultrasonic Depth (with
pressure option) Sensors
8000-0025–xxx
2
as needed
¼-  2 ¼-in. stainless steel anchor bolts w/ nut
and washer
1
3/8-inch x 3-inch anchor bolt and nut
1
Replacement dryer tube
3704–0032
1
IS PC communication direct connection cable
8000-0054
1 as
needed
GSM modem module
8000-0052
1
Antenna for the GSM module (or as an option
for the EMUX)
3800-0162 or
3800-0163
1 as
needed
Magnet (for activating diagnostic codes through
GSM modem module)
8000-0140
1 as
needed
External Modem Unit (EMU)
3800-0148
1 as
needed
External power kit (includes EMU chassis cable
and 10-foot external power cable)
3800-0181
1 as
needed
EMUX (EMU/Multiplexer)
106226E
1 as
needed
SIM Card (for GSM modem module, EMU, or
EMUX)
507181
1 as
needed
12V DC power supply
5000-0727
1 as
needed
Communication cable (from monitor to EMU or
EMUX)
106227B-xx
3
3-10 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Qty
Description
ADS P/N
4
M3 x 10mm flat head machine screw
507820
15
Plastic push mounts
1
3/8-in. – 16 thread. x 2-in. (10mm x 55mm x
1.5mm thread) stainless steel stud
1
3/8 in. – 16 thread (10mm x 1.5mm thread)
stainless steel nut
As needed
3/8 in. (10mm) stainless washer
15
11-in. (5mm x 300mm) cable ties
25
4-in. (2mm x 100mm) cable ties
15
8-in. (4mm x 200mm) cable ties
15
¼-in. (7mm x 400mm) anchor cable ties
1
18-inch (457-mm) stainless steel crank handle
I10–0012
1
IS pressure depth transducers (indicated by -xx- in the part number) are available
in Peak Combo Sensors, Surface Combo Sensors, and Ultrasonic Depth Sensors with
the Pressure Option in 0 - 5 psi (0 - 0.34 Bar) and 0 - 15 psi (0 – 1.03 Bar) pressure
ranges. The Peak Combo Sensor also offers a 0 - 30 psi (0 - 2.07 Bar) option.
Example: a Peak Combo Sensor with a 0 – 15 psi (0 – 1.03 Bar) pressure transducer
would be specified in psi: 8K-CS1-D1-15-35.
2
Extension cables can be ordered to specific lengths up to 300 ft. (91m). Note the
desired length (meters converted to feet) in the –xxx-- portion of the part number.
Standard lengths are 10 ft. (3.0m), 25 ft. (7.6m), 50 ft. (15.2m), 75 ft. (22.8m), 100
ft. (30.5m), 125 ft. (38.1m), 150 ft. (45.7m), and 200 ft. (61.0m). All other lengths
must be custom ordered.
3
Communication cables can be ordered in 10-, 85-, 100-, or 135-foot (3-, 26-, 30-,
or 41-m) lengths. Other cable lengths up to 300 feet (91 m) are also available by
request. Indicate the desired length in the -xx- portion of the part number.
Gathering Tools and Equipment
Gather the following tools for the installation:

Battery-powered hammer drill with assorted bits – including
the following at a minimum:
 ¼-inch (6-mm) x 6-inch (150-mm) masonry bit
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-11
 3/8-inch(10-mm) x 4-inch (100-mm) [minimum length]
masonry bit
 5/16-inch (8-mm) carbide-tipped bit

Heavy 4-poound (1.5-Kg) hammer

Rubber mallet

24-inch (610-mm) carpenter’s level

Nut driver or socket set (English plus 13-mm for canister
hardware)

Wrenches (English plus 13-mm for canister hardware)

Screwdrivers (flathead and Phillips head of assorted sizes)

Thread tap compatible with the thread spec on the monitor
mounting stud (3/8-in. standard)

Diagonal wire cutters

Folding carpenter’s rule with a brass slide

Mastic tape (ADS p/n 507193) or rubber coaxial stretch tape
Assembling the Ring
The flow sensors mount to a stainless steel ring for installation in
the pipe. Several different ring sizes exist, and each ring is
adjustable within about 3 inches (76 mm) to fit pipes of different
diameters. Assemble the ring in the following way:
Note: These instructions generally apply to overlapping
rings. However, the 6-in.(152-mm), 8-in.(178- to 211mm), 10-in. (229- to 262-mm) and 12-in. (279 to 312-mm)
rings do not have an overlapping section. Therefore, these
non-overlapping rings will require small modifications
during the assembly process. To assemble a nonoverlapping ring, proceed directly to step 4.
1.
Insert the spreader mechanism screw through the hole in the
center of the ring stabilizer. Ensure that the head of the screw
fits into the countersunk hole.
3-12 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Ring stabilizer with spreader mechanism screw
2.
Slide the open end of the ring (end without the welded metal
band) through the flanges in the ring stabilizer, making sure
the flanges face the outside of the ring and the spreader
mechanism screw faces the inside of the ring.
Sliding the ring stabilizer onto the ring
3.
Slide the ring stabilizer all the way around the ring until it is
about 4 inches (102 mm) from the welded metal band at the
other end of the ring.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-13
Moving the ring stabilizer into position
4.
Position the ring with the downstream edge (edge with the
holes) facing you.
5.
Install the sensor mounting plate on the ring in the following
way based on the sensor type. These sensors use slightly
different mounting hardware.
 Surface Combo Sensor Slide the Surface Combo
Sensor mounting plate onto the open end of the ring with
the back of the mounting plate (side with the slots) facing
the outside of the ring. The side with the keyholes should
face the inside of the ring. The end of the plate with the
keyholes should be extending out from the upstream edge
of the ring (opposite the edge with the holes for securing
the sensor cable).
3-14 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Sliding the Surface Combo Sensor mounting plate onto the ring
Note: The new version of the Surface Combo Sensor
(ADS p/n 8K-CS5-V2-XX-30) referenced here and
throughout this manual is undergoing final testing and
evaluation. Contact ADS Client Services for sensor
availability. This new version includes a different
mounting plate and involves a slightly different
installation procedure, as described in this manual, than
the existing Surface Combo Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS3V2-XX-30). To install the mounting plate onto the ring
for the existing version of the Surface Combo Sensor,
refer to the instructions below for the Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor.
 Ultrasonic Depth Sensor Slide the Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor mounting plate onto the open end of the ring with
the back of the plate (side with the slots) facing the outside
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-15
of the ring. The side with the backstop should face the
inside of the ring. Once the mounting plate is on the ring,
the majority of the plate should be extending out from the
upstream edge of the ring.
Sliding the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor mounting plate onto the ring
6.
Move the sensor mounting plate around the ring.
Note: Steps 7 and 8 apply only to overlapping rings.
Proceed directly to step 9 for non-overlapping rings.
7.
Slide the open end of the ring through the slot in the welded
band of the ring until it overlaps about 4 inches (102 mm).
8.
Spread the ring sections apart so that you can slide the ring
stabilizer with the spreader mechanism screw into the gap.
3-16 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Moving the ring stabilizer into position
9.
Perform the following based on the ring type:
 Overlapping Insert the spreader mechanism screw
completely through the hole at the open end of the ring.
 Non-Overlapping Insert a spreader mechanism screw
through the hole at the left end of the ring so that the end
of the screw extends inside the ring.
Ring stabilizer fully connected
10. Place the ring on a flat surface with the spreader mechanism
screw facing up.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-17
11. Orient the ring with the downstream edge (edge with small
holes) facing you.
12. Lay the spreader mechanism across the inside of the ring with
the downstream end of the mechanism (end with the large
welded nut) facing you, the four spreader bars facing toward
the inside of the ring, and the shoulder bolts pointed outside
the ring.
13. Place a washer and then the downstream, left spreader bar over
the spreader mechanism screw.
Orienting and attaching the spreader mechanism
14. Place the upstream, left spreader bar onto the same screw.
15. Lightly turn the hex nut onto the screw, ensuring that it passes
through the holes in the end of the spreader bar.
Note: Steps 16 through 18 apply only to overlapping
rings. For a non-overlapping ring, proceed to step 19.
3-18 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Attaching the spreader bars
16. Turn the ring until the spreader mechanism is in the 12:00
position.
17. Align the spreader mechanism screw so that the head is visible
through one of the ring size adjustment holes.
Aligning the screw head and adjustment hole
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-19
18. Tighten the screw through the hole using a Phillips-head
screwdriver while holding the hex nut with a 0.5-inch (12-mm)
nut driver.
Tightening the spreader mechanism screw and hex nut
19. Insert the second spreader mechanism screw through the
following hole based on the ring type:
 Overlapping Appropriate ring size adjustment hole on
the outside of the ring
 Non-overlapping Last hole on the other free end of the
ring (inserting the screw from the outside of the ring)
20. Slip the large washer onto the screw on the inside of the ring.
3-20 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Place the washers onto the second spreader mechanism screw
21. Place the spreader bars over the screw, and tighten a hex nut
on the screw.
Spreader mechanism attached to the ring (view from inside the ring)
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-21
Although the spreader mechanism fits snugly against the inside of
the ring, the spreader mechanism may seem loose on the hex nuts.
Do not be concerned. The spreader mechanism will tighten once
the ring is installed and tightened inside the pipe. The following
picture displays how a properly assembled ring with the ultrasonic
depth sensor mounting plate should look.
Properly attached spreader mechanism (with Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
mounting plate on ring)
Mounting the Sensors to the Ring
The following sections provide instructions on mounting the Peak
Combo Sensor and Slimline Peak Combo Sensor to the ring. To
ensure the most accurate flow data, standard pipe installations
require proper positioning of the sensors on the ring as well as in
the pipe. When facing upstream and viewing from the downstream
edge of the ring, the sensors should be mounted on the ring in the
following locations:
3-22 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual

Peak Combo Sensor and Slimline Peak Combo
Sensor Mount the sensor as close as possible to the six
o'clock position (bottom), provided it is mounted above the
level of any silt present at the bottom of the pipe. Any silt
covering the sensor could interfere with the sensor signals,
potentially producing inaccurate or erroneous readings. To
avoid silt, the sensor can be rotated as much as 15 degrees up
either side of the pipe (between the 5:30 and 6:30 positions).
A physical offset measurement must be taken if this technique
is used. Refer to Installing the Ring in the Pipe on page 3-25.
ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
OR
SURFACE COMBO SENSOR
PEAK COMBO SENSOR
OR
SLIMLINE PEAK COMBO SENSOR
Proper positioning of sensors on the ring (showing the Surface Combo
Sensor at top and Peak Combo Sensor at bottom)

Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
Mount the sensor at the twelve o'clock position (top of the
pipe) when the spreader mechanism is in the one o'clock
position
Caution: Handle all sensors and cables with extreme
care. The sensors and cables contain delicate mechanisms
and electronics. Keep sharp objects away from sensor
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-23
cables, and avoid stepping or placing heavy objects on the
cable during installation.
Mounting the Peak Combo Sensor or Slimline
Peak Combo Sensor
Mount the Peak Combo Sensor or Slimline Peak Combo Sensor to
the ring in the following way:
1.
Use two M3 X 10mm stainless steel flathead screws (do not
substitute any other screws) to mount the sensor at the bottom
of the ring (opposite the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor) with the tapered end of the sensor facing
upstream.
2.
Orient the ring so that the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor is directly on top. If neither a Surface Combo
Sensor nor Ultrasonic Depth Sensor is in use at the top of the
pipe, make sure the spreader assembly is directly on top.
3.
Secure the sensor cable to the ring. Refer to Securing the
Cables to the Ring on page 3-24 for instructions on properly
securing the cable.
Mounting the Peak Combo Sensor or Slimline Peak Combo Sensor to the
ring
3-24 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Securing the Cables to the Ring
Securing the Peak Combo Sensor or Slimline Peak Combo Sensor
cable to the ring helps prevent debris from collecting between the
cable and the ring or catching on the loose cable. It also prevents
the loose cables from disrupting the flow.
Secure the cable in the following way:
1.
Starting at the appropriate sensor location, begin securing the
sensor cable with 4-inch (2-mm x 100-mm) cable ties through
the pre-drilled holes along the downstream trailing edge of the
ring up the side of the ring. Run the cable up the side of the
ring opposite the spreader mechanism (the right side of the
ring’s downstream edge).
Sensor cabling
2.
Continue securing the cables until reaching the Surface Combo
Sensor, Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, or the top of the pipe.
3.
Pull the ties until they are taut.
Warning: Do not over-tighten the cable ties or kink the
sensor cables! The sensor cable sheathes two
components: the electrical cables that operate the sensor
and an air tube that ventilates the pressure sensor (when
applicable). Over-tightening the ties or kinking the cable
can damage or restrict the air tube, causing erroneous
pressure depth readings. In addition, make sure the
connector-end of the sensor is not kinked, does not contain
moisture, and includes an attached dryer tube filled with
active blue desiccant.
Sensor Installation and Connection
4.
3-25
Use the diagonal cutters to cut off the excess portion of the
cable ties.
Mounting the Surface Combo Sensor or
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
The Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor is not
mounted prior to installation of the ring. The ring mechanism and
sensor mounting plate are assembled as detailed in Assembling the
Ring beginning on page 3-11. After the ring is installed at the
monitoring site, the sensor is inserted into the mounting plate and
leveled (described in the following section).
Installing the Ring in the Pipe
The ring must fit securely in the pipe with the sensors properly
positioned to ensure the most accurate monitoring results. Install
the ring in the pipe in the following way:
1.
Examine the pipe for possible obstructions to the flow or
inhibitors to ring installation.
2.
Adjust the ring size to slightly less than the pipe diameter
before placing the ring in the pipe by turning the spreader
mechanism adjustment nut clockwise to contract it.
3.
Place the ring in the input pipe at least 12 inches (305 mm)
upstream from the manhole or edge of the pipe with the
sensors facing upstream toward the oncoming flow. It must
be located far enough upstream from the manhole to minimize
the effect of the draw-down caused by a possible drop in the
manhole invert.
3-26 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Installing the ring at least 12 inches (305 mm) upstream from the manhole
invert
Keep the following in mind:
 Be sure to mount the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor at the top (crown) of the pipe and to mount
the Peak Combo Sensor/Slimline Peak Combo Sensor as
close as possible to the bottom center of the pipe, above
any silt present and below the flow surface (during
minimum flows).
Proper orientation of the ring with the sensors in the pipe with and without silt
present. Please note that the sensor mounting plate for the Surface Combo
Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor is centered at the crown of the pipe. The
crank spreader mechanism is offset to the side.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-27
The bottom sensor may be rotated off the bottom
centerline up to 15 degrees up either side of the pipe
(between the 5:30 and 6:30 positions). However, rotating
the ring and sensor requires accurately measuring the
physical offset.
Rotating the Peak Combo Sensor or Slimline Peak Combo Sensor no more
than 15 degrees up either side of the pipe (between 5:30 and 6:30 positions)
 If necessary, temporarily clear away silt to install the ring.
Restore the silt after fully securing the ring (step 7).
 Make sure the ring is flat (flush) against the inside surface
of the pipe to avoid obstructing the flow or catching
debris.
 Verify that the Peak Combo Sensor/Slimline Peak Combo
Sensor is flush with the pipe surface. Any elevation of the
sensor or significant deterioration or imperfection in the
pipe surface around the sensor can create an open space in
which debris can become trapped. An elevated sensor also
can misdirect the signal when taking measurements.
These vulnerabilities can quickly result in potential
damage or disruption to the sensor and/or erroneous data.
3-28 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Notice how the elevated sensor provides a gap in which debris can collect
Notice how deterioration in the pipe surface creates a space for debris to
collect under the sensor
4.
Expand the ring by turning the spreader mechanism nut
counter-clockwise with the crank handle or socket. However,
do not tighten the ring against the pipe completely at this point.
5.
Mount the Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
to the ring in the following way based on the sensor type:
 Surface Combo Sensor Mount this sensor by
inserting the studs on the back of the sensor into the
keyholes on the sensor mounting plate (at the top of the
ring) and sliding the sensor back (in a downstream
direction) until it is fully in place. The sensor cable should
exit the downstream edge of the ring. Orient the sensor
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-29
with the depth crystals facing downward toward the inside
of the ring (flow surface).
SENSOR MOUNTING PLATE
SURFACE COMBO SENSOR
Mounting the Surface Combo Sensor to the mounting plate on the ring
Note: The new version of the Surface Combo Sensor
(ADS p/n 8K-CS5-V2-XX-30) referenced here and
throughout this manual is undergoing final testing and
evaluation. Contact ADS Client Services for sensor
availability. This new version includes a different
mounting plate and involves a slightly different
installation procedure, as described in this manual, than
the existing Surface Combo Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS3-V2XX-30). To install the existing version of the sensor onto
the mounting plate, refer to the instructions below for the
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor.
 Ultrasonic Depth Sensor Mount this sensor by sliding
the sensor into the grooves on the sensor mounting plate
(at the top of the ring) from the upstream end until the
sensor contacts the backstop. The sensor cable should exit
the downstream edge of the ring. Orient the sensor with
the four transducers facing downward toward the inside of
the ring (flow surface).
3-30 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
SENSOR MOUNTING PLATE
ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
Mounting the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor to the mounting plate on the ring
Note: Handle the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor with care, and do not expose it to extreme
temperatures for an extended period of time. Keep the
sensor in its protective packaging until it is time for
installation. Avoid contacting the metal connector at the
end of the Surface Combo Sensor cable with the Teflon®coated crystals on the sensor.
6.
Using a 24-inch (500-mm or 1000-mm) carpenter’s level,
orient the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor at
the top of the pipe so that the sensor face is parallel and level
(from side to side) with the flow surface and pipe crown.
When leveling a Surface Combo Sensor, use a block of uniform
dimensions between the level and the flat face of the horizontal
ultrasonic depth-sensor portion of the combo sensor.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-31
Leveling the ultrasonic depth sensor
If necessary, adjust the level in either sensor in the following
way:
 Remove the sensor from the mounting plate.
 Loosen the ring slightly to allow the plate to move on the
ring.
 Tap the sensor mounting plate to the right or left with a
rubber mallet until it is level.
Warning: Tapping the mounting plate with the sensor
attached could damage the sensor. Always remove the
sensor before tapping the plate with a mallet.
 Reattach the sensor to the mounting plate, and recheck the
level.
3-32 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
7.
Fully tighten the ring until it fits securely and completely flush
against the pipe wall.
Warning: Avoid over-tightening the ring. This could
bend the crank assembly.
8.
Install an anchor bolt in the manhole wall just above the pipe
crown. Using an anchor cable tie, secure the Surface Combo
Sensor cable. It can be further secured up the manhole wall.
9.
Restore any silt moved to its previous level, and confirm that
the Peak Combo Sensor is still above the silt level.
10. Measure the physical offsets for the sensors in the following
way.
 Peak Combo Sensor/Slimline Peak Combo
Sensor Physical Offset Manually measure the depth
of the flow from the bottom of the pipe to the flow
surface, and then measure the distance from the nose (i.e.,
front end) of the Peak Combo Sensor or Slimline Peak
Combo Sensor to the flow surface. Subtract the second
measurement from the initial depth of flow to determine
the physical offset.
Illustrating the method for determining the physical offset for a rotated Peak
o
Combo Sensor or Slimline Peak Combo Sensor at maximum 15 off center
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-33
 Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
Physical Offset Measure the distance from the crown
(top) of the pipe to the face of the sensor (horizontal
surface with the two/four depth crystals) to determine the
physical offset.
Note: These offsets are required when configuring the
monitor using the Profile or Qstart software.
11. Secure the sensor cables from the ring to the location at which
the monitor is mounted in the manhole. Refer to Securing the
Sensor Cables in the Pipe and Manhole on page 3-54 for more
information.
Special Installations
A special installation requires two independent installations: one
for the Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic Depth Sensor and one
for the Peak Combo Sensor or Slimline Peak Combo Sensor.
Note: Special installations do not involve spreader
mechanisms or rings. All hardware mounts directly to the
pipe surface with anchor bolts.
Performing a special installation involves the following process:

Gathering the parts and supplies

Gathering the tools and equipment

Mounting the Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor

Mounting the Peak Combo Sensor or Slimline Peak Combo
Sensor

Securing the cables to the band
Before beginning the installation, conduct a thorough investigation
of hydraulic and other site conditions. The hydraulics of a site
directly affect the monitor's ability to accurately measure flow
3-34 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
depth and velocity. In addition, measure the horizontal and vertical
pipe dimensions carefully. Even slightly inaccurate pipe
dimensions can significantly skew and misrepresent flow data.
Caution: Handle all sensors and cables with extreme
care. The sensors and cables contain delicate mechanisms
and electronics. Keep sharp objects away from sensor
cables, and avoid stepping or placing heavy objects on the
cable during installation. Avoid contacting the metal
connector at the end of the Surface Combo Sensor cable
with the Teflon-coated crystals on the sensor.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-35
Gathering Parts and Supplies
Be sure to obtain the following supplies before performing a
special installation to prevent any costly delays. When ordering,
specify the FlowShark Triton flow monitor special installation
hardware. In addition, please indicate the type of mounting
hardware desired for mounting the monitor: mounting bracket
(wall/rim mount) or hook (rung mount).
Qty
Description
ADS P/N
1
FlowShark Triton flow monitor (includes internal
12-volt IS battery pack)
8000-FST-60C
1
Monitor mounting bracket/flange (for mounting
monitor to manhole rim or wall)
I40–0009
3
Monitor mounting bracket bolt, hex, SS, M8 X
30mm
508058
3
Monitor mounting bracket washer, flat, SS
517-8001254-00
3
Monitor mounting bracket washer, lock, SS
517-8001274-00
1 as
needed
Hook, SS, 2-piece w/ hardware
(for hanging monitor on manhole rung;
Alternative to I40-0009)
8000-0021
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Peak Combo Sensor – upward ultrasonic depth
sensor, pressure depth sensor, & peak velocity
sensor w/ M3 x 6mm stainless steel, flathead
screws
8K-CS4-xx-35/1H
(35 ft./10.6m or 100
1
ft./30.5m cable)
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Surface Combo Sensor – downward ultrasonic
depth sensor, pressure depth sensor, surface
velocity sensor, & surcharge velocity sensor
8K-CS5-V2-xx-30
1
(30 ft./9.1m cable)
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Ultrasonic depth sensor (downward ultrasonic
depth only)
8K-CS3-V0-00-30
2
(30 ft./9.1m cable)
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Ultrasonic depth sensor with pressure option –
downward ultrasonic depth sensor & pressure
depth sensor
8K-CS3-V0-xx-30
1
(30 ft./9.1m cable)
Up to 2
(1 per
monitoring
point)
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor – upward
ultrasonic depth sensor & peak velocity sensor
w/ M3 x 6mm stainless steel, flathead screws
8K-CS4-35
(35 ft./10.6m cable)
3-36 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Qty
Description
ADS P/N
1 as
needed
IS Standard or Custom Sensor Extension Cable
for Ultrasonic Depth Sensor without Pressure
Sensor
8000-0023–xxx
2
1 as
needed
IS Standard or Custom Sensor Extension Cable
for Peak Combo, Slimline Peak Combo,
Surface Combo, and Ultrasonic Depth (with
pressure option) Sensors
8000-0025–xxx
2
1 as
needed
Bracket, sliding, Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
(mounting plate)
I25-0001
1 as
needed
Bracket, sliding, Surface Combo Sensor
(mounting plate)
8000-0307
1 as
needed
Special Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor install band, SS, 12 in. long (Use
with corresponding mounting plate I25-0001)
700-100238-00
As needed
by length
Stainless steel mounting band
Contact ADS
1 as
needed
Sensor surcharge bracket (used only to mount
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor in manhole)
I40-0010
as needed
¼. in.  2 ¼ in. (M6 x 55mm) stainless steel
anchor bolts w/ nuts and washers
1
Replacement dryer tube
3704–0032
1
IS PC Communication Direct Connection Cable
8000-0054
1 as
needed
GSM Modem Module
8000-0052
1
Antenna for the GSM Module
3800-0162 or
3800-0163
1 as
needed
Magnet (for activating diagnostic codes through
GSM modem module)
8000-0140
1 as
needed
External Modem Unit (EMU)
3800-0148
1 as
needed
External power kit (includes EMU chassis cable
and 10-foot external power cable)
3800-0181
1 as
needed
EMUX (EMU/Multiplexer)
106226E
1 as
needed
SIM Card (for GSM modem module, EMU, or
EMUX)
507181
1 as
needed
12V DC power supply
5000-0727
Sensor Installation and Connection
Qty
Description
1 as
needed
Communication cable (from monitor to EMU)
4
M3 x 10mm flat head machine screws
15
Plastic push mounts
1
3/8 in. - 16 thread. x 2.in. (10mm x 55mm x
1.5mm thread) stainless steel stud
1
3/8 in. – 16 thread (10mm x 1.5mm thread)
stainless steel nut
As needed
3/8 in. (10mm) stainless washer
15
11-in. (5mm x 300mm) cable ties
25
4-in. (2mm x 100mm) cable ties
15
8-in. (4mm x 200mm) cable ties
15
¼-in. (7mm x 400mm) anchor cable ties
3-37
ADS P/N
106227B-xx
3
507820
1
Pressure depth transducers (indicated by -xx- in the sample part number) are
available in Peak Combo Sensors, Surface Combo Sensors, and Ultrasonic Depth
Sensors with the Pressure Option in 0 – 5 psi (0 - 0.34 Bar) and 0 – 15 psi (0 - 1.03
Bar) pressure ranges. The Peak Combo Sensor also offers a 0 - 30 psi (0 - 2.07 Bar)
option. Example: a Peak Combo Sensor with a 0 - 15 psi (0 - 1.03 Bar) pressure
transducer would be specified in psi: 8K-CS1-D1-15-35.
2
Extension cables can be ordered to specific lengths up to 300 ft. (91m). Note the
desired length (in feet) in the -xxx-- portion of the part number. Standard lengths
are 10 ft. (3.0m), 25 ft. (7.6m), 50 ft. (15.2m), 75 ft. (22.8m), 100 ft. (30.5m), 125 ft.
(38.1m), 150 ft. (45.7m), and 200 ft. (61.0m). All other lengths must be custom
ordered.
3
Communication cables can be ordered in 10-, 85-, 100-, or 135-foot (3-, 26-, 30-,
or 41-m) lengths. Other cable lengths up to 300 feet (91 m) are also available by
request. Indicate the desired length in the -xx- portion of the part number.
Gathering the Tools and Equipment
Gather the following tools for the installation:

Battery-powered hammer drill with assorted bits – including
the following at a minimum:
 ¼-inch (6-mm) x 6-inch (150-mm) masonry bit
3-38 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
 3/8-inch (10-mm) x 4-inch (100-mm) [minimum length]
masonry bit
 5/16-inch (8-mm) carbide-tipped bit

Heavy 4-pound (1.5-Kg) hammer

Rubber mallet

24-inch (610-mm) carpenter’s level

Nut driver set or socket set (English plus 13-mm for canister
hardware)

Wrenches (English plus 13-mm for canister hardware)

Screwdrivers (flathead and Phillips head of assorted sizes)

Threads tap compatible with the thread spec on the monitor
mounting stud

Diagonal wire cutters

Folding carpenter’s rule with a brass slide

Mastic tape (ADS p/n 507193) or rubber coaxial stretch tape
Mounting Peak Combo Sensors and Slimline Peak
Combo Sensors
Two special installation methods are available for mounting the
Peak Combo Sensor and Slimline Peak Combo Sensor:

¾-band mount

½-band mount
Both mounts require almost identical installation methods. The
only significant differences are that the ¾-band mount allows the
installer to secure the band to both sides of the pipe wall and to
position the sensor at the bottom center of the pipe. These options
are not possible using the ½-band mount. Therefore, the ¾-band
mount is the preferable method for mounting the sensors.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-39
However, a ½-band mount may be appropriate for monitoring
under the following circumstances:

Large pipes with deep minimum flows

Large pipes with excessive silt present
½- (left) and ¾-band (right) mounts
Note: When positioning the special mounting metal,
remember the 15° offset limitation on the Peak Combo
Sensor/Slimline Peak Combo Sensor.
¾-Band Mount
Perform the following procedure to mount the Peak Combo Sensor
or Slimline Peak Combo Sensor (when applicable) in a pipe using
the ¾ band mount:
1.
Use a hacksaw to cut the band to the appropriate length. Cut
the band so that, when installed, it will run approximately ¾ of
the circumference of the pipe.
2.
Determine which end of the band will be the long end (end
extending almost completely up one side of the pipe). For
cable routing purposes, ADS recommends reserving the left
side of the incoming pipe (upstream from the manhole) for the
long end of the band.
3-40 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
3.
Locate the sensor at a position on the band based on the
existence of silt at the bottom of the pipe:
 If silt is not present, locate the sensor on the band so it will
be at the bottom center of the pipe once installed.
 If silt is present, locate the sensor slightly up the long end
of the band so that it will be above the silt level once
installed. However, make sure it will not be more than 15°
from the bottom center of the pipe.
Sensors mounted using a ¾-band mount in the pipe with and without silt
4.
Mount the sensor onto the inside of the band with two M3 x
10-mm countersink screws, making sure the tapered, stepped
end of the sensor faces the upstream edge of the ring (edge
opposite cable tie holes). If mounting holes do not exist on the
band at or near the desired mounting location for the sensor,
drill holes in the band using a 7/32-inch (3-mm) drill bit.
5.
Secure the sensor cables along the downstream edge of the
long end of the band according to the instructions in Securing
the Cables to the Band on page 3-43.
6.
Make sure two pre-drilled holes are visible above the flow
surface on the short end of the band. Maneuver the band so
that the lowest hole is almost at the flow surface.
7.
Mark the pipe wall through the lowest hole with a drill, and
install a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt with a
pneumatic drill.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-41
8.
Secure the band to the anchor bolt with a washer and nut.
9.
Conform the band to the pipe wall around to the long end of
the band so that it is flush with the pipe wall.
10. Install a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt through
the pre-drilled hole closest to the flow surface on the long end
of the band, and secure the band with a washer and nut.
11. Make sure the band and sensors are flush against the pipe wall
with no gaps, and conform the rest of the band to the pipe wall.
12. Install ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolts, nuts and
washers at the pre-drilled hole at the short end of the band and
at the pre-drilled holes along the long end of the band (above
the flow surface) approximately every 12 to 24 inches (305 to
610 mm) to the top end of the band.
13. Measure the physical offset for the sensor by manually
measuring the depth of the flow from the bottom of the pipe to
the flow surface and then measuring the distance from the nose
(i.e., front end at the pipe surface) of the sensor to flow
surface. Subtract the second measurement from the initial
depth of flow to determine the physical offset.
14. Run the sensor cables from the sensor location in the pipe to
the monitor location in the manhole according to the
instructions in Securing the Sensor Cables in the Pipe and
Manhole on page 3-54.
½-Band Mount
Perform the following procedure to mount a Peak Combo Sensor or
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor in a pipe using the ½-band mount:
1.
Use a hacksaw to cut the band to the appropriate length. Cut
the band so that, when installed, it will run almost completely
down the left side of the pipe.
2.
Determine the best location on the band to mount the sensor.
The sensor should mount as close as possible to the bottom
(end) of the band, making sure the sensor will be both above
the silt level and below the flow surface once installed. It also
must not be more than 15° from the bottom center of the pipe.
3-42 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
3.
Mount the sensor onto the inside of the band with two M3 x
10-mm countersink screws, making sure the tapered, stepped
end of the sensor faces the upstream edge of the ring (edge
opposite the cable tie holes).
4.
If mounting holes do not exist on the band at or near the
desired mounting location for the sensor, drill holes in the band
using a 7/32-inch (3-mm) drill bit.
5.
Secure the sensor cables along the downstream edge of the
band according to the instructions in Securing the Cables to the
Band on page 3-43.
6.
Place the band in the pipe upstream at least 12 inchees (305
mm) [same distance as Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor, when present] from the manhole invert.
Position the band on the left side of the pipe so that the sensors
will remain below the flow surface (during minimum flows)
and above the silt level.
7.
Orient the band so that one of the pre-drilled anchor bolt holes
is just above the flow surface.
8.
Spot drill the pipe wall through the hole, install a ¼-inch x 2
¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt, and secure the band to the
anchor bolt with a washer and nut.
Note: Make sure the submerged portion of the band is
flush with the pipe wall. If it is not, remove the band and
conform the band to the pipe.
9.
Install a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt, washer,
and nut below the flow surface 30 to 80 mm away from the
Peak Combo Sensor or Slimline Peak Combo Sensor on each
side. This will hold the sensor securely against the pipe wall
and prevent the end of the band from twisting in the flow or
catching debris.
10. Conform the portion of the band above the flow surface to the
pipe wall, and install an ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm)
anchor bolt, nut, and washer every 12 to 24 inches (305 to 610
mm) up to the top of the band.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-43
Completed ½-band mount in pipe
11. Measure the physical offset for the sensor by manually
measuring the depth of the flow from the bottom of the pipe to
the flow surface and then measuring the distance from the nose
(i.e., front end at the pipe surface) of the sensor to flow
surface. Subtract the second measurement from the initial
depth of flow to determine the physical offset.
Note: This value will be necessary when configuring the
monitor using the Profile or Qstart software.
12. Run the sensor cables from the sensor location in the pipe to
the monitor location in the manhole according to the
instructions in Securing the Sensor Cables in the Pipe and
Manhole on page 3-54.
Note: If the pipe is large and the sensor cable cannot
reach the pipe crown, attach the sensor cables to 0.5-inch
(12-mm) PVC tubing and anchor the tubing to the wall.
This will help prevent sensor damage during heavy flow.
Securing the Cables to the Band
Securing the Peak Combo Sensor or Slimline Peak Combo Sensor
cable to the band helps prevent debris from collecting between the
3-44 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
cable and the band or catching on the loose cable. It also prevents
the loose cables from disrupting the flow.
Secure the cable in the following way:
1.
Starting at the appropriate sensor location, begin securing the
sensor cable with 4-inch (2-mm x 100-mm) cable ties through
the pre-drilled holes along the downstream (trailing) edge of
the band up the side of the band. Run the cable up the right
side of the band (on the downstream edge of the band).
Sensor cabling
2.
Continue securing the cables until reaching the Surface Combo
Sensor, Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, or top of the pipe.
3.
Pull the ties until they are taut.
Warning: Do not over-tighten the cable ties or kink the
sensor cables! The depth cable sheathes two components:
the electrical cables that operate the sensor and an air tube
that ventilates the sensor (when applicable). Overtightening the ties or kinking the cable can damage or
restrict the air tube, causing incorrect pressure depth
readings. In addition, make sure the connector-end of the
sensor is not kinked, does not contain moisture, and
includes an attached dryer tube filled with active blue
desiccant.
4.
Use the diagonal cutters to cut off the excess portion of the
cable ties.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-45
Mounting the Surface Combo Sensor or Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor
Two special installation methods are available for mounting the
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor and one for the Surface Combo Sensor:

Standard Mount This mount, the most common mounting
method in use today, is used for mounting the Surface Combo
Sensor or the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor in the pipe during
special installations.

Surcharge Mount This mount primarily is used for
mounting the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor in the manhole at sites
where the flow continually occurs within 2 inches (51 mm) of
the top of the pipe, pipe conditions and/or hydraulics prohibit
the installation of a sensor in the pipe, or surcharges frequently
occur. Surcharges are conditions where the flow completely
fills the pipe and extends up into the manhole.
Standard Mount
Mount the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor or the Surface Combo Sensor
using this method in the following way:
Note: Handle the sensor with care, and do not expose it
to extreme temperatures for an extended period of time.
Keep the sensor in its protective packaging until it is time
for installation. Avoid contacting the metal connector at
the end of the Surface Combo Sensor cable with the
Teflon-coated crystals on the sensor.
1.
Position the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
mounting plate in the center apex of the pipe, and scribe a
mark on both sides of the mounting plate.
2.
Center the 12-inch (305-mm) mounting band, allowing the
band to extend about 4 inches (102 mm) beyond each side of
the scribed location.
3.
Conform one end of the curved band to the pipe configuration,
and spot drill to mark the bolt location.
3-46 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
4.
Remove the curved band, drill an anchor bolt hole, and gently
tap a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt into the
hole.
5.
Mount the curved band to the anchor bolt through the predrilled hole on the band, and hand-tighten a nut with washer to
the anchor bolt to secure the band.
Securing one end of the sensor mounting band
6.
Slide the sensor mounting plate onto the band in the following
way based on the sensor type:
 Surface Combo Sensor Slide the plate onto the band
with the end of the plate with the keyholes facing
upstream and the two band slots facing up.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-47
MOUNTING BAND
SENSOR
MOUNTING
PLATE
Sliding the mounting plate for the Surface Combo Sensor onto the free end
of the mounting band
Note: The new version of the Surface Combo Sensor
(ADS p/n 8K-CS5-V2-XX-30) referenced here and
throughout this manual is undergoing final testing and
evaluation. Contact ADS Client Services for sensor
availability. This new version includes a different
mounting plate and involves a slightly different
installation procedure, as described in this manual, than
the existing Surface Combo Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS3-V2XX-30). To install the mounting plate for the existing
version of the sensor onto the band, refer to the
instructions below for the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor.
 Ultrasonic Depth Sensor Slide the plate on the band
with the backstop edge of the plate facing downstream and
the two band slots facing up.
3-48 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Sliding the sensor mounting plate onto the band
7.
Align the sensor mounting plate with the scribe marks, and
conform the other end of the curved band with the pipe.
8.
Spot drill to mark an anchor bolt location, and mount another
¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt to the pipe.
9.
Hand-tighten a nut with washer to secure the other end of the
band.
Securing the other end of the band
Note: If the mounting plate has too much side play,
attach another anchor bolt approximately 1 inch (22 mm)
from the plate.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-49
10. Slide the sensor mounting plate along the metal band until it is
level (from side to side) with the flow surface and pipe crown,
and tighten the nuts securely with a nut driver. Refer to the
instructions on leveling this sensor in Installing the Ring in the
Pipe beginning on page 3-25.
11. Install the sensor onto the mounting plate in the following way
based on the sensor type:
 Surface Combo Sensor Mount this sensor by
inserting the studs on the back of the sensor into the
keyholes on the mounting plate and sliding the sensor
back (in a downstream direction) until it is fully in place.
The sensor cable should exit the downstream edge of the
band.
SENSOR MOUNTING PLATE
SURFACE COMBO SENSOR
Fastening the Surface Combo Sensor to the mounting plate on the band
3-50 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Note: Remember, this new (available late 2012) version
of the Surface Combo Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS5-V2-XX30) includes a different mounting plate and involves a
slightly different installation procedure, as described in
this manual, than the existing Surface Combo Sensor
(ADS p/n 8K-CS3-V2-XX-30). To install the existing
version of the sensor onto the mounting plate, refer to the
instructions below for the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor.
 Ultrasonic Depth Sensor Slide the Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor into position from the upstream end of the
mounting plate until the back of the sensor comes in
contact with the backstop.
SENSOR MOUNTING PLATE
ULTRASONIC DEPTH SENSOR
Sliding the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor into the sensor mounting plate on the
band
12. Confirm the sensor is still level.
13. Determine the physical offset for the Surface Combo Sensor or
the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor by measuring the distance from
the crown (top) of the pipe to the face of the sensor (horizontal
surface with the two/four ultrasonic crystals on either sensor).
This value is required when configuring the monitor using the
Profile or Qstart software. For the Surface Combo Sensor, do
not measure in reference to the the angled surface velocity or
surcharge velocity portions of the sensor.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-51
Surcharge Mount (applies only to the
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor)
For a site that may experience surcharge conditions, mount the
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor on the manhole wall directly above the
opening of the incoming pipe. This will ensure the sensor
measures the range above the flow surface at the location the flow
enters the manhole. This method of mounting the sensor requires a
special surcharge bracket (ADS p/n I40-0010). Mount the sensor
in the following way:
Note: Handle the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor with care, and
do not expose it to extreme temperatures for an extended
period of time. Keep the sensor in its protective
packaging until it is time for installation.
Surcharge Mount
3-52 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
1.
Determine the appropriate height at which to mount the
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor portion of the surcharge bracket
(ADS p/n I40-0010). The sensor slides into the groves of the
mounting plate at the lower portion of the bracket. When
making this determination, keep in mind that the maximum
range of the sensor is 10 feet (3048 mm).
2.
Press the bracket firmly against the manhole wall.
3.
Identify the three pre-drilled holes at the top of the bracket, and
spot drill the manhole wall through the middle hole with a
drill.
4.
Remove the bracket, and drill and mount a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch
(M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt.
5.
Secure the top of the bracket to the manhole wall with a
washer and nut.
6.
Push up on the bottom portion of the bracket until the sensor
portion of the bracket is level.
7.
Hold the bracket firmly in place against the manhole wall.
8.
Identify the three pre-drilled holes at the bottom of the bracket,
and spot drill the manhole wall through the middle hole with a
drill.
9.
Rotate the bracket 90, and drill and mount a ¼-inch x 2 ¼inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolt.
10. Secure the bottom of the bracket with a washer and nut.
11. Slide the sensor into the mounting plate on the bracket, and
secure the cable with cable ties to keep the sensor in place.
12. Verify that the sensor portion of the bracket is level using a
carpenter’s level held to the face of the sensor. If it is slightly
out of level, make horizontal adjustments to the bottom portion
of the bracket by moving it to the left or right. The oval
bottom mounting holes allow minor horizontal adjustments.
13. Drill and mount a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor
bolt in one of the other pre-drilled holes at the top portion of
the bracket for extra security.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-53
14. Confirm that the sensor is level.
15. Measure the physical offset for the sensor (the distance from
the crown (top) of the pipe to the face of the sensor). Enter
this distance as a negative value. For example, if it is 24
inches (610 mm) from the top of the pipe to the face of the
sensor in the manhole, you would enter -24 inches (-610 mm)
for the physical offset.
Note: This value will be necessary when configuring the
monitor using the Profile or Qstart software.
3-54 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Securing the Sensor Cables in the
Pipe and Manhole
Securing the sensor cables from the ring (or band, when
applicable), along the pipe crown, and up the manhole helps
prevent debris from collecting on sagging cables or between the
cables and the pipe crown.
Do not allow sensor cables to hang down in the pipe or sag in the
manhole. Loose cables could present a safety hazard in the
manhole or increase the potential for sensor or monitor damage to
occur. The cables should be secured along the pipe crown and
manhole wall under all circumstances.
Secure the cables from the ring (or band) to the monitor location in
the manhole in the following way:
1.
Neatly bundle the cables together with an 8-inch (4-mm x 200mm) cable tie attached to a plastic anchor installed at the top of
the pipe.
 Drill a hole of the appropriate size for the shank of the
plastic anchor in the pipe crown. Refer to instructions
with the anchors.
 Drive the plastic anchor into the pipe with a hammer until
it is flush and secure.
 Run the cable tie through the loop in the plastic anchor
and around the cables.
 Tighten the cable tie around the cables, and cut off the
excess cable tie material.
Note: If a plastic anchor will not serve as an adequate
anchor for securing the cable bundle based on the structure
of the pipe, install a ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6 x 55-mm)
anchor bolt instead.
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-55
Warning: Do not over-tighten the cable ties or kink the
sensor cables! The depth cable sheathes two components:
the electrical cables that operate the sensor and an air tube
that ventilates the sensor (when applicable). Overtightening the ties or kinking the cable can damage or
restrict the air tube, causing incorrect pressure depth
readings.
2.
Secure the cables with a cable tie and plastic anchor every 18
to 24 inches (457 to 610 mm) along the pipe crown (when
necessary) from the ring to the manhole. If plastic anchors
will not serve as adequate anchors based on the structure of
the pipe, install M6 x 55-mm anchor bolts instead.
3. Secure the cables every 18 to 24 inches (457 to 610 mm) up
the side of the manhole to the monitor location. Loose cables
could present a manhole safety hazard or increase the
potential for sensor or monitor damage to occur. If plastic
anchors will not serve as adequate anchors based on the
structure of the manhole wall, install ¼-inch x 2 ¼-inch (M6
x 55-mm) anchor bolts instead.
Warning: Make sure the connector-end of the sensor is
not kinked, does not contain moisture, and includes an
attached dryer tube filled with active blue desiccant.
3-56 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Securing the sensors cables along the pipe and into the manhole
Sensor Installation and Connection
3-57
Connecting the Sensors to the
Monitor
After installing the ring and sensors and securing the sensor cables
to the pipe and manhole wall, connect the sensor cables to the
appropriate ports on the top of the monitor. The ports that receive
the sensors are labeled Channel 1 and Channel 2.
The FlowShark Triton supports the connection of two sensors in
any combination, including two of the same sensor type, to the
channel ports. However, to simplify the installation and
configuration process, ADS recommends developing a system or
convention to ensure consistency when attaching the sensors to the
channel ports and assigning the corresponding channels to the
sensor devices in Profile or Qstart.
Establish a priority or order in which particular sensors are
assigned to a specific channel and, when applicable and possible,
correspond the channel number to the monitoring point. For
example, consider always assigning the Peak Combo Sensor to
Channel 1 and the second sensor to Channel 2.
Connect the sensor cables to the monitor ports in the following
way:
1.
Place the monitor in an upright position to view the monitor
connector ports.
3-58 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
A
CH
NN E L
A
CH
2
NN E L
1
0518
II 1 G
Ex ia IIB T4 Ga
Sira 09ATEX2027X
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST
ST ONLY
TE
M
AX
. 12 PS
Use only battery pack 106152
I
R
CO M M
W W W.A
D S E N V.C O M
Cable connector ports
2.
Visually inspect each sensor connector and monitor connector
port for damaged or broken pins. Replace a monitor or sensor
with defective ports or connectors.
3.
Visually inspect each sensor and monitor connector port for
debris and moisture. Clean off any debris, and dry any
surface moisture. Compressed air is useful for removing
moisture from the inside of the connectors or ports (pin and
socket surfaces).
4.
Verify that the waterproof seal is present inside each sensor
cable end connector. The bright orange, rubber seal should sit
at the bottom of the connector with the pins protruding
through the seal.
5.
Connect each sensor cable to the appropriate port. Tighten
each rotating connector collar in a clockwise direction until it
clicks, and verify that it is seated correctly.
6.
For locations exhibiting the presence of hydrogen sulfide
and/or high moisture, provide added protection by wrapping
the connection with mastic tape.
Sensor Installation and Connection
7.
3-59
Seal any unused connectors with a protective cap. If
necessary, obtain additional caps from ADS.
Note: An air valve is present in the monitor top. This
valve exists only for testing purposes during the
manufacturing process. Do not attempt to fill the monitor
with air or pressurize the monitor!
Securing the Dryer Tube to the Monitor
The Peak Combo Sensor, Surface Combo Sensor, and Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor with the Pressure Option each contain a pressure
depth sensor with an associated dryer tube. For each combo sensor
connected to the monitor, you must secure the corresponding dryer
tube (attached to a cable running from the sensor connector) to the
monitor in the following way:
1.
Attach the dryer tube from the pressure depth sensor in the
vertical position to the monitor handle using cable ties. Make
sure the clear, flexible tubing coming from the sensor
connector the top of the dryer tube is not kinked. If necessary,
use a loose cable tie to hold it in an unkinked position.
Securing the dryer tube to the monitor using cable ties
2.
Make sure the black end cap on the dryer tube is removed
before installing the monitor in the manhole.
3-60 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
3.
(applies only when a second dryer tube is present) Repeat
steps 1 through 3 for the other dryer tube, but attach it to the
other vertical portion of the handle on the opposite side of the
monitor.
4-1
CHAPTER 4
Communication
After installing the sensors in the pipe and connecting the sensors to
the ADS® FlowShark® Triton monitor, it is necessary to establish
communication with the monitor through wireless communication
(remote) or direct connection (on-site). All methods of
communication require a field (laptop) computer or office computer
equipped with the ADS Profile® or Qstart™ software.
ADS offers three options for wireless communications:

GSM Module This option involves mounting a GSM module
containing a modem inside the manhole next to a batterypowered FlowShark Triton.

EMU This option involves installing an EMU (external
modem unit) outside, but in close vicinity to, the manhole in
which the monitor is installed. It also requires running a
power/communication cable between the monitor and EMU.
An EMU is required when the system (monitor/EMU) will
receive power from an external DC source.

EMUX This option involves installing an EMUX (external
modem unit/multiplexer) outside, but in close vicinity to, the
manhole in which the monitor is installed. It also requires
running a power/communication cable between the monitor and
EMUX and a communication cable between an RTU (remote
terminal unit) and the EMUX. An EMUX is required when the
system (monitor/EMUX) will communicate with a SCADA
RTU through Modbus protocol and receive power from an
external DC source. Serving as an interface (multiplexer), the
4-2
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
EMUX enables the RTU to obtain real-time monitor data
through a serial connection and the Profile software (a user) to
communicate with the monitor through a wireless connection.
Direct, on-site communication with the monitor is possible through
an IS serial connection between the monitor and a laptop computer.
This chapter contains information and instructions concerning the
following:

Installing the GSM module in the manhole

Installing the communication cable and the EMU outside the
manhole near the external power source

Installing the communication cable and the EMUX outside the
manhole near the RTU and/or external power source

Connecting directly to the monitor on site
Note: Manhole and sewer system work involves confined
space entry and is inherently dangerous. Therefore,
installers and technicians must comply with all national,
state, and municipal regulations concerning confined space
entry. ADS is not responsible for any injuries, damages,
claims, or liability resulting directly or indirectly from the
use of this installation guide or the installation of any ADS
equipment.
Warning: The ADS GSM Module requires connection to
an external antenna. Only antennas provided by ADS are
approved for use. The user must maintain a distance of
9 inches (229 mm) from the antenna whenever the
modem is in operation.
Communication
4-3
GSM-Based Wireless Communication
The ADS FlowShark Triton monitor system supports GSM wireless
communication through an ADS GSM/GPRS module (including an
Enfora modem) using static IP address network services provided
by AT&T. Therefore, any location considered for installing
wireless communication must have access to AT&T 850 or 1900
MHz service. The user must fit each wireless device with a SIM
(Subscriber Identity Module) card provisioned by AT&T with
specific account and network information for use with ADS
software.
Wireless communications and the quality of service depend on local
conditions and service providers. An optimal location for flow
monitoring may not offer the best wireless network coverage. The
user is responsible for finding the most reliable network for your
project area. Therefore, perform a signal survey to ensure that the
monitoring site has adequate reception for wireless
communications. Consider consulting local wireless providers for
assistance.
Note: Do not rely solely on coverage maps. These can
provide misleading information for specific areas.
Typically, sewer systems exist in low-lying areas in which
network access can be the most difficult to obtain.
Currently, only AT&T static IP SIM cards may be used for
communicating through the Profile or Qstart software platform or
networks supporting ADS IntelliServe®. This service supports
Mobile Terminated service as well as Mobile-Originated (alarm
cryout) functionality.
Wireless communication with a FlowShark Triton begins with
entering the IP address into the Profile or Qstart software Location
Information File (LIF). When using a SIM card that provides a
public IP address, the PC must have internet connectivity. When
using a SIM card that provides a private IP address, the PC first
must establish a VPN connection with the SIM provider. Consult
ADS Client Services for more information on using private
4-4
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
addresses. Then, the user can connect to a monitor through Profile,
Qstart, or IntelliServe (provided the appropriate LIF has been
imported from Profile). Consult the Profile manual #950015
(version B4 or higher) or the Profile or Qstart online help for
further information on wireless setup and use.
Communication
4-5
Installing the GSM Module
Establishing remote, wireless communications with the batterypowered FlowShark Triton monitor involves installing a GSM
module in the manhole.
The ADS GSM Module (p/n 8000-0052) is a polycarbonate
enclosure containing an electronic assembly comprised of a modem
module and intrinsically safe isolation components. The enclosure
has a clear, removable top to allow the user to access the SIM card
holder. The module also contains an LED window visible through
the clear cover that displays monitor activity and diagnostic codes.
Each module bears an IS Certification label, as well as the serial
number of the unit. A cable, exiting one side of the module,
connects to the monitor communication port. A female SMA
connector located on the other side exists for connecting an antenna.
GSM Module and monitor connection cable
Note: For wireless communication, it is very important to
test the FlowShark Triton and GSM module with the SIM
card installed to verify the entire system functions and
4-6
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
confirm network quality of service. Perform this
validation before deploying to the field and again at the
monitoring site before installing the monitor.
Gathering Parts and Supplies
Obtain the following items for the antenna and GSM Module
installations:

GSM module (ADS p/n 8000-0052)

One of two wireless antennas available through ADS (p/n
3800-0162 or 3800-0163)

(applicable only to off-road installations) Extension cables
(15-foot (4.6-m): ADS p/n 507165; 50-foot (15.2-m): ADS p/n
507168)

AT&T public static IP address SIM card (ADS p/n 507181)

Magnet (ADS p/n 8000-0140)

8-mm anchor bolts with washers and nuts

Medium-sized non-rotating demolition hammer with a 0.5-inch
(13-mm), 0.75-inch (19-mm), or 1-inch (25-mm) masonry
chisel (sharpen the chisel before use) and bushing tool, or an
abrasive saw or grinder

Masonry drill bits for drilling through manhole wall, corbel,
other materials. Include the following:
 0.5-inch (13-mm) diameter (minimum) x 12-inch (305mm) long (minimum) bit
 0.5-inch (13-mm) diameter x 36-inch (914-mm) long
(minimum) bit
 1.25-inch (32-mm) diameter x 12-inch (305-mm) bit

Standard drill bits and masonry bits up to 0.6 inches (15 mm) in
diameter
Communication
4-7

Medium- to heavy-duty hammer drill (if no hammer/drill mode
is available on the demolition hammer)

Trowel or putty knife for scooping asphalt

Hammer

Carpenter’s rule

Pen, pencil, or chalk for marking asphalt or concrete

Shop vacuum

Wire brush

Alcohol wipes

Leather work gloves

Protective goggles

Heavy-duty, high-quality caulking gun (for regular-sized tubes)

Appropriate tools for cutting and removing tarmac or dirt for
burying antenna

Patching and sealing materials for tarmac and for sealing the
cable hole into the manhole

Cable ties for securing cable coils

Generator or other power source (for hammer drill)

Dry sand

Commercial asphalt cold patch compound (approximately 1
cup)

Scotch-kote electrical sealing compound (ADS p/n 505171)

Scotch 130C rubber stretch tape (ADS p/n 145-0001)
4-8
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Installing the Wireless Antenna
Before installing the GSM Module into the manhole, install one of
the following antennas:

Wireless, slim, quad-band antenna (ADS p/n 3800-0162)

Wireless, mini-wing, quad-band antenna (ADS p/n 3800-0163)
Mini-wing antenna
Install a wireless slim or mini-wing antenna in the road, in dirt, or
under other paving materials in the following way:
Note: While this section describes the process for
installing these antennas, all wireless antennas provided
through ADS also include detailed installation instructions.
1.
Determine the appropriate location in the road near the
manhole to install the antenna:
 Locate the antenna in the road between 18 and 30 inches
(457 and 762 mm) from the manhole in which the monitor
is installed. Position the antenna as far as possible from
the massive iron frame and buried flange to prevent
shunting of the RF signal.
 Avoid locations at which cars will remain parked over the
antenna for extended periods (hampering the signal
strength).
 Select a location that drains well so that water will not
collect over the antenna, blocking the signal.
 Choose a location that is as flat as possible with stable base
material.
Communication
4-9
 Select a location where the antenna will experience
minimal direct impact from road traffic, where possible.
 Make sure the location exists beyond the manhole’s iron
rim beneath the road surface. This will enable you to
access the manhole corbel when drilling the channel for the
antenna cable.
 Verify that no buried utility cables exist in the area in
which drilling will occur for the antenna installation.
Consider contacting a Underground Utility Locating
Service for assistance.
2.
Mark the location for the antenna installation, and then mark
the location to drill the corbel hole 2.5 to 3 inches (64 to 76
mm) back from the edge of the antenna hole.
3.
Drill a hole from the marked corbel hole location in the road,
through the corbel, and into the manhole using the ½-inch (13mm) by 36-inch (914-mm) hammer drill bit. This will serve as
the channel for the antenna cable extending from the antenna to
the monitor in the manhole. Be careful to avoid any cables in
the manhole, and restart the hole slightly to the right or left if
mesh is encountered or resistance occurs.
4.
Cut a 6-inch (152-mm) long by 1.25-inch (32-mm) wide by
0.75-inch (19-mm) deep hole in the road using the non-rotating
demolition hammer (in the hammer only mode) with the
chisel/grinder. This will serve as the installation location for
the antenna. The corbel hole should be under the center of this
hole.
4-10
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Hole running from antenna installation location to manhole
5.
Level the bottom of the hole using the demolition hammer with
the chisel and a bushing tool.
6.
Thoroughly clean out the hole for the antenna of all debris
using a shop vacuum with a brush.
7.
If the protective cap is not present on the connector at the end
of the antenna cable, clean the connector and tape it up with
rubber stretch tape for protection against damage and debris
while it is being fed through the channel.
8.
Feed the antenna cable into the hole, through the channel, and
into the manhole. Smooth any rough edges where the cable
enters the corbel hole with the chisel or rubber stretch tape. In
addition, pack rubber stretch tape into cable hole to prevent
asphalt or sealer from entering the cable hole.
9.
Remove the white release tape from the antenna element. Be
careful to avoid contacting the black rubber mastic material
with anything until the antenna is ready to be seated.
Communication
4-11
10. Apply a piece of white release tape onto the top of the antenna,
and then seat the antenna into the bottom of the hole. Once the
antenna is firmly seated, remove the release tape.
11. Apply the asphalt on top of the antenna element. When using
asphalt, scoop the warm material into the hole and then pound
it in using a hammer. Place a piece of wood or metal between
the asphalt and the hammer to prevent the hammer from
sticking to the asphalt. Make sure the asphalt protrudes slightly
above the level of the road surface.
12. Sprinkle a thick (approximately 1/8-inch) layer of sand over the
asphalt, and then pound the sand lightly into the surface. The
sand must be used to ensure the asphalt does not adhere to
objects, such as vehicle tires, while drying. ADS recommends
dusting the surface with sand once again before leaving the site.
Antenna in cavity with patch
13. Coil the slack antenna cable and temporarily secure it away
from the other cables in the manhole. Slack enables the
technicians to remove the GSM Module from the manhole for
maintenance or service activities with the antenna cable still
connected. Do not bundle the antenna and sensor cables
together! This can significantly diminish antenna and sensor
signal strength, disrupting communications and limiting sensor
accuracy.
Note: To prevent signal loss and damage to the cable and
antenna, do not kink or bend the antenna cable when
coiling.
4-12
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Installation with antenna cable coiled in manhole
14. Seal the space between the antenna cable and the corbel hole
with electrical duct seal or as required to prevent infiltration
into the manhole.
Note: Do not connect the antenna cable to the GSM
Module until after installing the SIM card.
Installing the SIM Card
The GSM Module requires a standard SIM card for establishing
communication. This module is designed for use with SIM cards
provisioned by AT&T (ADS p/n 507181) for public static IP
address operation. Please contact ADS for specific information on
procuring SIM cards for use in the specific geographic area.
Communication
4-13
Install the SIM card in the following way:
Note: Locate the GSM module in a dry, non-hazardous
area before installing the SIM card. Do not install the SIM
card with the module attached to the monitor or damage
may occur to the monitor or the GSM module!
1.
Record the number of the SIM card (i.e., the IP address) on the
site report. You will need this address to reconcile billing and
when setting up the LIF in the Profile or Qstart software. The
IP address is printed directly on the SIM card or on a label
affixed to the card.
Example of SIM card
2.
Loosen the four Phillips head screws from the clear top of the
module, and remove the top.
Cover removed from GSM Module
3.
Slide back the clip on the SIM card carrier to unlock the
carrier. The clip indicates the proper direction for unlocking
the carrier.
4-14
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Sliding back clip on SIM carrier
4.
Swing up the hinged clip to the carrier and gently insert the
SIM card into the slot. Orient the card so that the beveled
corner of the card will align with the beveled corner of the
carrier once locked into place.
Swinging up hinged clip and inserting card; notice beveled edged of card
5.
Close the clip to the carrier, and slide the clip forward to secure
the SIM card into place. The clip indicates the proper direction
for locking the carrier.
Communication
4-15
SIM card properly seated and locked in carrier
6.
Inspect the gasket and all edges of the module enclosure seal to
be sure they are free of any debris.
7.
Position the desiccant pack (ADS p/n 507995) in the GSM
module above or to the right of the LED window. Make sure
the desiccant is fresh by inspecting the center strip on the pack.
The center strip on a new, fresh pack should be blue in color.
Replace the pack if a pink color is visible through the center
strip.
Desiccant pack properly seated and positioned in GSM module
4-16
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
8.
Replace the cover to the module, and then replace and tighten
the screws until the edges of the box are flush together.
However, do not over-tighten the screws!
9.
Temporarily connect the cable from the antenna to the antenna
connector on the GSM module (first removing the electrical
tape from the cable end, when applicable) and the
communication cable from the module to the COMM port on
the monitor. Then, activate the diagnostic codes to test
communications and the module based on the instructions
under Obtaining Diagnostic Codes from the Monitor in
Chapter 8, Maintenance and Troubleshooting. Once complete,
disconnect the cables before installing the module in the
manhole.
10. Wrap electrical tape tightly over the seam (between the cover
and the case) of the GSM module enclosure to enhance the seal
and to simplify the removal of debris when the module is
opened.
Installing the GSM Module
Note: ADS recommends installing the antenna prior to
securing the GSM module to the monitor.
Note: The following instructions address a standard
installation that involves mounting the GSM module inside
the manhole. However, ADS offers an optional extension
cable (ADS p/n 8000-0044-25) that runs between the
monitor and module for mounting the module and antenna
outside the manhole. When installing the module outside
the manhole, provide adequate protection for the module
against environmental elements and vandalism, such as a
weatherproof and secure enclosure. In addition, wrap the
entire connections of the extension cable and module and
the extension cable and monitor port with rubber stretch
tape, extending onto the cables approximately 2 inches (50
Communication
4-17
mm) beyond the connection on each side (when
applicable).
Install the GSM module in the following way:
1.
Place the monitor upright on the ground surface beside the
manhole in which the antenna cable is temporarily coiled.
2.
Attach the communication cable connector from the GSM
module to the corresponding COMM port on the monitor.
3.
Wrap rubber stretch tape around the entire cable connection
(particularly over the gap between the connector and port),
extending 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) onto the cable beyond
the connection.
Communication cable connected to monitor with stretch tape properly
applied
4.
Attach the antenna cable connector to the antenna port on the
GSM module.
5.
Wrap rubber stretch tape around the entire cable connection,
extending onto the cable approximately 2 inches (50 mm)
beyond the connection on the module.
6.
Secure the communication cable of the GSM module to the
short vertical portion of the monitor handle using a cable tie.
Orient the module so that antenna port/cable is facing
downward, making sure the cable tie is securing the
communication cable within 2 to 3 inches (50 to 75 mm) of the
4-18
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
top of the module. Consider the following installation issues
when securing the module to the handle:
 Whenever possible, secure the GSM module to the side of
the handle opposite the side to which the pressure depth
sensor dryer tube is attached.
 When the monitor will be mounted in the manhole to a
ladder rung using a hook, secure the GSM module to side
of the monitor handle opposite the side of the monitor to
which the hook will be attached.
FLOWSHARK
TRITON MONITOR
COMMUNICATION
CABLE
CABLE TIES
GSM
MODULE
ANTENNA
CABLE
Securing the GSM module to the monitor handle
7.
Carefully coil and secure the remaining slack cabling as
necessary. Slack enables the technicians to remove the GSM
module from the manhole for maintenance or service activities.
Note: Remember to avoid bundling the antenna and
sensor cables together! This can significantly diminish
antenna and sensor signal strength, disrupting
communications and limiting sensor accuracy. In addition,
avoid kinking and bending the cables when coiling to
prevent signal loss and damage to the cables and
corresponding equipment.
Communication
4-19
Installing an EMU
Establishing remote, wireless communications with the externalpowered FlowShark Triton monitor involves installing an EMU
(ADS p/n 3800-0148) outside the manhole (in which the monitor is
installed) at the location housing the external power source.
Installing the EMU primarily involves two procedures:

Installing the communication cable

Installing the wireless EMU
Installing the Communication Cable
Installing the communication cable involves the following activities:

Selecting the route for the communication cable

Contacting the underground utility locating service

Gathering the necessary tools and materials

Installing the communication cable
Selecting the Most Appropriate Route for the
Communication Cable
The step involves evaluating the most appropriate route for running
the communication cable between the manhole and the EMU/power
source location. Issues for consideration may include existing
landscape, utilities present, and excavation costs.
Consider the following when choosing the route for the cable:

Choose a route that will not require running the communication
cable underneath rough gravel roads. Constant traffic could
cause damage to the cable.
4-20
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual

Verify that the communication cable trench will not damage an
existing sprinkler system. Locate any sprinkler lines (These are
not located by the locator service). Check with homeowner if
necessary.

Avoid flowerbeds and other areas where frequent digging or
planting might occur.
Note: For more information on determining the most
suitable cable route, contact the ADS Client Services
Department at [email protected] or 877237-9585.
Note: When installing an externally powered EMU (ADS
p/n 3800-0148), ADS recommends locating the EMU in
close proximity to the power source to maximize the net
power available to the EMU.
Contacting the Underground Utility Locating
Service
If you must route the communication cable through a yard or a
commercial area, ADS strongly recommends contacting an
underground utility locating service before beginning installation of
the communication cable. Allow 5 to 7 days for this to occur before
scheduled excavation activities can begin.
Perform the following to assist the locator’s service, minimize the
risk of damage to underground utilities, and avoid possible injury or
death caused by a potential cable strike:

Provide the exact route proposed for the cable.

Clearly mark the proposed route with spray paint or wire flags.

Create a hand-drawing of the proposed cable route to make
sure the locator service looks in the correct area for
underground services.
Communication
4-21
Gathering Tools and Materials
Obtain the following items to perform the installation:

Ratchet set with 7/16-inch (11-mm) socket

Pointed shovel

Claw hammer

Hammer drill

Minimum ½-inch (13-mm) diameter masonry bit at least 12
inches (305 mm) in length to drill through the manhole wall or
corbel

Generator for hammer drill (if necessary)
Installing the Communication Cable
After finalizing the cable route, run the communication cable (ADS
p/n 106227) between the monitor location and the EMU/power
source location in the following way:
Note: The following instructions represent a
communication cable installation that occurs from the
EMU/power source location to the manhole through soil.
If a transition occurs through asphalt or concrete, you must
create a ½-inch (13-mm) wide by 1-inch (25-mm) deep
(minimum) saw cut trench. The trench and cable must be
clean and free of dirt, debris, and grease before you lay the
communication cable. Use only approved loop sealant or
concrete joint sealant to secure the cable into the roadway.
To prevent wear or damage to the communication cable,
avoid sharp transitions where the concrete or asphalt
transitions to other surfaces.
1.
Remove the orange connector from the communication cable
end (if attached) and inspect the ends of each small wire
extending from the cable.
4-22
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
2.
Verify that the wire ends have been stripped correctly with only
¼ inch (6 mm) exposed. If they have not been stripped or have
been stripped incorrectly, prepare the wires in the following
way:
Wire ends stripped ¼-inch
 Cut off the old stripped ends (when applicable) back to the
jacket.
 Use the small side cutters to carefully remove 4 inches
(102 mm) of the jacket, and cut away the tension strands
and any other unnecessary jacket materials.
 Using the wire strippers, select the appropriate gauge and
strip ¼-inch (6 mm) from the end of all conductors. Twist
each wire end to prevent fraying.
3.
Carefully tape together the loose bundle of wires using the
vinyl electrical tape. Form a taper covering all of the wires,
keeping it as thin as possible so that it will be able to pass
through the communication cable entry fitting on top of the
EMU.
Communication
4-23
Forming a thin taper using vinyl tape
4.
Excavate a trench at least 12 inches (305 mm) deep and 4
inches (102 mm) wide from the EMU/power source location to
the monitor location. Consult local regulations to verify the
required trench depth for the area.
5.
Drill a ½-inch (13-mm) (minimum) hole through the corbel
(structural foundation holding the manhole cover) or manhole
wall to provide a smooth transition for the cable into the trench.
6.
Run the communication cable from the monitor location in the
manhole to the EMU/power source location. If required by
local code, run cable through ¾-inch (19-mm) electrical PVC
conduit in the following way:
 Extend the conduit through the manhole corbel or wall at
the monitor location.
 Lay the conduit in the trench per local regulations and feed
the communication cable through the conduit.
 Extend the conduit approximately 12 inches (305 mm)
vertically out of the trench (from the ground surface) at the
EMU/power source location.
 Use urethane foam to seal the space between the conduit
and the corbel or manhole wall to prevent infiltration into
the manhole.
4-24
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Running the cable and conduit from the manhole to the EMU/power source
7.
Provide enough slack in the cable at the manhole end to allow
removal of the monitor from the manhole during service
activities.
Note: Do not connect the cable to the monitor at this
time!
8.
Provide approximately 40 inches (1016 mm) of excess cabling
at the EMU/power source location.
9.
(applies only to applications requiring conduit) Use urethane
foam or a sealing fitting to form a seal between the
communication cable and conduit at each end of the conduit.
This will prevent sewer gases from entering the box housing the
EMU and power supply, moisture from entering the conduit
during a surcharge, and inflow from entering the manhole.
10. Route the communication cable into the bottom of the hole at
the EMU/power source location. Verify that there are still
40 inches (1016 mm) of the communication cable exposed,
from the bottom of the hole (where the cable enters the hole) to
the end of the cable.
11. Backfill the dirt in the hole to grade level at the EMU/power
source location, while tamping with a hammer. Restore the
landscape as necessary.
Communication
4-25
Installing the EMU
Installing the wireless EMU involves wiring the communication
cable to the Communication Interface/Barrier box and mounting the
EMU at the power source location.
EMU Components
The wireless EMU (ADS p/n 3800-0148) houses the following
major components:

Communication Interface/Barrier PCB

Modem Reset PCB

Quad-Band TCP/IP Wireless Modem

Mini-wing Antenna
ADS ships the wireless EMU preassembled. The EMU is ready for
wireless communication once connected to a FlowShark Triton IS
monitor via a communication cable (ADS p/n 106227B), receiving
power from an external power source, and fitted with a SIM card.
Front of EMU
4-26
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Gathering Tools and Materials
Obtain the following items before initiating installation:

Medium (No. 2) Phillips head screwdriver

Small (1/2-inch/13-mm) flat head screwdriver (to fit orange
Communication Cable terminal block)

Wire strippers (with holes to strip 16-, 18-, and 20-gauge wires)

Small sharp side cutters (Do not use the big cable tie trimmers
used for ring/monitor installs!)

Vinyl electrical tape (not stretch tape)
Wiring the Communication Cable
Once the communication cable has been installed and at least 40
inches (1016 mm) of communication cable extends from the
ground, wire the communication cable to the EMU and install the
external power kit:
1.
Unscrew the 4 large plastic screws with the Phillips head
screwdriver and remove the cover to the EMU. Carefully set
the cover aside to avoid damage and prevent dirt from
contacting the cover gasket.
Communication
4-27
Inside of EMU with front cover removed
2.
Lay the EMU down next to the power source location, and
loosen the nut on the communication cable entry fitting. If the
fitting is snapped closed, use a small flat-blade screwdriver to
gently pry open the ears of the fitting.
4-28
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Opening the communication cable entry fitting
3.
Run the communication cable through the fitting and into the
box. Pull enough of the cable through the hole to allow room
to hold the cable while attaching the wires to the connector.
Communication cable inserted through the entry fitting
Warning: Verify that the communication cable is NOT
attached to the flow monitor.
Communication
4.
4-29
Terminate the 12 wires into the orange connector, using the ⅛inch flat screwdriver, as shown on the label affixed to the inside
cover of EMU box. Make sure all screws are tight.
Terminal
Wire Color
Gauge Wire
1
Yellow
22
2
Blue (small)
22
3
Black (small)
22
4
White
22
5
Red (small)
22
6
Green (small)
22
7
Brown
22
8
Orange
22
9
Red (large)
18
10
Blue (large)
18
11
Black (large)
18
12
Green (large)
and bare shield
drain wire
18 (green)/
22 (drain
wire)
Note: The wires can become loose while moving the
cable. Therefore, after terminating the wires, verify once
again that each wire is secure.
5.
Plug the orange connector into the corresponding port on the
black Communication Interface/Barrier Box, and then pull back
the excess cable from the outside of the EMU.
4-30
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Note: The port on the Communication Interface/Barrier
Box may be difficult to access because of its close
proximity to the modem. Therefore, it may be necessary to
remove the box from the EMU before connecting the
orange connector. Release the box from the back plate of
the EMU by grasping the rear edge (next to back plate) and
gently, but firmly, pulling to release the Velcro® grips.
After seating the orange connector, verify that all
connections to the Communication Interface/Barrier Box
are secure and reseat the box onto the Velcro.
Connecting the communication cable to the Communication Interface/Barrier
Box (with the box removed from the EMU)
6.
Tighten the nut on the communication cable entry fitting until
the cable is secure and cannot be moved in or out of the fitting.
7.
Record the IP address of the SIM card (ADS p/n 507181) and
then insert the SIM card into the slot in the modem.
Communication
Inserting the SIM card into the modem in the EMU
SIM card seated in the EMU modem
8.
Slide the SIM lock to the left to secure the card in place.
9.
Install the External Power Kit (ADS p/n 3800-0181) in the
EMU in the following way:
4-31
4-32
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
External Power Kit includes an external power cable (top) and a chassis
cable (bottom)
 Remove the plug at the top of the EMU to the right of the
communication cable entry fitting.
 Remove the nut from the metal connector on the chassis
cable (from the kit), and lubricate the O-ring on the
connector with Parker-O-Lube.
 Run the connector up through the hole from the inside out.
Make sure the O-ring seats properly into the grove on the
inside of the EMU.
Inserting the chassis connector through the hole in the EMU
Communication
4-33
 Thread the nut back onto the connector on the outside top
of the EMU to secure the connector in the hole, and tighten
the nut securely with a wrench.
Threading the nut onto the connector from the outside of the EMU
 Connect the plastic white connector from the chassis cable
to the corresponding connector on the cable attached to the
Communication Interface/Barrier Box in the EMU.
Connecting chassis connector to the Communication Interface/Barrier Box
4-34
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
 Attach the metal connector from the 10-foot power cable
to the chassis cable connector.
Connecting the 10-foot external power cable
Note: If additional cable is required to cover the distance
to the DC source, select an appropriate gauge of cable to
complete the run. The existing cable is 0.25 inches (6 mm)
in diameter and has an ethylene/propylene copolymer
jacket. If the cable requires splicing, use a junction box or
other method suitable for the environment in which the
cable will be installed.
10. Replace the cover on the EMU, and securely tighten the four
plastic screws. Be sure the edges of the cover align with the
edge of the box and that no wires are trapped in the gasket.
Installing the EMU
Installing the EMU involves mounting the EMU inside the
customer-supplied enclosure, disconnecting or removing the battery
pack from the monitor (when applicable), connecting the
communication cable to the monitor, hooking up to the external
power source, and verifying the wireless signal. Perform these tasks
in the following way:
Communication
1.
4-35
Mount the EMU to the panel inside the enclosure housing the
power supply using appropriate fasteners. The holes in which
the plastic screws go into to secure the cover of the EMU to the
chassis are the same holes through which the fasteners secure
the EMU to the enclosure. Therefore, it may be necessary to
remove the EMU cover to insert the fasteners through the holes
to mount the EMU to the enclosure. If this occurs, replace the
cover once the EMU is secured to the enclosure.
One of the holes through which to secure the EMU to the panel
2.
(applicable only to FlowShark Triton monitors containing the
12-volt IS battery pack) Disconnect the battery pack cable
from the regulator dome cable in the FlowShark Triton or
disconnect and remove the 12-volt IS battery pack completely
from the canister.
WARNING: Failing to disconnect the 12-volt IS battery
pack from the monitor regulator and applying external
power may result in acid discharge from the battery pack
and/or cause the battery pack to explode over time.
3.
Connect the end of the communication cable entering the
manhole to the COMM port on the top of the flow monitor.
Wrap rubber stretch tape around the entire cable connection,
extending 1 to 2 inches onto the cable beyond the connection.
4-36
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Communication cable from EMU connected to monitor with stretch tape
properly applied
4.
Run and connect the external power cable to the power supply,
and then connect to the power source. Refer to Chapter 5,
External Power, for information and instructions on installing
the power supply and connecting to the power source.
5.
Contact a remote support analyst (with access to the Internet
and the ADS Profile or Qstart software). Provide the IP
address and site name and then have the analyst attempt to
communicate with the flow monitor and perform standard
diagnostics or collect data.
6.
Have the analyst verify the signal strength of the antenna is
higher than –85. Valid signal strength can range from -111 to 51, with -51 being the highest/best possible signal strength and
-111 the lowest/worst possible signal strength. A signal
strength of less than -90 is considered poor and will result in
poor communication and a higher power drain. It also is likely
to have a negative impact during both data collection and
monitor configuration.
Communication
4-37
Note: The material of which the enclosure housing the
EMU is made may impact the strength of the signal
available. If the material is significantly reducing the
signal strength, consider installing the wireless antenna
(currently mounted inside the EMU) outside the enclosure.
If this requires drilling holes in the EMU and/or the
enclosure, take the appropriate measures to seal the holes
around the cable once the antenna is installed to ensure
protection for the internal components against the
elements.
7.
Backfill the trench between the manhole and the location at
which the EMU is installed, and restore the landscape as
necessary.
4-38
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Installing an EMUX
Establishing remote, wireless communications with an externallypowered FlowShark Triton monitor that also will be connected
serially to a SCADA or other process control system through an
RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) requires installation of an EMUX
(ADS p/n 106226E). Locate the EMUX outside the manhole (in
which the monitor is installed) in the proximity of the RTU and/or
external power source within a weatherproof (for outdoor
installation) or other protective (for indoor installation) enclosure.
Installing the EMUX primarily involves the following procedures:

Installing the communication cable

Installing the EMUX

Connecting the communication cable to the monitor

Installing a wireless antenna

Connecting an RTU to the EMUX

Providing external power to the unit
Installing the Communication Cable
Unless the monitor will be located outside a manhole, the
instructions for installing the communication cable for the EMUX
are the same as for the standard EMU. Therefore, please refer to
Installing the Communication Cable on page 4-19 for instructions.
If the monitor will be installed outside a manhole, proceed directly
to the following section, Installing the EMUX.
Communication
4-39
Installing the EMUX
Installing the wireless EMUX primarily involves installing the SIM
card in the EMUX, connecting the communication cable to the
EMUX, and mounting the EMUX near or adjacent to the RTU
and/or external power source.
Gathering Tools and Equipment
Obtain the following items before initiating installation:

Medium (No. 2) Phillips head screwdriver

Small (1/2-inch/13-mm) flat head screwdriver (to fit the orange
communication cable terminal block)

Wire strippers (with holes to strip 16-, 18-, and 20-gauge wires)

Small, sharp side cutters (Do not use the big cable tie trimmers
used for ring/monitor installations!)

Vinyl electrical tape (not stretch tape)
Installing the SIM Card
Install the SIM card (ADS p/n 507181) in the EMUX in the
following way:
1.
Record the IP address of the SIM card. The address should be
printed directly on the card or on a label affixed to the card.
2.
Loosen and remove the two screws from the front cover of the
EMUX, and then remove the cover.
4-40
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
EMUX with cover
SIM card clip
Inside of EMUX with cover removed
3.
Slide the SIM card into the SIM card clip on the board inside
the EMUX until it is seated securely in place. Orient the card
so that the beveled edge of the card corresponds with the
beveled edge on the lower right edge of the clip.
Communication
4-41
SIM card installed in clip (notice the beveled edge)
4.
Replace the cover onto the EMUX, and replace and tighten the
screws.
Connecting the Communication Cable to the
EMUX
Connect the communication cable to the EMUX in the following
way:
1.
(applies only to monitors installed in manholes) Verify that
the communication cable has been installed and at least 40
inches (1016 mm) of communication cable extends from the
ground at the EMUX location.
2.
Run the communication cable up through the fitting in the
enclosure in which the EMUX will be mounted. Pull enough
cable through the hole to allow room to hold the cable while
attaching the wires to the connector.
Warning: Verify that the communication cable is NOT
attached to the flow monitor.
3.
Terminate the 12 wires from the communication cable into the
orange connector on the bottom of the EMUX using the 1/8inch flat screwdriver. Refer to the label affixed to the EMUX
just above the 12-pin port or the table below. Make sure the
shrink-wrapped resistors remain in place while terminating the
wires, and verify that all the screws are tight.
4-42
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Terminal
Wire Color
Gauge Wire
1
Yellow
22
2
Blue (small)
22
3
Black (small)
22
4
White
22
5
Red (small)
22
6
Green (small)
22
7
Brown
22
8
Orange
22
9
Red (large)
18
10
Blue (large)
18
11
Black (large)
18
12
Green (large)
and bare shield
drain wire
18 (green)/
22 (drain
wire)
Note: The wires can become loose while moving the
cable. Therefore, after terminating the wires, verify once
again that each wire is secure.
Communication cable with orange connector (image on left shows wires
from cable terminated in the connector)
4.
Insert the orange 12-socket connector into the corresponding
port on the EMUX. When applicable, pull back the excess
cable from the outside of the enclosure, and then tighten the nut
Communication
4-43
on the cable entry fitting until the cable is secure and cannot be
moved in or out of the fitting.
Inserting communication cable connector into the port on the EMUX
Mounting the EMUX
ADS recommends installing the EMUX in the same location or in
close proximity to the RTU and/or power source. This minimizes
the distance required for the serial cable connecting the EMUX to
the RTU and, therefore, maintains a strong signal. It also limits
power degradation in transmission. Choose an enclosure for the
EMUX that is appropriate for the specific environment in which it
will function. When possible, consider mounting the unit in the
same enclosure that contains the RTU and/or power source.

Outdoor Installation Mount the EMUX inside a suitable
weatherproof enclosure.

Indoor Installation Mount the EMUX inside an appropriate
protective enclosure using good electrical practice.
Mount the EMUX in the following way:
1.
Clean the back surface of the EMUX with alcohol, and then
attach two pieces of Velcro (included) to the back of the unit.
4-44
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
2.
Clean the inside, rear wall of the enclosure with alcohol, and
then adhere two mating pieces of Velcro to the surface.
3.
Secure the EMUX to the inside of the enclosure with the
Velcro.
Connecting the Communication Cable to the
Monitor
Connect the communication cable running from the EMUX into the
manhole or other monitor location to the monitor in the following
way:
1.
(applicable only to FlowShark Triton monitors containing the
12-volt IS battery pack) Disconnect the battery pack cable
from the regulator dome cable in the FlowShark Triton or
disconnect and remove the 12-volt IS battery pack completely
from the canister.
WARNING: The internal 12-volt IS battery
pack must be disconnected from the FlowShark
Triton regulator before the communication cable
(from the EMUX) is connected to the monitor.
Failing to disconnect the 12-volt IS battery pack
from the monitor regulator and applying external
power may result in acid discharge from the
battery pack and/or cause the battery pack to
explode over time.
2.
Connect the monitor end of the communication cable to the
COMM port on the top of the flow monitor.
3.
For manhole installations, wrap rubber stretch tape around the
entire cable connection, extending 1 to 2 inches onto the cable
beyond the connection.
Communication
4-45
Communication cable from EMUX connected to the monitor with stretch
tape properly applied
Installing a Wireless Antenna
The EMUX supports the use of both ADS and customer-supplied
wireless antennas. Two wireless antenna options are available
through ADS: mini-wing (ADS p/n 3800-0163) and slim (ADS p/n
3800-0162). Customer-supplied antennas must meet the following
specifications:

50 ohms

VSWR < 1:1.5

Maximum gain of 3 dBi

SMA male connection
Note: This is NOT a reverse-polarity connection!
Consider the following when using an ADS antenna:

EMUX in Non-metallic Enclosure When using a nonmetallic enclosure to house the EMUX, install the antenna
completely within the enclosure:
 Secure the antenna by removing the protective tape from
the antenna and adhering the antenna to the inside wall of
the enclosure.
4-46
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
 Attach the antenna connector to the gold ANTENNA
connector on top of the EMUX.
Connecting antenna cable to ANTENNA port on EMUX

EMUX in Metallic Enclosure When housing the EMUX in
a metallic enclosure, the antenna must extend outside the
enclosure to ensure adequate reception.
 Run the cable through a pre-drilled or existing hole in the
enclosure.
 Secure the antenna by removing the protective tape from
the antenna and adhering the antenna to an appropriate
surface outside the enclosure.
 Attach the antenna connector to the gold connector on top
of the EMUX.
 Seal the space between the antenna cable and the enclosure
to prevent moisture from entering the enclosure through
the hole.
When installing a customer-supplied antenna, follow the vendor’s
recommendations for properly installing the antenna to ensure
adequate reception and then attach the antenna connector to the
gold connector on top of the EMUX.
Communication
4-47
Connecting the RTU to the EMUX
Connect the RTU to the MODBUS port (male pins) on the EMUX
using a customer-supplied serial cable with a female DB-9
connector configured to an RS-232 connection specification. It also
must support 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity. Refer to the
following figure to ensure proper wiring to the port:
Wiring diagram for MODBUS port on the EMUX
Providing External Power to the EMUX
After mounting the EMUX and hooking up the wireless antenna,
connect the cable coming from the external DC power source to the
EMUX in the following way:
1.
Remove the orange 4-plug connector seated in the 4-pin port on
the top of the EMUX.
2.
Wire the customer-supplied power cable running from the
external power supply to the orange 4-plug connector.
Terminate the 2 wires from the cable and the wire from earth
ground into the appropriate terminals on the orange connector
using a 1/8-inch flat screwdriver. Make sure the screws are
tight.
4-48
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Wiring external power cable and ground to connector on EMUX
3.
Reseat the connector (with the cable now attached) into the 4pin port on the EMUX.
4.
Run and connect the external power cable to the power supply
and then connect to the power source. Refer to Chapter 5,
External Power, for information and instructions on installing a
power supply and connecting to the power source.
5.
Contact a remote support analyst (with access to the Internet
and the ADS Profile software). Provide the IP address and site
name and then have the analyst attempt to communicate with
the flow monitor and perform standard diagnostics or a data
collect.
6.
Have the analyst verify the signal strength of the antenna is
higher than –85. Valid signal strength can range from -111 to 51, with -51 being the highest/best possible signal strength and
-111 the lowest/worst possible signal strength. A signal
strength of less than -90 is considered poor and will result in
poor communication and a higher power drain. It also is likely
to have a negative impact during both data collection and
monitor configuration.
Communication
4-49
Note: Even the material of which a non-metallic
enclosure housing the EMUX is made may impact the
strength of the signal available. If the enclosure is
significantly reducing the signal strength, consider
installing the wireless antenna outside the enclosure. If
this requires drilling holes in the enclosure, take the
appropriate measures to seal the holes around the cable
once the antenna is installed to ensure protection for the
internal components against the elements.
7.
Backfill the trench between the manhole and the location at
which the EMUX is installed, and restore the landscape as
necessary.
4-50
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Connecting to the Monitor in the Field
(Direct Connection)
The ADS Direct Connect Cable (ADS p/n 8000-0054) allows you
to connect directly to the FlowShark Triton with a laptop computer
for on-site communications.
Direct Connect Cable
Connect to the monitor with a laptop computer in the following
way:
1.
Attach the potted cable connector from the ADS Direct
Connect Cable to the corresponding COMM port on the top of
the monitor.
Note: When using the optional extension cable (ADS p/n
8000-0044-25), run it between the monitor and the direct
connect cable.
Communication
2.
4-51
Attach the serial connector end of the cable to the proper serial
port on the laptop computer.
Note: If your computer has a USB port and no serial port,
run a USB-to-serial adapter cable (and driver software)
between the Direct Connect Cable and the computer to
perform serial communications. ADS recommends the
following USB adapters: Dynex (model DX-UBDB9) and
Keyspan (model USA-19S).
3.
Designate the appropriate local port on the computer for
communication through the Profile or Qstart software. For a
serial connection, designate the local serial port. When using a
USB-to-serial adapter cable, designate the local USB port. It
will be different than the serial port. For more information,
refer to the Profile User's Guide #950015 (version B4 or
higher).
Note: The serial port on some older computers may not
provide adequate power for the Direct Connect Cable to
facilitate communication with the monitor. A USB-toserial adapter cable can regulate the power going to the
Direct Connect Cable, providing sufficient energy for
communication. Therefore, if the serial port is preventing
communication and a USB port is available on the
computer, use a USB-to-serial adapter cable (and driver
software) with the Direct Connect Cable to communicate
successfully with the monitor. Refer to the previous note
for adapter cable recommendations.
5-1
CHAPTER 5
External Power
The ADS® FlowShark® Triton can receive power from an external
DC power source. However, any connection of external power to
the monitor must occur through a standard external modem unit
(EMU, ADS p/n 3800-0148) or an EMUX (EMU/multiplexer, ADS
p/n 106226E) for compliance with IS certification.
Note: When installing an externally-powered EMU or
EMUX, ADS recommends locating the unit in close
proximity to the DC power source to maximize the net
power available to the unit.
Note: The externally-powered FlowShark Triton, EMU,
and EMUX are not equipped with backup power.
Therefore, in the event of an interruption or loss of power
at the power source, the monitor will discontinue taking
readings until power is restored. However, a loss of power
will not result in a loss of data. The monitor will retain all
stored data in memory.
5-2
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Installation
A typical installation involving external power includes the
following:

An AC mains power line terminated at a pole or post close to
the manhole in which the monitor is installed

An AC distribution device (i.e., disconnect, fuse, or breaker
box) on the pole/post

A ground rod installed next to the pole/post bonded to the AC
distribution device

An AC to 12-volt DC converter (ADS recommends using the
ADS Power Supply (p/n 5000-0727), which works with
worldwide AC power (94 – 240 VAC, 50 – 60 Hz))

A cable running between the external DC source and the EMU
or EMUX. The ADS External Power Kit (ADS p/n 38000181) designed for use with the EMU includes this cable.
However, the customer must supply cabling of the appropriate
length and specifications for the EMUX. The DC power
supplied must be regulated 12 V +/-10%.
Note: All work required to run AC power to the pole and
wire the power into an approved AC distribution device
(i.e., a disconnect, fuse, or breaker) should be performed
by a licensed electrician. Typically, an electrical permit
from the owner of the collection system or local power
authority is required to install a pole or electrical
equipment next to a monitor location.
External Power
5-3
DC Power Requirements and Consumption
To run on external power, the FlowShark Triton system requires a
power source capable of supplying a minimum of 1 ampere of 12volt regulated DC power (12 V +/-10% as measured/available at the
EMU or EMUX, not at the power source output). When long cable
runs are required, size the supply and cabling to ensure that line
losses do not reduce the net power available to the EMU or EMUX.
ADS offers a power supply (ADS p/n 5000-0727) for this
application. However, if you choose not to use the ADS Power
Supply, the alternate power supply must be a high-quality
industrial-type power supply with ripple no greater than 250mV
P-P.
To support FlowShark Triton monitors running in continuous mode,
the external DC power source must be capable of accommodating
the following system requirements concerning power consumption,
based on the wireless communication option (EMU or EMUX):
Note: The power to the monitor is ATEX/IECEx I.S.
compliant at 7-8 VDC.

EMU Following are the power requirements for monitors that
communicate wirelessly through an EMU:
 Monitor and GSM Modem Operating in Standby
110 mA average (includes EMU, monitor, and GSM
modem standby currents)
 Monitor Firing the Peak Combo Sensor, GSM
Modem in Standby 238 mA average (for 3 seconds)
 Monitor Firing the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, GSM
Modem in Standby 223 mA average (for 3.5 seconds in
a 36-inch pipe)
 Monitor Firing Sensors, GSM Modem Active (e.g.,
wireless diagnostics) 300 mA average
 GSM Modem During Communication, Idle 130 mA
5-4
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
 GSM Modem During Communication, Active 230
mA average (for 360 seconds (6 minutes) while collecting
90 blocks of data)
 Sleep Current with GSM Modem Continuously On
32 mA
 Sleep Current with GSM Modem Continuously Off
2 mA

EMUX Following are the power requirements for monitors
that communicate wirelessly through an EMUX:
 Monitor Operating in Standby 156 mA average
(includes EMUX, monitor, and GSM modem standby
currents)
 Monitor Firing the Peak Combo Sensor 238 mA
average (for 3 seconds)
 Monitor Firing the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor 223
mA average (for 3.5 seconds in a 36-inch pipe)
 Modbus Data Transfer 168 mA average (for 1 second)
 GSM Modem During Communication 230 mA
average (for 360 seconds (6 minutes) while collecting 90
blocks of data)
Installing and Wiring an ADS Power Supply to
the EMU or EMUX
The ADS Power Supply is a universal AC input supply (suitable for
use worldwide) that automatically adjusts to the proper voltage
upon connection. It is housed within a polycarbonate NEMA
4X/IP68 enclosure that includes cable glands for AC and DC cable
entry. To use the ADS Power Supply, install the power supply and
wire the external power cable (from the EMU or EMUX) to the
power supply in the following way:
External Power
1.
5-5
Mount the ADS Power Supply (ADS p/n 5000-0727) to the
panel or other mounting surface in the enclosure housing the
EMU or EMUX using appropriate fasteners through the four
0.175-inch (4.4-mm) holes located under the corner cover
screws.
Note: Do not drill new holes through the power supply
housing! This will expose the internal components of the
power supply to moisture, creating unsafe operating
conditions. It also will void the product warranty.
ADS Power Supply
2.
Verify that the 6-foot (1.8-m) AC power cord on the ADS
Power Supply is suitable for the application. Customersupplied cabling also may be used. A cable grip fitting, sized
for a 0.125- to 0.375-inch (3.2- to 9.5-mm) OD cable, seals the
exit for the DC output cabling. Replace the cable grip fittings
to accommodate custom AC supply or DC output wiring, when
necessary.
WARNING: When hard-wiring to the AC supply, ensure
that the AC source is de-energized and that all applicable
5-6
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
lockout/tagout and other electrical safety measures are
followed.
3.
Remove the front cover from the power supply by loosening
the 4 plastic screws.
4.
Run the external power cable (from the EMU or EMUX)
through the entry hole cable grip entry on the side of the power
supply case opposite the AC power cord.
5.
Terminate the wires from the external DC power cable in the
following way:
 Connect the –DC In wires from the cable to the –V
terminal in the power supply.
 Connect the +DC In wires from the cable to the +V
terminal in the power supply.
External Power
5-7
Wiring the external power cable to the ADS Power Supply
6.
Verify the following before connecting to the power source:
 Battery pack has been disconnected and removed from the
monitor.
 Communication cable is connected to both the monitor and
the EMU or EMUX.
5-8
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
 External power cable is connected to the EMU or EMUX
and the ADS Power Supply
7.
Connect the ADS Power Supply to the AC distribution device
(i.e., disconnect, fuse, or breaker box).
8.
Ensure the DC ON LED is illuminated and the DC LOW LED
is out.
9.
Securely tighten the cable grip fittings and replace the
enclosure cover. Make sure the cover properly aligns with the
gasket and that all screws are tightened equally (i.e., snug, but
not over-tightened).
6-1
CHAPTER 6
Configuration and Activation
After installing the ADS® FlowShark® Triton flow monitor and
sensors and establishing communications, it is necessary to
configure and activate the monitor to begin taking flow
measurements and recording data at the monitor location. This
chapter contains general instructions on the following activities
concerning monitor configuration and activation:

Creating a monitor location

Creating an installation (pipe) table (including setting Gain)

Selecting and editing devices (usually attached sensors)

Setting the communication parameters

Activating the monitor
This chapter also includes the procedure for running diagnostics on
the sensors, collecting data from the monitor, and upgrading the
firmware (embedded software) in the monitor.
Note: Most configuration, activation, diagnostic, data
collection, and firmware upgrade activities can be
performed through either the ADS Profile® or Qstart™
software. However, this manual only provides the
instructions for accomplishing these activities using
Profile. Therefore, if you are using Qstart, consult the
online help within the application for detailed instructions
on conducting these procedures. Qstart is a simple
configuration, activation, and diagnostic tool primarily
6-2 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
designed for setting up monitors quickly in the field. It
also includes several other features and functions, such as
data collection, archival, and display.
Refer to the Profile User's Guide #950015 (version B4 or higher)
for more detailed instructions on installing the software, collecting
monitor data, and configuring, activating, and confirming the
monitor.
Hardware and Software Compatibility
Please note the following compatibility requirements for using the
FlowShark Triton with the ADS Profile and/or Qstart software:

The FlowShark Triton is supported by Profile® software
version 3.3 and higher and the Profile User’s Guide #950015
(version B4 and higher). Prior versions do not support this
monitor.

The Qstart software can fully support the FlowShark Triton
with or without the Profile software running on the same
computer. However, if you will be using both applications on
the same computer, you must be running Profile version 3.4 to
ensure optimal support and compatibility between both
applications.

The Qstart software only supports FlowShark Triton monitors
with the 4.68 or later version of firmware.
Configuration and Activation
6-3
Configuring the Monitor Location
To ensure the most efficient and useful results for each monitor
location, the user must activate the FlowShark Triton flow monitor
with the proper configuration information to satisfy the specific
monitoring needs of the project and to reflect actual site conditions.
The configuration information includes critical details such as
specific pipe characteristics, location description, sensor assignment
and parameters, log rates, and other items relevant to the site and
project requirements.
The configuration information is stored in a Location Information
File (LIF) in the user’s local directory or network drive. Certain
elements of the LIF are saved to the monitor memory during
monitor activation.
This section includes instructions on performing the following
activities required for monitor configuration:

Creating a Monitor Location in the Profile database

Creating an Installation Table for the Monitor Location

Selecting and Editing Devices
Note: If remote communication already has been
established for the location, these activities can be
performed in cooperation between field and office
personnel. If remote communication is not available,
perform configuration and activation on site through direct
communication with the monitor.
Starting the Profile Software
Before traveling to the field for installation, configuration, and
activation activities, install the Profile software on the field
computer and register the software using a Profile license key
provided by ADS.
6-4 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Once installed, start the Profile software from an office or field
computer by selecting Start > Programs > ADS Corporation >
Profile from the Microsoft® Windows® start menu or doubleclicking on the Profile icon on the Windows desktop.
Profile icon on desktop
The Profile main screen displays.
Profile main screen
The left pane displays all the levels and current details for the
selected database on a tree. These levels and details are accessible
by expanding and collapsing the entries on the tree. Click the plus
symbol (+) next to an entry to display the items contained under that
level of the tree; click on the minus symbol (-) next to an entry to
collapse the items under that entry level.
Select an entry or level name in the left pane to display the details
of that entry in the right pane of Profile.
Configuration and Activation
6-5
The toolbar provides access to various functions and tools in
Profile based on the item selected in the left or right pane.
Creating a Monitor Location
Creating a new location includes entering and setting up the
location information in the following way:
1.
Select the <All Locations> group located under the database
level.
2.
Select the Edit > New > Location option or the New Location
toolbar button.
New Location toolbar button
A new location named New Location #1 is added to the <All
Locations> group and displays the Properties dialog.
6-6 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Properties dialog for the new location
3.
Enter the new Location Name. Do not duplicate more than
the first 7 characters of the monitor names for multiple
locations, unless the 8th character is followed by an underscore
(_) and a unique character(s). For example, you cannot use
the names FSTriton1 and FSTriton2. However, you could use
the names FSTriton_1 and FSTriton_2.
4.
Enter the new location Description.
5.
Select FlowShark Triton from the Series drop-down list.
The Properties displays the parameters and default options
corresponding to a FlowShark Triton monitor. The options
contained within the individual parameter fields include only
those options relevant to the selected monitor.
Configuration and Activation
Properties dialog for a new FlowShark Triton location
6.
Select the method by which you will communicate with the
monitor from the Connect Using drop-down list.
 TCP/IP Choose this option for wireless, remote
communication. Selecting this option also requires
entering the monitor’s IP address for the wireless
connection in the IP Address field.
Note: Do not use leading zeros before or within the IP
address. For example, an IP address of 166.213.006.020
contains leading zeros and, therefore, should be entered in
the following way: 166.213.6.20.
6-7
6-8 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
 Modem This option corresponds to landline
communication, which currently is not supported by the
FlowShark Triton.
 Serial Choose this option for direct, on-site
communication.
7.
Enter the monitor’s Serial Number.
8.
Choose one of the following methods for collecting data using
Profile:
 Auto Collection Select the Autocollect checkbox to
ensure Profile collects the data for the period from the last
timestamp or a user-defined start date and time to the
current date and time. Edit the corresponding Start Time
date and time to initiate auto collection at a user-defined
starting time.
 Manual Collection Edit the Start time and End time
fields to designate the date and time period for which you
want Profile to collect data from the monitor.
Note: The date and time range displayed in the Monitor
Data section represent the total range of data available in
the monitor memory.
9.
Enter the number of hours difference between the your location
(or the location of the computer on which the database resides)
and the location of the monitor in the Time Zone field. For
example, if you are in the U.S. Central time zone and the
monitor is located in the U.S. Eastern time zone, enter 1 in this
field. If you are in the Central time zone and the monitor is
located in the Pacific time zone, enter -2 in this field.
10. (optional) Enter the vertical distance from the manhole rim to
the bottom of the manhole invert in the Manhole Depth field.
11. Choose the rates at which you want the monitor to log data
from the corresponding drop-down lists:
 Normal Select the standard rate at which you want the
monitor to store data.
Configuration and Activation
6-9
Note: The Scan and Fast designations apply when
implementing the Dual Data Rate feature in MLI. The
Scan rate also pertains to applications involving Modbus
and Telog® Ru-33 operations.
 Fast Select the accelerated interval at which you want the
monitor to take and store readings once the threshold
defined in MLI has been exceeded. The monitor will
remain in this state until the flow conditions at the
monitoring point return to normal, as defined in MLI.
 Scan Select the interval at which you want the monitor to
take readings and verify whether an event threshold has
been exceeded. These readings are not stored or logged as
historical data for future data collection. Instead, the
readings taken at a particular date/time in the interval
remain available (or persist) until they are overwritten by
the readings taken at the next consecutive date/time in the
interval. For Modbus applications, the Scan rate also
represents the rate at which Modbus updates the data
available to the RTU or the Telog Ru-33. The RTU
requests this data from either the EMUX (Buffered Mode)
or the monitor (Passthrough Mode). The Telog unit
requests this data directly from the monitor. Please note
that the EMUX, when in use, automatically retrieves the
available (i.e., persisting) data from the monitor every
minute. When using the Telog Ru-33, ADS recommends
applying the same interval for both the scan rate in the
monitor and the rate at which the Telog unit requests data
from the monitor.
12. (applies only to Modbus/Telog Ru-33 applications) Select the
Enable checkbox and modify the following parameters in the
Modbus section as necessary:
 ID Enter the slave address number from 2 to 57, 59 to 96,
or 98 to 247 you want to be used when facilitating
communication between the EMUX and RTU or the
FlowShark Triton and the Telog Ru-33. The 1, 58, and 97
are used for other addressing purposes and will not be
recognized. Choose a number that is unique from the other
6-10 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
slave IDs used by the RTU or Telog unit when referencing
other devices. For Telog Ru-33 operations, ADS
recommends using 55 as the identifier through which to
request data from the monitor.
 Delay Response Enter the amount of time, in
milliseconds, following a request before the monitor
returns the requested data to the RTU (through the EMUX)
or the Telog Ru-33. The maximum delay allowed is 2000
ms. The default delay response is 10 ms.
13. Select OK to create a LIF for the location in the database and
exit the dialog.
The new monitor location with a single monitoring point now
exists in the database. A monitoring point is a location within
the pipe at which a sensor(s) is installed.
Adding a Second Monitoring Point
Establishing a new monitor location automatically creates one
monitoring point; however, each monitor location can support up to
two monitoring points. When applicable, add an additional
monitoring point to a location in the following way:
1.
Select the location for which you want to create a second
monitoring point.
2.
Click on the Monitoring Point button on the toolbar or select
Edit > New > Monitoring Point from the main menu.
Monitoring Point toolbar button
The second monitoring point displays with the selected
location under Monitoring Point 1.
Configuration and Activation
6-11
Creating an Installation Table
Creating an installation table involves defining the size, shape, and
physical characteristics of the monitoring point in order to allow the
software to properly calculate the correct depths and corresponding
quantities at the monitoring point. One installation table must be
created for each monitoring point.
The user can create an installation table using the Installation
Generator in the Profile software in the following way:
1.
Select the monitoring point for which you want to create the
installation table.
Monitoring Point 1 selected from Location ADSTown_001
2.
Select Tools > Installation Generator from the main menu or
click on the Installation Generator toolbar button on the
Profile main screen.
Installation Generator toolbar button
The Create Installation – Introduction dialog in the wizard
displays.
6-12 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Create Installation – Introduction dialog in the wizard
3.
Select the New radio button and then click on the Next button.
Create Installation – Installation dialog
4.
Select the Pipe radio button, and then click on the Next button.
Configuration and Activation
6-13
Create Installation – Type dialog
5.
Select the type or shape of the pipe from the drop-down list,
and then click on the Next button.
Create Installation – Dimension/Parameters dialog
6-14 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
6.
Enter the proper pipe dimensions in the corresponding fields,
and then click on the Next button.
Create Installation – Name dialog
7.
Enter an appropriate name for the installation in the text field,
and then click on the Next button.
Create Installation – Summary dialog
Configuration and Activation
8.
6-15
Review the installation table selection summary, and then click
on the Finish button. Select the Back button to return to
previous dialogs to edit any of the existing selections.
Option to save pipe table dialog
9.
Click on the Yes button to save the installation table to the
Profile database for the selected location.
Installation Generator dialog
10. Enter 0.9 in the VGain field or the average-to-peak ratio, if
other than 0.9.
11. Select File > Exit.
6-16 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Option to store coefficients
12. Click on the Yes button.
Store dialog displaying coefficients
13. (optional) Edit the Start Time field to indicate the date and
time at which to implement the designated Gain.
14. Click on the OK button.
Note: Repeat steps 1 through 14 to create an installation
table for a second monitoring point corresponding to the
location, when applicable.
Configuration and Activation
6-17
Selecting and Editing Devices
Select and edit the devices corresponding to the new monitor
location to log the desired data. Devices generally represent
sensors, but not always. Editing the devices involves setting
specific parameters to ensure the monitor and Profile properly
obtain and process the data. Perform the following steps to
properly select and edit devices:
1.
Select the location for which you want to select and edit
devices from the database.
2.
Expand the location contents (monitoring point and devices) by
clicking on the expansion symbol corresponding to the
location and then selecting Devices.
Devices selected for ADSTown_001
3.
Select the Edit > Properties option or the Properties toolbar
button.
Properties toolbar button
The Edit Devices dialog displays the available devices and devices
selected by default for Monitoring Point 1.
6-18 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Edit Devices dialog
4.
Select the monitoring point to which you want to assign the
devices from the Monitoring Point drop-down list.
5.
Select the checkboxes corresponding to the devices you want to
assign to the designated monitoring point from the Available
Devices selection box. A checkmark must display beside a
device in the Monitoring Point Devices section to ensure
Profile includes the device in the LIF. Deselect the
checkboxes corresponding to the devices you want to remove
from association with the selected monitoring point from the
Available Devices section. Profile selects the Peak Combo 1
and MLI 1 devices for the FlowShark Triton flow monitor by
default.
Note: Because the FlowShark Triton allows you to
connect two of the same device type to the monitor at one
time, the Available Devices list includes two of each
device type (e.g., Peak Combo 1 and Peak Combo 2),
except for the Modem Setup device. However, do not
assign two devices of the same type to the same
monitoring point. This will cause the monitor to overwrite
Configuration and Activation
6-19
the new data corresponding to one of the duplicate devices
with the data from the other device during data collection.
In addition, ADS recommends assigning a device to a
monitoring point of the same number. For example, assign
Peak Combo 1 only to Monitoring Point 1 and Peak
Combo 2 only to Monitoring Point 2.
Note: The Smart Depth 1 and Smart Depth 2 devices
represent stand-alone ultrasonic depth sensors.
Note: The MLI 1 and 2 and Modem Setup devices are
not associated specifically with a sensor. MLI represents
special software included in Profile (Basic Code) that is
downloaded to the monitor upon activation to support
activities such as water quality sampling and event
notification. Modem Setup represents a list of wireless
communication provider’s carrier codes.
The selected devices display in the Monitoring Point Devices
section.
6.
Set or edit the parameters corresponding to each selected
device in the following way:
 Select the device you want to edit in the Monitoring Point
Devices section, and then select the Edit button.
The Edit [device type] Parameters dialog displays for the
selected device.
 Edit the device parameters. Most device dialogs include
multiple tabs representing sensors or other tools that
require editing. Refer to the following sections for details
concerning the specific parameters corresponding to each
device and any associated sensors/tools. Click on and edit
each sensor/tool tab as necessary.
 Select the OK button after editing the device parameters
and any associated sensor/tools.
6-20 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
 Repeat the three previous steps from step 6 for each
additional device that requires new settings or
modification.
Note: Each Edit [device type] Parameters dialog
contains default settings.
7.
(applicable only to locations with a second monitoring point)
Repeat steps 4 through 6 to assign a device(s) to the other
monitoring point and edit the device(s) parameters.
8.
Click on the OK button to save the device selections and
parameter modifications to the LIF.
Editing the Peak Combo/Peak Combo SL Sensor
Device
This section describes the parameters for both the Peak Combo and
Peak Combo SL devices. The Peak Combo SL device represents
the Slimline Peak Combo Sensor, which does not have a pressure
sensor component. Therefore, Profile does not include pressure
parameters for the Peak Combo SL device, but does provide them
for the Peak Combo device. All other parameters detailed in this
section are the same for both devices.
Configuration and Activation
6-21
Edit Peak Combo 1 Parameters dialog showing the Ultrasonic tab
Edit the following Device Parameters at the bottom of the dialog,
and then edit the individual tabs as described in the following
sections.
6-22 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual

Physical Offset Enter the physical offset for the sensor at
the time of installation if it was installed offset from the bottom
center of the pipe. Refer to Chapter 3, Sensor Installation and
Connection, for instructions on measuring the physical offset.
The default physical offset is 0.

Channel Select the channel number of the port on top of the
monitor to which the device is connected.

Pipe Height This field displays the pipe height at the
monitoring point, based on the installation table. This
parameter is not editable from this location.
Note: Under normal conditions, the remaining parameters
corresponding to the Peak Combo and Peak Combo SL
devices should not require modification. However, if
additional adjustments are necessary, the following
sections provide a detailed description of each parameter.
Ultrasonic tab
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the upward-looking
ultrasonic depth sensor in the Peak Combo Sensor/Slimline Peak
Combo Sensor (i.e., the Peak Combo SL device):

Enable Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor begins
taking upward ultrasonic depth readings at the designated
interval upon activation.

Flow Type Select the option that best reflects the kind of
flow conditions that typically occur at the monitoring point
from the drop-down list:
 Typical Flow exhibits a typical diurnal pattern. This is
the default setting.
 Wet/Stagnant Flow remains in the pipe, but moves only
during wet weather events.
 Usually Dry Pipe typically remains dry, except under
wet weather conditions.
Configuration and Activation
6-23

Electronic Offset Enter the difference that exists between
the depth sensor readings and the manually measured depth.
The default value is 0.

Deadband Select the distance from the sensor face within
which readings received will be ignored. The default value
(Auto) represents a percentage of the flow depth and should be
sufficient under normal circumstances. It also is the best option
for handling shallow flows. However, consider another value
when the sensor readings reveal a potential problem with false
drop-outs. Choose a value for the deadband that is sufficiently
below the minimum depths that legitimately occur at the
monitoring point, yet above the confirmed drop-outs that have
been detected. Refer to the Profile Software User’s Guide for
more information on this parameter.

Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the depth data to memory. This option is selected by default.

Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
Advanced Parameters dialog
Note: Modifications made to the Advanced Parameters
should be performed only by or under the guidance of
trained ADS personnel. Therefore, ADS recommends
leaving the default settings (Auto) in place.
6-24 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
 DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value
between -12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
 Ping Amplitude Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that is sent out, or
transmitted from, the sensor. Smaller pipes typically
require weaker (quieter) amplification; larger pipes
typically require stronger (louder) amplification.
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter the percentage of
full amplification at which to transmit the signal.
Enter a percentage between 10 and 100 percent, where
100 percent represents maximum amplification.
Pressure tab
Edit the following parameters corresponding only to the pressure
depth sensor in the Peak Combo Sensor:
Note: Keep in mind that the Peak Combo SL device (i.e.,
the Slimline Peak Combo Sensor) does not have a pressure
component. Therefore, Profile does not include pressure
parameters for this device.
Configuration and Activation
6-25
Edit Peak Combo 1 Parameters dialog displaying the Pressure tab

Enable Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor begins
taking pressure depth readings at the designated interval once
activated.

Electronic Offset Enter the difference that exists between
the pressure depth sensor readings and the manually measured
depth. The default value is 0.
6-26 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual

Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
pressure depth data to memory. This option is selected by
default.
Velocity tab
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the Doppler velocity
sensor in the Peak/Slimline Peak Combo Sensor:
Edit Peak Combo 1 Parameters dialog displaying the Velocity tab
Configuration and Activation
6-27
Note: The velocity parameters corresponding to the
Peak/Slimline Peak Combo Sensor typically should not
require editing. However, if modifications are necessary,
ADS does not recommend making changes to these
parameters without proper training or assistance.
Note: When using a Peak Combo Sensor and Surface
Combo Sensor at the same monitoring point, ADS
recommends maintaining the same settings for all of the
parameters corresponding to both Peak Velocity (Velocity
tab on the Edit Peak Combo Parameters dialog) and
Surcharge Peak Velocity (Peak Velocity tab in the Edit
Surface Combo Parameters dialog) to ensure consistency
between the velocity readings.

Enable Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor begins
taking velocity readings at the designated interval once
activated.

Flow Type Select the option that best reflects the kind of
flow conditions that typically occur at the monitoring point
from the drop-down list:
 Typical Flow exhibits a typical diurnal pattern. This is
the default setting.
 Wet/Stagnant Flow remains in the pipe, but moves only
during wet weather events.
 Usually Dry Pipe typically remains dry, except under
wet weather conditions.

Sensitivity Select the appropriate velocity sensor sensitivity
from the drop-down list. A sensitivity that is too high may
produce noise, causing interference in the signal and resulting
in spikes in the data. A sensitivity that is too low can produce
readings that are low in comparison with confirmation readings.
The default sensitivity is 10.
6-28 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual

Velocity Direction Select one of the following options that
reflects the general direction of the flow at the monitoring point
and position of the velocity sensor. The default is Forward.
 Bidirectional Choose this option for monitoring points
that potentially experience reverse flows. The
Peak/Slimline Peak Combo Sensor typically is positioned
facing upstream into the flow. Choosing this ensures the
monitor analyzes both positive and negative values
returned from the velocity sensor.
 Forward Choose this option for monitoring points where
reverse flows are not expected and to ensure the monitor
only analyzes positive values returned from the velocity
sensor. The Peak/Slimline Peak Combo Sensor typically is
positioned facing upstream into the flow. This is the most
common, and the default, option for selection. ADS
recommends using this setting for most monitoring
applications.
 Backward Choose this option for monitoring points at
which the Peak/Slimline Peak Combo Sensor has been
positioned facing downstream and to ensure the monitor
only analyzes flows moving away from the face of the
sensor. One application in which this would be the
preferable option would be for measuring velocity in an
outgoing line following two incoming lines in the manhole.
 Backward Bidirectional Choose this option when the
Peak/Slimline Peak Combo Sensor is installed facing
downstream and to ensure the monitor analyzes flows
moving both away from and toward the face of the sensor.
This option would be beneficial, for example, when using a
weir to measure overflows with the potential of river
intrusion.

Maximum Velocity Select the maximum expected velocity
that will occur at the site for the monitor to use in fine-tuning
the velocity data. The default setting is Auto, which serves to
optimize the range and resolution of the velocity data samples
to match the characteristics of the flow. However, if the
velocity readings at the location measure at least 10 feet per
Configuration and Activation
6-29
second (fps) on a regular basis, ADS recommends choosing the
15 fps option for this parameter.

Transmit Frequency Select the frequency at which to
transmit the signal. ADS recommends leaving the default
setting (Normal) for older Peak Combo Sensors (serial
numbers of 8xxxx) and selecting the High setting for newer
Peak Combo Sensors (serial numbers of 1xxx) and existing
Slimline Peak Combo Sensors. However, if hydraulic
conditions at the site are resulting in questionable or erroneous
readings, consider applying the other frequency option.
Contact ADS for assistance when necessary.

Gain This value represents the factor applied to raw velocity
(RAWVEL entity in Profile) to determine average velocity
(VELOCITY entity in Profile) and to calculate quantity for
typical daily flows. Profile does not apply Gain to the velocity
readings reported in Diagnostics, where the raw velocity
readings are used for comparison against the manual
measurements. This parameter is editable through the
Installation Generator and the Quantity Coefficient
Generator in Profile.

Cross Check Gain Enter the value by which to multiply raw
velocity readings in the monitor to determine average velocity
for comparison purposes in the monitor.

Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the velocity data to memory. This option is selected by default.

Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
6-30 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Advanced Parameters dialog
Note: Modifications made to the Advanced Parameters
should be performed only by or under the guidance of
trained ADS personnel. Therefore, ADS recommends
leaving the default settings (Auto) in place.
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
 DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value
between -12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
 Ping Amplitude Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that is sent out, or
transmitted from, the sensor. Smaller pipes typically
require weaker (quieter) amplification; larger pipes
typically require stronger (louder) amplification.
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
Configuration and Activation
−
6-31
Manual Select this option to enter the percentage of
full amplification at which to transmit the signal.
Enter a percentage between 10 and 100 percent, where
100 percent represents maximum amplification.
Temperature tab
The temperature sensor measures the temperature of the flow at the
location at which the sensor is installed. The temperature is logged
at the same interval as the other entity data. Both the Peak Combo
Sensor and Slimline Peak Combo Sensor (represented by the Peak
Combo SL device) use temperature data to calculate the speed of
sound in water.
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the temperature
sensor in the Peak Combo Sensor and Slimline Peak Combo Sensor
(represented by the Peak Combo SL device):
6-32 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Edit Peak Combo 1 Parameters dialog displaying the Temperature tab

Sensor Select the source from which to measure the
temperature used when compensating for temperature in
Peak/Slimline Peak Combo Sensor readings. The channels
correspond to the sensors connected to those channels (ports)
on the monitor. The option selected here should be consistent
with the option selected for the Channel in the Device
Parameters section at the bottom of the dialog.
Configuration and Activation
6-33
Note: The stored temperature value is the actual water
temperature reading from the Peak/Slimline Peak Combo
Sensor.

Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the temperature data to memory. This option is selected by
default.
Editing the Surface Combo Sensor Device
The following section provides descriptions for the parameters
corresponding to the Surface Combo Sensor device.
Note: The parameters for an Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
with the pressure option are also set through the Smart
Depth, Pressure, and Temperature tabs on the Edit
Surface Combo 1 Parameters device dialog.
6-34 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Edit Surface Combo 1 Parameters dialog (Smart Depth tab)
Edit the following Device Parameters at the bottom of the dialog,
and then edit the individual tabs as described in the following
sections:
Configuration and Activation
6-35

Physical Offset Enter the physical distance from the face of
the sensor to the crown (top) of the pipe. Refer to Chapter 3,
Sensor Installation and Connection, for instructions on
measuring the physical offset.

Channel Select the channel number of the port on top of the
monitor to which this device is connected.

Pipe Height This field displays the pipe height at the monitor
location, based on the installation table. This parameter is not
editable from this location.
Note: Under normal conditions, the remaining parameters
corresponding to the Surface Combo device should not
require modification. However, if additional adjustments
are necessary, the following sections provide a detailed
description of each parameter.
Smart Depth (Ultrasonic) tab
The smart depth sensor measures the distance (or range) from the
crown of the pipe to the surface of the flow.
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the downwardlooking ultrasonic (smart) depth sensor in the Surface Combo
Sensor or the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor with the pressure option:

Electronic Offset Enter the difference that exists between
the smart depth sensor readings and the manually measured
depth, when applicable. The default value is 0.
Note: An electronic offset is rarely needed. An offset
greater than +/- 0.5 inches typically indicates that the
physical offset or pipe height has been measured or
recorded incorrectly.

Mode Select the mode in which you want the smart depth
sensor to operate based on environmental factors or site
constraints. Although the current default setting is High
Power, ADS recommends using the Normal setting under most
conditions. However, if erratic Smart Depth readings occur,
consider using the High Power setting.
6-36 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual

Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the smart depth data to memory. This option is selected by
default.

Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
Advanced Parameters dialog
Note: Modifications made to the Advanced Parameters
should be performed only by or under the guidance of
trained ADS personnel. Therefore, ADS recommends
leaving the default settings (Auto) in place.
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
 DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value
between -12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
 Surcharge Detection Select the Disable checkbox to
prevent the monitor from implementing the Surcharge
Detection function when processing smart depth data. For
locations that typically do not experience surcharges,
Configuration and Activation
6-37
disabling Surcharge Detection eliminates the processing
time required for this function and, as a result, conserves
monitor power.
6-38 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Surface Velocity tab
Edit the parameters corresponding to the surface velocity sensor in
the Surface Combo Sensor.
Edit Surface Combo 1 Parameters dialog displaying the Surface Velocity
tab
Configuration and Activation
6-39

Enable Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor begins
taking velocity readings at the designated interval once
activated.

Transmit Frequency Select the frequency at which to
transmit the signal. ADS recommends leaving the default
setting (Normal) for most applications. However, if hydraulic
conditions at the site are resulting in questionable or erroneous
readings, consider applying one of the other frequency options.
Contact ADS for assistance when necessary.

Sensitivity Select the appropriate velocity sensor sensitivity
from the drop-down list. A sensitivity that is too high may
produce noise, causing interference in the signal and resulting
in spikes in the data. A sensitivity that is too low can produce
readings that are low in comparison with confirmation readings.
The default sensitivity is 15.

Velocity Direction Select one of the following options that
reflects the general direction of the flow at the monitoring point
and position of the velocity sensor. The default is Forward.
 Bidirectional Choose this option for monitoring points
that potentially experience reverse flows. The Surface
Combo Sensor typically is positioned facing upstream
toward the oncoming flow. Choosing this ensures the
monitor analyzes both positive and negative values
returned from the velocity sensor.
 Forward Choose this option for monitoring points where
reverse flows are not expected and to ensure the monitor
only analyzes positive values returned from the velocity
sensor. The Surface Combo Sensor typically is positioned
facing upstream toward the oncoming flow. This is the
most common option for selection. ADS recommends
using this setting for most monitoring applications. It also
requires less processing time and conserves power.
 Backward Choose this option for monitoring points at
which the Surface Combo Sensor has been positioned
facing downstream and to ensure the monitor only analyzes
flows moving away from the face of the sensor. One
6-40 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
application in which this would be the preferable option
would be for measuring velocity in an outgoing line
following two incoming lines in the manhole.
 Backward Bidirectional Choose this option when the
Surface Combo Sensor is installed facing downstream and
to ensure the monitor analyzes flows moving both away
from and toward the face of the sensor. This option would
be beneficial, for example, when using a weir to measure
overflows with the potential of river intrusion.

Maximum Velocity Select the maximum expected velocity
that will occur at the site for the monitor to use in fine-tuning
the velocity data. The Auto option serves to optimize the range
and resolution of the velocity data samples to match the
characteristics of the flow. The default setting is 10 fps.

Duration Select the amount of time for the sensor to transmit
and receive the velocity signal based on the noise present at the
monitoring point. Most sites require only a one (1) second
(default) interval. However, sites that experience elevated
noise levels or velocity dropouts to zero require a longer
interval (2).

Coefficient A Enter the factor (offset) by which to calibrate
surface velocity to ensure accurate surface velocity readings
across all velocity ranges. ADS strongly recommends using the
default setting (0 fps) for this offset; therefore, please contact
ADS before modifying this setting.

Coefficient B Enter the factor (gain) by which to calculate
surface velocity to ensure accurate surface velocity readings
across all velocity ranges. ADS strongly recommends using the
default setting (1.00); therefore, please contact ADS before
modifying this setting.

Gain This value represents the factor applied to raw velocity
(RAWVEL entity in Profile) to determine average velocity
(VELOCITY entity in Profile) and to calculate quantity for
typical daily flows. Profile does not apply the Gain to the
velocity readings reported in Diagnostics, where the raw
velocity readings are used for comparison against the manual
Configuration and Activation
6-41
measurements. This parameter is editable through the
Installation Generator or the Quantity Coefficient
Generator.

Cross Check Gain Enter the value by which to multiply raw
velocity readings in the monitor to determine average velocity
for comparison purposes in the monitor. The default is 0.90.

Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the velocity data to memory. This option is selected by default.

Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
Advanced Parameters dialog
Note: Modifications made to the Advanced Parameters
should be performed only by or under the guidance of
trained ADS personnel. Therefore, ADS recommends
leaving the default settings (Auto) in place.
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
 DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
6-42 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value
between -12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
 Ping Amplitude Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that is sent out, or
transmitted from, the sensor. Smaller pipes typically
require weaker (quieter) amplification; larger pipes
typically require stronger (louder) amplification.
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter the percentage of
full amplification at which to transmit the signal.
Enter a percentage between 10 and 100 percent, where
100 percent represents maximum amplification.
Configuration and Activation
6-43
Peak Velocity tab
Edit the parameters corresponding to the (surcharge) peak velocity
sensor in the Surface Combo Sensor in the following way:
Edit Surface Combo 1 Parameters dialog displaying the Peak Velocity tab
Note: When using a Peak Combo Sensor and Surface
Combo Sensor at the same monitoring point, ADS
6-44 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
recommends maintaining the same settings for all of the
parameters corresponding to both Peak Velocity (Velocity
tab on the Edit Peak Combo Parameters dialog) and
Surcharge Peak Velocity (Peak Velocity tab in the Edit
Surface Combo Parameters dialog) to ensure consistency
between the velocity readings. However, you may
consider disabling this sensor when both are present to
conserve battery life, monitor memory, and data collection
time.

Enable Select this checkbox to enable the parameters for
modification and to ensure the monitor begins taking velocity
readings at the designated interval once activated.

Sensitivity Select the appropriate velocity sensor sensitivity
from the drop-down list. A sensitivity that is too high may
produce noise, causing interference in the signal and resulting
in spikes in the data. A sensitivity that is too low can produce
readings that are low in comparison with confirmation readings.
The default sensitivity is 10.

Velocity Direction Select one of the following options that
reflects the general direction of the flow at the monitoring point
and position of the velocity sensor. The default is Forward.
 Bidirectional Choose this option for monitoring points
that potentially experience reverse flows. The Surface
Combo Sensor typically is positioned facing upstream
toward the oncoming flow. Choosing this ensures the
monitor analyzes both positive and negative values
returned from the velocity sensor.
 Forward Choose this option for monitoring points where
reverse flows are not expected and to ensure the monitor
only analyzes positive values returned from the velocity
sensor. The Surface Combo Sensor typically is positioned
facing upstream toward the oncoming flow. This is the
most common option for selection. ADS recommends
using this setting for most monitoring applications.
 Backward Choose this option for monitoring points at
which the Surface Combo Sensor has been positioned
Configuration and Activation
6-45
facing downstream and to ensure the monitor only analyzes
flows moving away from the face of the sensor. One
application in which this would be the preferable option
would be for measuring velocity in an outgoing line
following two incoming lines in the manhole.
 Backward Bidirectional Choose this option when the
Surface Combo Sensor is installed facing downstream and
to ensure the monitor analyzes flows moving both away
from and toward the face of the sensor. This option would
be beneficial, for example, when using a weir to measure
overflows with the potential of river intrusion.

Maximum Velocity Select the maximum expected velocity
that will occur at the site for the monitor to use in fine-tuning
the velocity data. The Auto (default) option serves to optimize
the range and resolution of the velocity data samples to match
the characteristics of the flow. However, if the velocity
readings at the location measure at least 10 feet per second
(fps) on a regular basis, ADS recommends choosing the 15 fps
option for this parameter.

Transmit Frequency Select the frequency at which to
transmit the signal. ADS recommends leaving the default
setting (Normal) for most applications. However, if hydraulic
conditions at the site are resulting in questionable or erroneous
readings, consider applying the other frequency option.
Contact ADS for assistance when necessary.

Gain This value represents the factor applied to raw velocity
(RAWVEL entity in Profile) to determine average velocity
(VELOCITY entity in Profile) and to calculate quantity for
typical daily flows. Profile does not apply the Gain to the
velocity readings reported in Diagnostics, where the raw
velocity readings are used for comparison against the manual
measurements. This parameter is editable through the
Installation Generator or the Quantity Coefficient
Generator.
Note: The Cross Check Gain parameter does not apply
to the (Surcharge) Peak Velocity Sensor; therefore, it is not
available on the Peak Velocity tab.
6-46 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual

Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the velocity data to memory. This option is selected by default.

Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
Advanced Parameters dialog
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
 DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value
between -12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
 Ping Amplitude Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that is sent out, or
transmitted from, the sensor. Smaller pipes typically
require weaker (quieter) amplification; larger pipes
typically require stronger (louder) amplification.
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
Configuration and Activation
−
6-47
Manual Select this option to enter the percentage of
full amplification at which to transmit the signal.
Enter a percentage between 10 and 100 percent, where
100 percent represents maximum amplification.
Pressure tab
The pressure sensor measures the height of the water above the
sensor (mounted at the crown of the pipe) under surcharge
conditions where the flow has completely filled the pipe and is
rising in the manhole.
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the pressure depth
sensor in the Surface Combo Sensor or the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
with the pressure option:
6-48 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Edit Surface Combo 1 Parameters dialog displaying the Pressure tab

Enable Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor begins
taking pressure depth readings at the designated interval once
activated.

Electronic Offset Enter the difference that exists between
the pressure depth readings and the value equal to the pipe
Configuration and Activation
6-49
height minus the physical offset of the Surface Combo Sensor.
However, ADS recommends leaving this value at zero.

Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
pressure depth data to memory.
Temperature tab
Edit the parameters corresponding to the temperature sensor in the
Surface Combo Sensor in the same way in which you edited the
parameters for the temperature sensor in the Peak Combo Sensor.
Refer to the parameter descriptions and instructions for the
Temperature tab on page 6-31 for detailed information on the
individual parameters on the Temperature tab.
6-50 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Editing the Smart (Ultrasonic) Depth Sensor
Device
Edit Smart Depth 1 Parameters dialog
Configuration and Activation
6-51
Edit the following parameters corresponding to the downwardlooking ultrasonic (smart) depth sensor as necessary:
Note: Edit the parameters for an Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
equipped with the pressure option through the Surface
Combo Sensor device. Refer to Editing the Surface
Combo Sensor Device on page 6-33 for more information.
Parameters
Note: Under normal conditions, the parameters in this
section (Parameters) should not require modification.
However, if additional adjustments are necessary, refer to
the detailed description of each parameter.

Electronic Offset Enter the difference that exists between
the smart depth sensor readings and the manually measured
depth, when applicable. The default value is 0.
Note: An electronic offset is rarely needed. An offset
greater than +/- 0.5 inches typically indicates that the
physical offset or pipe height has been measured or
recorded incorrectly.

Mode Select the mode in which you want the smart depth
sensor to operate based on environmental factors or site
constraints. Although the current default setting is High
Power, ADS recommends using the Normal setting under most
conditions. However, if erratic Smart Depth readings occur,
consider using the High Power setting.

Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the smart depth data to memory. This option is selected by
default.

Advanced Select this button to access the Advanced
Parameters dialog.
6-52 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Advanced Parameters dialog
Note: Modifications made to the Advanced Parameters
should be performed only by or under the guidance of
trained ADS personnel. Therefore, ADS recommends
leaving the default settings (Auto) in place.
Modify the parameters as necessary, and then select OK once
complete.
 DAC Gain Choose the method for managing the
amplification of the analog signal that returns to the sensor:
−
Auto Select this option to allow the monitor to
automatically optimize the amplification of the signal.
−
Manual Select this option to enter a fixed value
between -12db (lower amplification) and +12db (high
amplification) at which to amplify the signal.
 Surcharge Detection Select the Disable checkbox to
prevent the monitor from implementing the Surcharge
Detection function when processing smart depth data. For
locations that typically do not experience surcharges,
disabling Surcharge Detection eliminates the processing
time required for this function and, as a result, conserves
monitor power.
Configuration and Activation
6-53
Sensor

Physical Offset Enter the physical distance from the face of
the sensor to the crown (top) of the pipe. Refer to Chapter 3,
Sensor Installation and Connection, for instructions on
measuring the physical offset. The default offset is 1.25 inches.

Pipe Height This field displays the pipe height at the monitor
location, based on the installation table. This parameter is not
editable from this location.

Channel Select the channel number of the port on top of the
monitor to which this device is connected.
Temperature
The temperature sensor measures the air temperature in the pipe to
apply when calculating the speed of sound in air.
Note: Under normal conditions, the parameters in the
Temperature section should not require modification.
However, if additional adjustments are necessary, refer to
the detailed description of each parameter.

Sensor Select the source from which to measure the
temperature used when compensating for temperature in
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor readings. The channels correspond to
the sensors connected to those channels (i.e., ports) on the
monitor. The option selected here should be consistent with the
option selected for the Channel in the Sensor section to the
left of the Temperature section.
Note: The stored temperature value is the actual air
temperature reading from the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor.

Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor logs
the temperature data to memory. This option is selected by
default.
6-54 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Editing the Modem Setup Device
Modem Setup dialog
Note: The Modem Setup device applies only to monitors
equipped with roaming SIM cards for wireless
communication and requires advanced knowledge
involving wireless networks. Therefore, ADS strongly
recommends contacting Customer Support for guidance
and assistance before attempting to set up this device.
A roaming SIM card in the monitor modem enables the monitor to
perform wireless communication through multiple carrier networks
in the vicinity of the monitor location. The Modem Setup device
allows you to designate the providers that support the SIM card and
offer service in the area as well as prioritize the order in which you
want the monitor to attempt to communicate through each
provider’s network. Priority should reflect the availability, strength,
Configuration and Activation
6-55
reliability, and consistency of the carrier’s signal to ensure
communication.
Parameter 1 on the Modem Setup dialog should represent the
carrier that you estimate will ensure the highest, most consistent
level of success in performing wireless communication. Designate
the remaining carriers in descending order of reliability until you
have indicated all of the possible carrier options corresponding to
your monitor location. Use the following format for entering the
carrier information in each field:
at+cops=1,2,””12345””, where 12345 represents the
wireless carrier code
For example, the carrier information for the provider Orange
(located in the United Kingdom) would be
at+cops=1,2””23433””.
Note: ADS reserves the Enable Debug option for
internal diagnostic use only.
Editing the Data Delivery Device
Edit data delivery setup dialog
6-56 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
The Data Delivery device enables the monitor to upload flow data
stored in the monitor memory to an IntelliServe database or an FTP
site at a user-designated interval. To upload the data to an FTP site,
you must know the address of the FTP site, the folder at the FTP
site in which you want the monitor to place the data, and the
username and password the monitor must use to access the site.
Edit the data delivery device in the following way:

Mode Select the destination to which you want the monitor to
deliver the data. This list includes an IntelliServe database or
an existing FTP site. To deliver data to an IntelliServe
database, you must enter the IP address for the IntelliServe
system in the IP Address field of the Alarm Notification
section on the Edit MLI Device Properties dialog.

Interval Select the rate at which you want the monitor to
upload data to the selected destination. Determine the
appropriate interval based on the sample rate for the monitor
and the number of entities for which the monitor records data.
A faster sample rate and/or a greater number of entities may
require a more frequent interval for data delivery.
Note: The remaining parameters apply only when
uploading data to an FTP site.

Site Enter the address of the FTP site to which you want the
monitor to send the data.

Folder Enter the name of the folder at the FTP site to which
you want the monitor to upload the data.

Username Enter the username through which the monitor
can access the FTP site.

Password Enter the password through which the monitor can
access the FTP site.
Configuration and Activation
6-57
Editing the Flow Device
Edit Flow Device Properties dialog
The Flow device enables the monitor to calculate and log flow
(QContinuity) based on the type of depth and velocity
measurements available to and designated by the user. The
device(s) assigned to the monitoring point must be capable of
measuring both depth and velocity measurement to enable the
monitor to calculate QContinuity. Edit the flow device in the
following way:

Flow Type Select QContinuity from the drop-down list.
Note: The options available for Depth Type and
Velocity Type correspond to the devices assigned to the
monitoring point.

Depth Type Select the depth sensor from which you want to
apply depth data in calculating QContinuity from the dropdown list.

Velocity Type Select the velocity sensor from which you
want to apply velocity data in calculating QContinuity from the
drop-down list.

Store Data Select this checkbox to ensure the monitor stores
the flow data to memory.
6-58 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Editing the MLI Device
Typically, the MLI device does not require editing. However, if the
monitor will support activities such as event notification or dual
data rates, refer to the Profile User’s Guide #950015 (version B4 or
higher) for detailed instructions on properly setting the applicable
parameters for the MLI device.
Configuration and Activation
6-59
Setting the Communication
Parameters
Setting the communication parameters involves designating the
communication ports and temperature thresholds to ensure proper
communication, measurement, and maintenance of the FlowShark
Triton flow monitor. Modify the communication parameters as
necessary.
Note: Typically, the default settings should not require
modification.
1.
Select a monitor location from the Profile main screen, and
then select Tools > Diagnostics from the main menu or click
on the Diagnostics toolbar button.
Diagnostics toolbar button
The Monitor Diagnostics dialog displays.
2.
Select Communication Parameters from the Functions dropdown list, and click on the Perform button.
6-60 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Monitor Diagnostics dialog
The Select Communication Parameters dialog displays.
Note: The Communication Parameters screen is
common to all monitor types serviced by the Profile
software. As a result, some fields and default values are
not relevant to the FlowShark Triton and, therefore, will
not affect monitor operation.
Configuration and Activation
6-61
Select Communication Parameters dialog
3.
Select or enter the communication parameters as necessary:
 Modem Name Select the modem you want to use during
modem communication from the drop-down list. This list
should include all available modems on your computer.
 Modem Port Select the proper port for modem
communication from this drop-down list. This list should
include all available ports on your computer.
 Serial Port Select the proper port for serial
communication from this drop-down list. This list should
include all available ports on your computer.
Note: If your computer has only a USB port and no serial
port, use a USB-to-Serial adapter cable (and driver
software) to perform serial communications. Before
attempting communications, make sure that you designate
the appropriate port (not the serial port) for the USB
adapter in Profile. ADS recommends the following USB
adapters: Dynex-model DX-UBDB9 and Keyspan-model
USA-19S.
6-62 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
 DMI Port (This parameter does not apply to the
FlowShark Triton)
 Timeout Enter the number of seconds you want your
local computer to wait for a response from the monitor
once communication has been initiated.
 Attempts Enter the number of times you want your local
PC to request data from the monitor following a failed
attempt while the monitor is still on line.
 Low Temperature Enter the temperature reading from
the monitor, ultrasonic upward depth sensor, and pressure
depth sensor below which you want Profile to provide
notification.
 High Temperature Enter the temperature reading from
the monitor, ultrasonic upward depth sensor, and pressure
depth sensor above which you want Profile to provide
notification.
 Log Communications Select this checkbox to record
all communication activities with the monitor.
 Status on Connect Select this checkbox to view details
of the current state of the monitor when monitor
communications are established. If you do not want to
view the monitor status details at connect, do not select this
checkbox.
 Low Battery 1502,1506,3500,4000 (These parameters
do not apply to the FlowShark Triton)
 Low Modem Battery TCP/IP (This parameter does not
apply to the FlowShark Triton)
 Low Signal Strength TCP/IP Enter the signal strength
(in dBm) below which you want Profile to provide
notification for the wire communication unit, when
applicable. ADS recommends using -95 dBm for the low
signal strength.
 Low Battery FlowShark (This parameter does not
apply to the FlowShark Triton)
Configuration and Activation
6-63
 Low Battery FlowShark IS Internal (This parameter
does not apply to the FlowShark Triton)
 Low Battery FlowShark IS External (This parameter
does not apply to the FlowShark Triton)
 Low Battery FlowAlert/RainAlert II (This parameter
does not apply to the FlowShark Triton)
 Low Battery Triton/FlowHawk Enter the voltage
below which you want Profile to provide notification for
the internal battery in FlowShark Triton monitors. ADS
recommends entering 7.5 to ensure successful
communication and operation.
Note: Notification of low battery voltage or signal
strength occurs during the data collection process and
during monitor activation. View the associated logs
through the Diagnostics tool and Log Viewer in the
Profile software.
4.
Select the OK button.
6-64 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Activating the Monitor
After configuring the monitor, activate the monitor to initiate the
flow monitoring process based on the monitor configuration.
Monitor activation involves generating the activation data using the
Profile software, downloading this data to the monitor, and
initiating flow data measurement and logging. The activation data
includes relevant portions of the LIF and other configuration
parameters necessary to ensure monitoring activities reflect the
specific site conditions and project requirements. The monitor
requires these files and information to properly measure and record
the flow.
Monitor activation occurs through the Diagnostics tool in Profile.
Activate the monitor in the following way:
1.
Select the monitor location for activation from the Profile main
screen, and then click on the Diagnostics toolbar button.
The Monitor Diagnostics dialog displays.
2.
Select the Connect button to establish communication with the
monitor.
Profile initiates communication with the monitor and
establishes a connection.
3.
Select Activate from the Functions drop-down list, and then
click on the Perform button.
Configuration and Activation
6-65
Selecting the Activate option from the Functions section on the Monitor
Diagnostics dialog
Profile downloads the configuration and installation
information, activates the monitor, and begins logging data
based on the selected configuration.
4.
Select Update Connection Type from the Functions dropdown list, and then click on the Perform button.
Note: The FlowShark Triton is configured in the factory
for Serial (i.e., on-site) communication upon receipt. To
configure the monitor for another method of
communication (e.g., GPRS), choose the appropriate
option through the Update Connection Type function.
To maintain serial communication as the desired method of
communication, skip steps 4 and 5 and proceed directly to
step 6.
6-66 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Selecting Update Connection Type from the Functions drop-down list
The Update Connection Type dialog displays.
Update Communication Type dialog
5.
Select the method through which communication with the
monitor will occur from the Communication Type drop-down
list, and then click on the OK button.
Configuration and Activation
6-67
Communication options
6.
Click on the Disconnect button once activation is successful
(designated in the Results section) and complete and the
communication type has been designated.
The local computer disconnects from the monitor.
7.
Click on the Close button to exit the Monitor Diagnostics
dialog.
6-68 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Setting Up the RTU to Retrieve the
Current Data through Modbus
Following monitor activation, you must program the RTU with the
appropriate Modbus register addresses corresponding to the current
entity and monitor data you want to retrieve from the monitor. ADS
also recommends verifying that the RTU is retrieving the desired
output data shortly following monitor activation.
Note: The Telog Ru-33 does not require programming
with the Modbus register addresses to ensure it retrieves
the correct data. However, consider verifying whether the
Telog unit is successfully retrieving data following monitor
activation and Telog connection.
Designating the Data for Retrieval
Use the appropriate software application supporting the RTU to
designate the entity and monitor data you want the unit to retrieve
for the SCADA or other process control system. Refer to Appendix
D, Modbus Data Registers, to view the entity and monitor data
available for retrieval and to determine the associated register
addresses required for obtaining the selected data.
Verifying the Modbus Output Data
Perform the following to verify the accuracy of the Modbus output
values, when applicable:
1.
Verify that the monitor has been activated, the RTU has been
programmed to retrieve the desired data, and the applicable
Modbus application has been launched.
Configuration and Activation
6-69
2.
Allow the FlowShark Triton monitor to log data for an
appropriate amount of time to obtain an adequate amount of
data. Please note the interval at which the monitor takes
readings for Modbus output is based on the Scan rate.
3.
Collect the data from the monitor. Refer to Collecting Data
from the Monitor on page 6-87 for detailed instructions.
4.
Compare the data collected from the monitor to the output
values obtained through Modbus. The data collected through
Profile reflects an average of the readings taken over a specific
interval; the values retrieved through the Modbus interface
represent the current (persistent) data in the monitor from the
last interval (readings). Therefore, the values compared may
not be exactly the same, but should be similar.
6-70 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Running Sensor Diagnostics
Profile’s diagnostics tool enables the user to verify the proper
operation of sensors, obtain current readings and status, adjust
settings, and identify, diagnose, and troubleshoot potential problems
with ultrasonic depth, velocity, and pressure sensors. Run
diagnostics for the system sensors in the following way:
1.
Select the monitor location for which you want to run
diagnostics on a sensor from the Profile main screen, and then
select Tools > Diagnostics or click on the Diagnostics toolbar
button.
Diagnostics toolbar button
The Monitor Diagnostics dialog displays.
Monitor Diagnostics dialog
Configuration and Activation
2.
6-71
Select the Connect button to establish communication with the
monitor.
Profile initiates communication with the monitor and
establishes a connection.
Monitor Diagnostics (Upward Ultrasonic 1) dialog once connected to
monitor
3.
Run sensor diagnostics based on the instructions outlined in
one of the following sections corresponding to the specific
sensor type for which you want to run diagnostics:
6-72 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Ultrasonic Depth Diagnostics
This section provides instructions on running diagnostics on the
upward-looking depth sensors found in the Peak Combo Sensor
(PC) and Slimline Peak Combo Sensor (PCS) once connected to the
monitor through the Monitor Diagnostics dialog. Run diagnostics
on the upward ultrasonic depth sensor in the following way:
1.
Select the Upward Ultrasonic 1 sensor from the Diagnose
Device drop-down list, and then select the Diagnose button.
Upward Ultrasonic 1 refers to the ultrasonic depth sensor in
both the Peak Combo Sensor and Slimline Peak Combo Sensor.
Selecting an Upward Ultrasonic device from the Diagnose Device dropdown list on the Monitor Diagnostics dialog
The Diagnostics dialog displays the current configuration
parameters stored in the LIF for the Upward Ultrasonic 1
sensor.
Configuration and Activation
6-73
Upward Ultrasonic Diagnostics dialog showing current parameters for the
Upward Ultrasonic 1 device
2.
Click on the Read button.
The Results section displays the current depth and temperature
readings measured by the upward ultrasonic depth sensor in the
Upward Ultrasonic Diagnostics dialog.
6-74 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Upward Ultrasonic Diagnostics dialog displaying results for the Upward
Ultrasonic 1 device following sensor firing
3.
Verify the accuracy, consistency, and quality of the readings,
and edit the configuration parameters as necessary.
Electronic Offsets can be used to make monitor depth readings
coincide with depths measured in the field.
 Field Depth = UpDepth1 + Electronic Offset
 If the sensor reading is Low, add a positive (+) electronic
offset.
 If the sensor reading is High, add a negative (–) electronic
offset.
Note: Enter an electronic offset only when your are
confident in the accuracy of the manual measurements and
physical offset of the sensor.
4.
(optional) Click on the Advanced button to view more
detailed diagnostic information.
Configuration and Activation
6-75
Advanced Parameters dialog
5.
Select the Store button to save any changes made in the device
parameters to the LIF in the database.
Note: When running diagnostics on multiple devices for
the same monitor, finish all device diagnostics before
reactivating the monitor with the updated LIF. Store the
changes for each device to the LIF as you complete them
and before you exit the device window. Reactivate the
monitor with the new LIF after completing diagnostics on
all the selected devices.
6.
Select the Close button to exit the Upward Ultrasonic
Diagnostics dialog and return to the Monitor Diagnostics
dialog.
Pressure Depth Diagnostics
This section provides instructions for running diagnostics on the
pressure depth sensors found in the Peak Combo Sensor (PC),
Surface Combo Sensor (SC), and Ultrasonic Depth Sensor with the
pressure option (SC) once connected to the monitor through the
Monitor Diagnostics dialog. Run diagnostics on the pressure
depth sensor in the following way:
1.
Select the Pressure [1 or 3] sensor from the Diagnose Device
drop-down list, and then select the Diagnose button. Pressure
1 represents the pressure sensor in the Peak Combo Sensor;
6-76 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Pressure 3 represents the pressure sensor in both the Surface
Combo Sensor and the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor with the
pressure option.
The Pressure Diagnostics dialog displays the current
configuration parameters stored in the LIF for the Pressure 1/3
sensor.
Pressure Diagnostics dialog displaying the current parameters for the
Pressure 1 device
2.
Click on the Read button.
The Results section displays the current depth and temperature
readings measured by the pressure depth sensor in the
corresponding combo sensor. Measured Depth is the depth of
the water over the Peak Combo Sensor or surrounding the
Surface Combo Sensor pressure sensor. Adjusted Depth is the
depth of flow in the pipe, calculated after factoring the
physical and electronic offsets into the Measured Depth.
Configuration and Activation
6-77
Pressure Diagnostics dialog for the Pressure 1 device displaying the
results following sensor firing
3.
Verify the accuracy of the pressure depth and temperature
readings, and edit the configuration parameters as necessary.
4.
Select the Store button to save any changes made in the device
parameters to the LIF in the database.
5.
Select the Close button to exit the Pressure Diagnostics dialog
and return to the Monitor Diagnostics dialog.
Velocity Diagnostics
This section provides instructions for running diagnostics on the
peak, surface, and surcharge velocity sensors found in the Peak
Combo Sensor (PC), Surface Combo Sensor (SC), and Slimline
Peak Combo Sensor (PCS) once connected to the monitor through
the Monitor Diagnostics dialog. Run diagnostics on all of the
velocity sensors in the following way:
6-78 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
1.
Select the Velocity 1, Peak Velocity 3, or Surface Velocity 3
from the Diagnose Device drop-down list, and then select the
Diagnose button. Velocity 1 represents the velocity sensor in
both the Peak Combo Sensor and the Slimline Peak Combo
Sensor, Peak Velocity 3 represents the surcharge peak velocity
sensor in the Surface Combo Sensor, and Surface Velocity 3
represents the surface velocity sensor in the Surface Combo
Sensor.
The Diagnostics dialog displays the current configuration
parameters stored in the LIF for the Velocity 1/Peak Velocity
3/ Surface Velocity 3.
Velocity Diagnostics dialog displaying the current parameters for the
Velocity 1 device
2.
Click on the Read button.
The Results section displays the current velocity of the flow,
temperature, and other factors measured by the selected
velocity sensor.
Configuration and Activation
6-79
Velocity Diagnostics dialog displaying the current velocity readings and
other data after firing the Velocity 1 device
3.
(optional) Click on the Advanced button to view more
detailed diagnostic information.
Advanced Parameters dialog
4.
Verify the accuracy of the reading, and edit the configuration
parameters as necessary.
6-80 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
5.
Select the Store button to save any changes made in the sensor
parameters to the LIF in the database.
Note: When running diagnostics on multiple devices for
the same monitor, consider waiting to reactivate the
monitor with the new LIF until after completing the device
diagnostics on all the selected devices. However, save the
changes to the database before exiting each device
window.
6.
Select the Close button to exit the Velocity Diagnostics dialog
and return to the Monitor Diagnostics dialog.
Smart Depth Diagnostics
This section provides instructions for running diagnostics on the
downward-looking ultrasonic depth sensor found in the Surface
Combo Sensor (SC), Ultrasonic Depth Sensor (SD), and Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor with the pressure option (SC) once connected to the
monitor through the Monitor Diagnostics dialog. Run diagnostics
on the smart depth sensor in the following way:
1.
Select the Smart Depth 3 sensor from the Diagnose Device
drop-down list, and then select the Diagnose button.
The Ultrasonic Diagnostics dialog displays the current
configuration parameters stored in the LIF for the Smart
Depth 3 sensor.
Configuration and Activation
6-81
Ultrasonic Diagnostics dialog displaying the current parameters for the
Smart Depth 3 device
2.
Click on the Read button.
The Results section displays the current depth of the flow,
range, and other factors measured by the Smart Depth
ultrasonic sensor.
6-82 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Ultrasonic Diagnostics dialog displaying the results for the Smart Depth 3
device following sensor firing
3.
Verify the accuracy, consistency, and quality of the readings,
and edit the configuration parameters as necessary.
Note: You can use an electronic offset to compensate for
small differences between the depth readings from the
monitor and depths measured in the field. The smart depth
sensor uses algorithms and digital data processing to yield
significant accuracy in range measurements. Please do not
apply electronic offsets without proper training or
guidance from ADS.
4.
(optional) Click on the Advanced button to view more
detailed diagnostic information.
Configuration and Activation
6-83
Advanced Parameters dialog
5.
Select the Store button to save any changes made in the sensor
parameters to the LIF in the database.
Note: When running diagnostics on multiple devices for
the same monitor, finish all device diagnostics before
reactivating the monitor with the updated LIF. Store the
changes for each device to the LIF once complete and
before exiting the device window. Reactivate the monitor
with the new LIF after completing diagnostics on all the
selected devices.
6.
Select the Close button to exit the Ultrasonic Diagnostics
dialog and return to the Monitor Diagnostics dialog.
Temperature Diagnostics
This section provides instructions for running diagnostics on the
temperature sensors found in the Peak Combo Sensor (PC), Surface
Combo Sensor (SC), Slimline Peak Combo Sensor (PCS),
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor (SD), and Ultrasonic Depth Sensor with
the pressure option (SC) once connected to the monitor through the
Monitor Diagnostics dialog. Run diagnostics on the temperature
sensor in the following way:
6-84 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
1.
Select the Temperature [1 or 3] sensor from the Diagnose
Device drop-down list, and then select the Diagnose button.
Temperature 1 represents the temperature sensor in both the
Peak Combo Sensor and the Slimline Peak Combo Sensor;
Temperature 3 represents the temperature sensor in the
Surface Combo Sensor and the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor.
The Temperature Diagnostics dialog displays.
Temperature Diagnostics dialog for the Temperature 1 device
2.
Click on the Read button.
The Results section displays the current temperature in or
above the flow measured by the corresponding temperature
sensor.
Configuration and Activation
6-85
Temperature Diagnostics dialog displaying the current temperature for the
Temperature 1 device from the sensor
3.
Verify the accuracy of the reading. This reading represents the
water temperature.
4.
Click on the Close button to exit the Temperature Diagnostics
dialog and return to the Monitor Diagnostics dialog.
Activating the Monitor
If a change has been made to any of the sensor parameters,
reactivate the monitor through the Diagnostics mode. Do not
reactivate a monitor if no change has been made.
While connected to the monitor, select Activate from the
Functions drop-down list and then select the Perform button.
Select the Disconnect button to discontinue communication with
monitor when finished running diagnostics on the system sensors.
6-86 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Note: ADS also recommends performing confirmations
to verify the accuracy of the data and equipment.
Confirmations involve comparing manual flow depth,
temperature, and velocity measurements taken in the field
against monitor readings taken electronically. The
technician or analyst confirms the accuracy of the data
based on the difference between the monitor and field
readings. For more information, refer to the Profile User’s
Guide #950015 (version B4 or higher).
Configuration and Activation
6-87
Collecting Data from the Monitor
The data collection function available through Diagnostics provides
enhanced features for viewing and analysis. Once the collection
process is complete, Profile displays the data in both hydrograph
and scattergraph formats based on the entities collected. In addition
to the scattergraph displaying the depth-to-velocity relationship, it
also displays a scattergraph illustrating the correlation between
depth entities.
For analysis purposes, the Diagnostics tool automatically processes
the data using Site DR (data review). This feature identifies issues
concerning data quality or missing information and offers
recommendations (when necessary) for conducting further review,
investigation, or analysis. Collect data from the monitor in the
following way:
Note: You can perform group and scheduled collects
using the Communications tool.
1.
Select the monitor location from which you want to collect
data, and then select Tools > Diagnostics from the main menu
or click on the Diagnostics toolbar button.
Diagnostics toolbar button
The Monitor Diagnostics dialog displays.
6-88 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Monitor Diagnostics dialog
2.
Select the Connect button to establish communication with the
monitor.
Profile initiates communication with the monitor and
establishes a connection.
3.
Select Collect from the Functions drop-down list, and then
select the Perform button.
Configuration and Activation
6-89
Selecting the Collect option from the Functions drop-down list on the
Monitor Diagnostics dialog
Profile displays the Collect the Specified Data dialog.
6-90 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Collect the Specified Data dialog
4.
Designate the range of data you want to collect from the
monitor by editing the Start and End Time fields in the
Collect Information in the section. Edit these fields directly
by selecting the portion of the date or time stamp you want to
change and then entering the appropriate designation or using
the arrows to scroll up and down in the range. If you do not
edit the range, the start date and time automatically default to
the Auto Collect Start Dates saved in the LIF. This time is
defined as the last ending collect date/time plus one second.
5.
Select the Collect button.
The Results section displays the status of the collect. Profile
collects all entity data from the monitor for the selected
date/time range and stores it in the currently selected
database.
Configuration and Activation
6-91
Collect The Specified Data dialog indicating data collection was a success
6.
Click on the Next button.
The View Hydrograph – [location name] dialog displays the
collected data in hydrograph format.
6-92 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
View Hydrograph – [location name] dialog
7.
Review the data on the hydrograph, and then click on the Next
button. Under optimal conditions, the depth and velocity data
should reflect a consistent diurnal pattern.
The View Depth and Velocity Scattergraph – [location name]
dialog displays the collected depth and velocity data in
scattergraph format.
Configuration and Activation
6-93
View Depth and Velocity Scattergraph – [location name] dialog
8.
Review the data on the scattergraph, and then click on the Next
button. Under optimal conditions, the data on the graph should
reveal velocity increasing with depth.
The View Ultrasonic and Pressure Scattergraph – [location
name] dialog displays the collected ultrasonic and pressure
depth data in scattergraph format.
6-94 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
View Ultrasonic and Pressure Scattergraph – [location name] dialog
9.
Review the data on the scattergraph, and then click on the Next
button. A properly performing pressure depth sensor should
display a one-to-one relationship with the UNIDEPTH data.
The Site DR Analysis – [location name] dialog displays the
results of the site data review analysis of the collected data and
any recommendations for resolving identified issues.
Configuration and Activation
6-95
Site DR Analysis – [location name] dialog
10. Review any issues identified and the suggested actions, and
then click on the Finish button.
11. Click on the Close button.
The Monitor Diagnostics dialog displays. The Results section
displays the recommendations from Site DR Analysis when
applicable.
6-96 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Monitor Diagnostics dialog displaying good results without
recommendations
Configuration and Activation
6-97
Upgrading the Monitor Firmware
Profile enables you to download updated firmware to the
FlowShark Triton flow monitor that may include new features and
capabilities or performance improvements and enhancements in
functions such as data processing, analysis, or communications.
ADS strongly recommends collecting the data from the monitor
before updating the firmware in the monitor to avoid losing the flow
data stored in the monitor memory. ADS also recommends
reactivating the monitor after updating the firmware.
Upgrade the firmware in the FlowShark Triton flow monitor
memory in the following way:
1.
Select the monitor location for which you want to upgrade the
firmware, and select Tools > Diagnostics from the main menu
or click on the Diagnostics toolbar button.
Diagnostics toolbar button
The Monitor Diagnostics dialog displays.
2.
Select the Connect button to establish communication with the
monitor.
Profile initiates communication with the monitor and
establishes a connection.
3.
Select Update Firmware from the Functions drop-down list,
and then select the Perform button.
6-98 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Selecting the Update Firmware option from the Functions drop-down list
on the Monitor Diagnostics dialog
The Form Firmware Download dialog displays.
Download Firmware dialog
Configuration and Activation
6-99
4.
Select the Browse button
corresponding to the Firmware
field to locate and designate the file applicable to the firmware
download. This program file represents the firmware containing
the updated code for data processing activities.
5.
Select the OK button.
Profile downloads the new firmware to the monitor.
6.
Disconnect from the monitor using Profile. If you are
connected to the monitor through a direct (serial) connect
cable, disconnect the cable from the monitor after
disconnecting through Profile. Then, reconnect the cable to
the monitor.
The firmware is written to the monitor after the connection
terminates.
7.
Wait a few minutes.
8.
Select Connect on the Monitor Diagnostics dialog
9.
Select Activate from the Functions drop-down list, and then
select the Perform button.
Profile activates the monitor with the updated firmware.
6-100 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Viewing Diagnostic and Data Logs
Profile generates detailed logs for many activities performed
through Diagnostics, such as monitor activation, data collection,
and firmware downloading. These logs are available immediately
following the activity and for future access to historical information.
1.
Select the monitor location for which you want to view a
diagnsotic or data log from the Profile main screen, and then
click on the Diagnostics toolbar button.
Diagnostics toolbar button
The Monitor Diagnostics dialog displays.
2.
Select the monitoring point for which you want to view a log
from the Monitoring Point drop-down list.
3.
Select Logs from the Functions drop-down list.
Configuration and Activation
6-101
Selecting the Logs option from the Functions drop-down list on the
Monitor Diagnostics dialog
4.
Click on the Perform button.
The View Logs dialog displays.
6-102 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
View Logs dialog
5.
Select the type of log you want to view from the Log Type
drop-down list.
The Logs section displays all logs available for the selected
location and log type.
6.
Select the specific log you want to view, and select the View
button.
The View Logs dialog displays the logs available for viewing
corresponding to the selected log type.
7.
(optional) Select the Print button to print the log file contents.
7-1
CHAPTER 7
Monitor Installation
After installing the sensors and establishing communications, install
the ADS® FlowShark® Triton monitor in the manhole. The monitor
mounts inside the manhole by an aluminum mounting bracket
attached to the monitor and bolted to the manhole wall or rim or by
a hook connected to the monitor that attaches to a rung. The
following procedures for monitor installation apply to most sites.
However, because manholes differ in many ways, some sites may
require the installer to implement slight modifications to the
standard installation technique.
Note: When ordering a monitor, please also indicate the
mounting option to ensure you receive the appropriate
installation hardware: wall/rim mount (ADS p/n I40-0009)
or rung mount (ADS p/n 8000-0021).
Before installing the monitor at the site, activate the monitor to
verify that the monitor is configured correctly for the application
and that the battery pack is operating at an adequate voltage. Make
any necessary changes to the configuration before mounting the
unit. Refer to Chapter 8, Maintenance and Troubleshooting, for
information on replacing the battery pack, when necessary.
Note: Manhole and sewer system work involves confined
space entry and is inherently dangerous. Therefore,
installers and technicians must comply with all federal,
state, and municipal regulations concerning confined space
entry. ADS is not responsible for any injuries, damages,
7-2
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
claims, or liability resulting directly or indirectly from the
use of this installation guide or the installation of any ADS
equipment.
Monitor Installation
7-3
Mounting the Monitor on Manhole
Rung
The simplest way to mount a monitor in a manhole is to attach it to
a rung. FlowShark Triton monitors come with a standard hook
(ADS p/n 800-0021) for this purpose.

Make sure the rungs are capable of holding the weight of the
monitor and cables. The monitor weighs 30.3 pounds (13.7 kg)
with added weight coming from the cables.

The hook must be closed to prevent accidental dislodging from
its support rung. The hook has two pieces, a curved portion
that goes over the rung and a straight portion which closes the
hook underneath the rung. The hook must be closed and the
clamping bolt/nut tight enough to ensure that the straight
closure remains in position.
BURIED
GSM ANTENNA
SERVICE LOOP
(ONLY ONE CABLE
SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
LADDER RUNG
MOUNT
MANHOLE
RIM
GSM MODULE
ANTENNA CABLE
FLOWSHARK TRITON MONITOR
CABLE(S) ANCHORED TO WALL
FlowShark Triton monitor secured to a manhole rung
7-4
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Mounting the Monitor to the Manhole
Wall
If the project will involve measuring flow over a long period of
time, consider mounting the monitor permanently to the manhole
wall. Using a monitor mounting bracket/flange (ADS p/n I400009), you can hang the monitor more securely and out of the way
to allow use of the rungs.
Mount the monitor handle to the manhole wall as follows:
1.
Determine the appropriate location to mount the monitor
handle to the manhole wall. Consider the following when
selecting the proper location:
 Select a location that will allow you to remove the monitor
easily during service visits using the mounting bracket
(extension handle).
 Select a location that provides only a minimal potential for
the monitor to experience surcharge conditions.
 Select a location that will prevent the manhole lid from
potentially damaging the monitor during removal or when
rotating in the opening.
 Select a location that will allow personnel to enter/exit the
manhole without removing monitor.
2.
Hold the top end of the mounting bracket against the manhole
wall, and mark the location for the mounting hole through the
keyhole in the bracket.
3.
Drill a hole approximately 3 inches (75 mm) deep at the mark,
and install a 3/8-inch x 3-inch. (10-mm x 75-mm) anchor bolt
in the hole.
Note: Make sure all anchor bolts, studs, nuts, and
washers used in mounting the monitor are stainless steel.
Monitor Installation
7-5
4.
Twist a nut onto the anchor bolt, but do not tighten it down.
Leave enough space between the nut and the wall for the
thickness of the mounting bracket.
5.
Mount the bottom of the bracket onto the monitor mounting
flange with two M8 x 30-mm stainless steel bolts, two M8
stainless steel lock washers, and two M8 stainless steel flat
washers (supplied with the FlowShark Triton when shipped).
Bolting the mounting bracket to the flange welded to the monitor
6.
Carefully lower the monitor into the manhole, and place the
keyhole of the mounting bracket over the anchor bolt.
Note: ADS strongly recommends attaching a security line
to the monitor before lowering it into the manhole to
prevent the monitor from accidentally dropping down the
manhole during installation.
7.
Tighten and secure the bolt against the mounting bracket.
7-6
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Monitor installed in the manhole
8.
Neatly coil and secure the excess sensor and communication
cables in the manhole to simplify future monitor service
activities. Secure the cables to plastic anchors or ¼-inch x 2¼inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolts using 14-inch.(5-mm x 300mm) cable ties.
Note: Be careful to avoid damaging the sensor cables
during installation activities. Even small pinholes in the
cable can cause a sensor to malfunction or fail.
Monitor Installation
7-7
Mounting the Monitor to the Manhole
Rim
Mounting a monitor to the manhole rim has certain advantages.
Removing and reinstalling are easier. The rim may be more
structurally sound than deteriorated rungs. However, the manhole
lid must clear the mounting hardware while it is removed or
replaced.
Mount the monitor bracket/flange (ADS p/n I40-0009) to the
manhole rim in the following way:
1.
Determine the appropriate location to mount the monitor
handle to the inside of the iron manhole rim. Consider the
following when selecting the proper location:
 Select a location that will allow you to remove the monitor
easily during service visits using the mounting bracket
(extension handle).
 Select a location that provides only a minimal potential for
the monitor to experience surcharge conditions.
 Select a location that will prevent the manhole lid from
potentially damaging the monitor during removal or when
rotating in the opening.
 Select a location that will allow personnel to enter/exit the
manhole without removing monitor.
2.
Hold the keyhole at the top end of the bracket against the lower
inner rim of the manhole, and mark the location for the
stainless steal stud through the keyhole in the bracket. Make
sure there will be enough room to lift the bracket up and over
the stud when installed.
3.
Drill a hole(s) into the manhole rim 1 inch (2.5 cm) deep using
a carbide-tipped 5/16-inch drill bit or one that matches the size
of the anchor bolt to be inserted.
7-8
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Note: Consider starting the hole using smaller bits to
make pilot holes and increasing up to a the final size bit.
In addition, spray cutting oil or another lubricant into the
hole while drilling and tapping.
Drilling the hole in the manhole rim
4.
Use a 3/8-inch x 16 threads-per-inch (10-mm) tap that matches
the stud thread to cut threads in the hole. Twist the tap
clockwise ¾ turn, and then back out ½ turn before continuing
deeper.
Monitor Installation
7-9
Using the tap to thread the hole
5.
Chase the threading action at intervals to clear the metal debris
by backing the tap almost completely out of the hole and then
screwing it back into the hole. Lubricate the hole between
threading.
6.
Place two 3/8 – 16 hex nuts (with a 3/8-inch washer in
between) onto one end of a 3/8-inch x 2-inch stud.
Placing two nuts and a washer onto the stud
7-10
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
7.
Using two wrenches, turn the inner nut counter-clockwise and
the outer nut clockwise simultaneously to bind the two nuts
together on the stud.
Binding the nuts together with the washer in between
8.
Install the stud into the tapped hole using the outer nut to
engage the wrench. Continue turning the nut clockwise until
the stud is seated at least ¾ inch (20 mm) deep in the hole.
Installing the stud into the hole in the manhole rim
Monitor Installation
9.
7-11
Separate the nuts, and turn the inner nut until it is flush against
the rim.
10. Slide the washer against the inner nut, and turn the outer nut
toward the edge of the stud.
Positioning the nuts on the stud to receive the mounting bracket
11. Mount the bottom of the mounting bracket onto the monitor
flange with with two M8 x 35-mm stainless steel bolts, two M8
stainless steel lock washers, and two M8 stainless steel flat
washers.
12. It may be necessary to drill new holes in the flange.
13. Carefully lower the monitor into the manhole, and place the
keyhole in the bracket over the outer nut on the stud.
Note: ADS strongly recommends attaching a security line
to the monitor before lowering it into the manhole to
prevent the monitor from accidentally dropping down the
manhole during installation.
14. Slide the bracket against the inner nut and washer, and tighten
and secure the outer nut against the bracket.
7-12
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
15. Neatly coil and secure the excess sensor and communication
cables in the manhole to simplify future monitor service
activities. Secure the cables to plastic anchors or ¼-inch x 2¼inch (M6 x 55-mm) anchor bolts using 14-inch (300-mm) cable
ties.
Note: Be careful to avoid damaging the sensor cables
during installation activities. Even small pinholes in the
cable can cause a sensor to malfunction or fail.
8-1
CHAPTER 8
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
While the ADS® FlowShark® Triton flow monitor and sensors are
designed for dependability and durability, all electronic devices are
vulnerable to wear, malfunction, or failure, particularly in a harsh
sewer environment. However, many system problems can be
avoided altogether by performing routine maintenance and
inspections. The design of the monitor enables the user to perform
general diagnostics and troubleshooting to prevent, isolate, and
correct many problems easily. These serve to minimize
unnecessary monitor downtime and data loss.
This chapter provides routine maintenance instructions as well as
general diagnostic and troubleshooting guidelines for isolating and
correcting monitoring system problems.
Note: Remove the monitor from the manhole before
replacing the battery packs or performing service activities
that may involve disconnecting cables from the monitor.
8-2 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Maintaining the System Components
The FlowShark Triton flow monitor and sensors should receive
routine on-site inspections and remote confidence checks to
maintain the equipment in optimal working condition, minimize
monitor downtime, and prevent possible data loss.
ADS recommends performing these inspections following initial
system installation, during site visits, and on a scheduled interval
(i.e., quarterly or during battery pack replacement).
Note: The only service or maintenance activities ADS
permits within the monitor chassis are battery pack and
fuse replacement. Therefore, do not handle, alter, modify,
remove, or replace any other components inside the
monitor. Such actions will void the monitor warranty
agreement and the IS certification.
Note: ADS also allows you to replace the quad-band
GSM/GPRS wireless modem and modem SIM card in both
the GSM Module and the EMU. The SIM card also may
be replaced in the EMUX.
Gathering Replacement Parts and Supplies
Gather the following replacement parts and supplies for performing
routine maintenance:

Dryer tube for sensors with pressure depth capability

Battery pack for FlowShark Triton monitor

Spare combo sensors as required

Soft bristle brush

Paper towels
Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Compressed air

Flat head screwdriver and assorted wrenches

Magnet (for troubleshooting wireless communications)
8-3
Inspecting the Monitor
Perform the following inspections during site visits or from a
remote location (when applicable):

Inspect the monitor mounting bracket to verify that the bracket
and bolts are free of heavy corrosion and the bolts are tightened
and secure.

Verify that the four bolts holding the monitor together are snug,
and tighten any loose bolts.

Verify that the monitor is mounted securely in the manhole.

Inspect the monitor for general integrity. Verify that nothing
more than surface corrosion is present and that the monitor has
no obvious mechanical defects. Replace the monitor if
necessary.

Perform monitor data confirmations. These can occur from a
remote location where wireless communication is available.

Review the applicable logs in Profile® or Qstart™ to verify the
status of the monitor clock, communications, firmware, battery
pack, and temperatures.

Clean the monitor and sensors regularly with a soft bristle
brush and paper towels. However, do not use detergent!

Make sure all connector ports on the monitor top are dry. Use
compressed air or paper towels to dry out wet or damp
connectors. Note and replace missing interfacial seals in the
sensor connector ends. As a temporary measure, the
connectors can be protected against moisture by wrapping with
self-vulcanizing rubber stretch tape.
8-4 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Confirming the Monitor
Confirm the accuracy of the sensor subsystems in the monitor on a
regular basis through Profile or Qstart. Confirmation involves
comparing manually-measured depth of flow and velocity readings
to the monitor's readings. This process also verifies sensor
parameters. Refer to the Profile User's Guide #950015 (version B4
or higher) or the Profile or Qstart online help for detailed
information on performing confirmation procedures.
Obtaining Diagnostic Codes from the Monitor
The FlowShark Triton enables you to observe monitor activity,
view diagnostic information, and confirm test cryouts from the
monitor through a small LED window on the GSM module for those
monitors using this wireless communication option. The
numbers/characters displayed represent specific codes indicating
current processes, identification, status, or readings associated with
the system and communications. The following sections contain
general descriptions and interpretations of the information available
through the LED and instructions for accessing information or
prompting a message.
LED window in GSM Module
Note: ADS does not offer an EMU that includes an LED
window for display. Therefore, externally-powered
FlowShark Tritons that perform wireless communication
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-5
through EMUs do not support this diagnostic functionality.
However, ADS does provide an LED window on the
EMUX for monitoring activities occurring through the
ports on the EMUX, such as communications and data
transfer. Refer to Appendix D, Modbus/EMUX
Configuration and Diagnostics, for more information.
Viewing Monitor Activity Codes
Monitor activities, such as reading sensors or transmitting/receiving
messages, display on the LED automatically in the form of
individual characters. Each character represents a specific activity.
Appendix C provides a list of these characters and the activities to
which they correspond. The presence of a flashing light at the
lower right corner of the LED indicates whether the monitor is
involved in active communication. During active communication,
this light flashes slowly (approximately once every 1.5 seconds).
When the monitor is not engaged in active communication, the light
neither illuminates nor flashes.
Activating and Reading the Diagnostic Codes
The diagnostic information available through the LED corresponds
to power and wireless communication, such as signal strength,
battery voltage, and IP address. These codes are particularly useful
during site investigation and system installation to ensure an
adequate and consistent signal strength, test communications, and
verify the monitor IP address.
Accessing and activating the diagnostic codes require you to prompt
the GSM module with a small magnet (ADS p/n 8000-0140).
Activate the diagnostic code sequence by holding the magnet
against the GSM module just to the left of the antenna jack (with
LEDs properly oriented) for 1 to 2 seconds and then removing the
magnet from the module. The sequence cannot begin until the
magnet is removed.
8-6 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Proper location for magnet on GSM Module
Note: The GSM module will not initiate the diagnostic
code sequence while codes representing monitor activity
are displaying in the window. Therefore, always verify
that the LED window is blank before attempting to activate
the code sequence. In addition, make sure the LED
window is in clear view before initiating the code
sequence.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-7
Codes active after removing magnetic from contact with GSM Module
Upon activation, interpret the diagnostic codes in succession in the
following way.
Note: The LED window displays only one number/
character at a time.

Ads indicates code initiation

cccc is followed by the wireless provider’s number

bbbb is followed by the battery voltage to two decimal places

rrrr is followed by the wireless communication raw signal
strength, then db, followed by the signal strength in decibels
(ranging from -51 to -112 dBs; 99 indicates that no signal is
available)

nnnn is followed by the monitor’s network IP address

PPPP is followed by the package type (a package type of at
least 48 will support data delivery (i.e., push data))
Testing the Monitor Cryout Capability
You can test the monitor’s ability to perform a cryout, representing
a system event or alarm, to an ADS IntelliServe® system (when
8-8 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
applicable) by holding the magnet against the GSM module just to
the left of the antenna jack (with LEDs properly oriented and
antenna connection facing downward) for 5 seconds and then
releasing the magnet from the module. The sequence Cryout
indicates initiation of the cryout test message to IntelliServe.
Checking the Monitor Battery Voltage
Check the battery voltage using Profile or Qstart before installing
the monitor and after collecting data. The projected life for the
internal monitor battery pack is 15 months at a 15-minute sample
rate for the 12-volt battery pack. Actual battery life will vary based
on the number of sensors and active functions providing data.
However, replace the battery pack as soon as possible whenever the
internal voltage for the 12-volt pack is 7.5 volts or less, or if Profile
or Qstart provides a Low battery status. Although the monitor may
function adequately at 7.5 volts, communications with the monitor
will quickly begin to degrade and become inconsistent once the
battery voltage drops below 7.2 volts.
Check the current battery voltage in the monitor using the
Diagnostics tool in Profile in the following way:
Note: Consult the Qstart online help for instructions on
checking the battery voltage in the monitor using Qstart.
1.
From the Profile software main screen, select the location and
monitoring point and then select the Diagnostics toolbar button
(or select Tools > Diagnostics from the main menu).
2.
On the Diagnostics dialog, select the Connect button to
establish communication with the monitor.
3.
Review the Monitor Status that displays once communication
has been established. Replace the internal battery when the
Monitor Status indicates that the internal voltage is Low.
The Print Preview dialog displays the current system
information, including the monitor battery voltage, in printable
format. Select the Print button to print the report contents, if
desired.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Monitor Status report with internal battery pack voltage
Replacing the Monitor Battery Pack
Note: The only service or maintenance activities ADS
permits within the monitor chassis are battery pack and
fuse replacement. Therefore, do not handle, alter, modify,
remove, or replace any other components inside the
monitor. Such actions will void the monitor warranty
agreement and the IS certification.
Warning: The FlowShark Triton can receive internal
power only from the ADS 12-volt IS battery pack (p/n
8000-0043). Do not use any other battery or power source
to power the FlowShark Triton internally. ADS does offer
an option to power the FlowShark Triton from an external
source when used in conjunction with an EMU or EMUX.
8-9
8-10 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
ADS currently offers two versions of the 12-volt battery pack for
replacing the existing battery pack in the FlowShark Triton, when
necessary. However, based on the date on which the monitor and/or
battery pack was manufactured, the monitor may contain an earlier
version of the 12-volt battery pack that is no longer available. The
following table describes the specific battery pack with which to
replace the existing battery pack, when the battery voltage is low or
falls below the previously specified level.
Part Number for the
Current Battery Pack
Part Number for the
Replacement Battery Pack
8000-0043 (potted with PCB)
8000-0043-01 (unpotted with PCB)
8000-0043-01 (unpotted with
PCB)
8000-0043-02 (unpotted without
PCB)
8000-0043-02 (unpotted without
PCB)
8000-0043-02 (unpotted without
PCB)
Replacing the 12-volt battery pack involves a relatively simple
process. However, this process may include an additional step or
part based on the specific type of 12-volt battery pack that requires
replacement. Replacing the battery pack in a monitor containing the
factory-installed, potted, 12-volt battery pack (ADS p/n 8000-0043)
requires a special retainer plug (ADS p/n 8000-0141). The plug
provides proper seating and stabilization once the monitor is
reassembled following battery pack replacement.
Replacing the battery pack in a monitor containing an unpotted, 12volt battery pack with a PCB (ADS p/n 8000-0043-01) requires
removal of the PCB for reuse with the replacement battery pack
(ADS p/n 8000-0043-02).
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-11
12-volt battery packs (left – potted; right – unpotted)
Replace the internal battery in the FlowShark Triton monitor in the
following way:
1.
Collect the data from the monitor (remotely or on-site). This
will reduce the risk of data loss once the battery is
disconnected.
2.
(applicable only when using a GSM Module) Remove the
monitor from the manhole, and disconnect the communication
cable (running from the GSM module) from the COMM port
on the monitor.
3.
Move the monitor from the hazardous area (i.e., at least 20 feet
(6.1 m) away from the manhole).
4.
Remove the 4 bolts securing the top to the canister using a 13mm nut driver.
5.
Wipe away any debris or moisture that could enter the chassis
once the unit is opened.
6.
Remove the top (with the attached power regulator dome) by
pulling it straight up from the canister. The battery rests at the
bottom of the canister, and an 18-inch long cable extends from
the battery pack to the top.
8-12 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Viewing 12-volt battery pack in monitor canister from top
7.
Place the top next to the canister, and then disconnect the
battery cable from the dome cable and set the top/power
regulator dome assembly aside.
Note: Keep the underside of the top, the regulator dome,
and the top gasket free of dirt, mud, and other debris.
Debris and dirt can compromise the seal of the monitor
once it is reassembled.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-13
Placing the top next to the monitor (left) and disconnecting the battery pack
from the top (right)
8.
(applies only to 12-volt potted battery packs) Remove the
foam spacer disc seated on top of the battery.
9.
Pull out the battery pack from the canister using the white
handle attached to the top of the pack.
10. (applies only to 12-volt unpotted battery packs) Lift off the
retainer plug from the top of the battery pack, and disconnect
the PCB from the battery pack in the following way:
8-14 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
12-volt battery pack with retainer plug
 Carefully slide the thick red band securing the PCB to the
side of the battery pack off of the PCB.
 Carefully disconnect the PCB from the battery pack at the
white plastic connector.
Disconnecting the PCB from the battery pack
 Set the PCB temporarily aside in a clean, dry location. Do
not discard! This PCB will be used with the replacement
battery pack.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-15
11. Connect the PCB to the replacement battery pack and then
secure the PCB to the side of the pack with the red band.
12. Run the loose cable from the battery pack through the hole in
the underside of the retainer plug, and then seat the retainer
plug on top of the battery pack. Be sure to pull through the
excess cable before fully seating the plug.
13. Lower the battery pack into the monitor canister, and then
connect the cable from the battery pack to the monitor
top/dome assembly.
14. Coil the excess cabling around the inner wall of the canister,
and carefully lower the top/dome assembly back onto the
canister. Keeping the proper orientation between the canister
and the top is critical to maintaining the watertight and airtight
seal on the monitor. Once the top has been torqued down after
manufacture, the sealing gasket develops a memory profile of
the canister lip. Reassembling the two pieces in the same
orientation as before helps the gasket mate correctly with the
canister lip.
Note: Be careful to avoid pinching the battery cable
between the canister sealing lip and the gasket on the
monitor top during reassembly. The cable also can get
trapped between the two parts while tightening the bolts on
the monitor top, preventing an effective air/watertight seal
and potentially damaging the battery cable.
8-16 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
A
CH
NN E L
A
CH
2
NN E L
1
0518
II 1 G
Ex ia IIB T4 Ga
Sira 09ATEX2027X
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST
ST ONLY
TE
M
AX
. 12 PS
Use only battery pack 106152
I
R
CO M M
W W W.A
D S E N V.C O M
Returning the monitor top to the proper orientation with the canister
15. (applicable only when using a GSM Module) Reconnect the
communication cable from the GSM Module to the COMM
port on the monitor.
Note: Do not reconnect the communication cable to the
monitor while the monitor is taking a reading. This could
damage the monitor.
16. Establish communication with the monitor remotely or on site
using the IS PC Communication cable (ADS p/n 8000-0054) to
verify communication and check the new battery voltage. The
internal voltage should now be well above 7.5 volts. Refer to
Connecting Directly to the Monitor in the Chapter 4,
Communication, for instructions on attaching the IS PC
Communication cable to the monitor and laptop computer.
17. Finger-tighten the top bolts to make sure the top and gasket are
seated properly. Then, tighten the bolts about halfway to full
torque value by tightening the opposite bolts. Finally, tighten
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-17
the bolts to approximately 30 inch-pounds (2.50 foot-pounds/
3.39 Nm) to fully secure the top to the canister. If the monitor
will not seal, loosen the bolts and check for a trapped wire or
debris on either the gasket or the lip. You can increase the
torque value on the bolts incrementally to assist in sealing.
However, tighten the bolts evenly to prevent distorting the
gasket and do not exceed 45-inch pounds (5.0843Nm).
18. (applicable only when using a GSM Module) Wrap rubber
stretch tape around the entire communication cable/COMM
port connection, extending 1 to 2 inches onto the cable beyond
the connection.
Communication cable from GSM Module connected to COMM port on
monitor with stretch tape properly applied
Inspecting, Cleaning, and Handling the
Sensors
Perform the following sensor inspections during regular site visits:

Verify that the installation ring or bands are secure and clear of
debris.

Clean the face of the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor gently with a soft brush, and wipe the sensor with a
clean, moist cloth.
8-18 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Note: The crystals on the new Surface Combo Sensor
(available late 2012) are covered with a Teflon® coating.
Therefore, do not use a wire brush or other abrasive,
metallic device to clean these sensors.

Verify that the face of the Surface Combo Sensor/Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor is horizontally level with the flow. If necessary,
reposition the sensor according to the procedures in Chapter 3,
Sensor Installation and Connection.

Scrub the faces of the Peak Combo Sensor/Slimline Peak
Combo Sensor with a soft bristle brush.

Confirm that all sensor cables are neatly arranged, securely
fastened, and free of debris, cuts, kinks, and breaks that may
affect performance. Replace any sensor that has a damaged
cable.
When handling, storing, or packing the Surface Combo Sensor,
avoid contacting the metal cable connector with the crystals on the
sensor. This could damage the Teflon coating covering the crystals.
Replacing the Pressure Depth Sensor Dryer Tube
or Desiccant
All combo sensors with a pressure depth sensor and the ultrasonic
depth sensor with the pressure option include a pressure depth
sensor dryer tube. This tube contains desiccant that absorbs the
moisture from the air traveling through the dryer tube into the clear
plastic tubing leading to the pressure depth sensor in the pipe.
Replace the dryer tube or the desiccant contained within the dryer
tube on a regular basis or as necessary. Desiccant can absorb
moisture only when it is blue in color. Pink desiccant indicates that
it can no longer absorb moisture. Therefore, if the desiccant
appears either colorless or pink upon inspection, replace the dryer
tube or desiccant immediately.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-19
Replacing the Dryer Tube
Replace the pressure depth sensor dryer tube (ADS p/n 3704-0032)
in the following way:
1.
Clip the cable ties securing the dryer tube to the monitor.
2.
Cut the clear flexible tubing running from the dryer tube to the
pressure depth sensor connector at a location close to the brass
barbed fitting on the dryer tube.
3.
Set aside, but do not discard, the old dryer tube with the used
desiccant.
4.
Attach a new dryer tube to the pressure depth sensor by
inserting the brass barbed fitting into the open end of the plastic
tubing running from the sensor connector. Make sure the
tubing seats firmly against the fitting to prevent air or moisture
transfer.
Inserting the brass barbed fitting into the tube
5.
Secure the new dryer tube to the monitor.
6.
Remove the black end-cap from the dryer tube before reinstalling the monitor in the manhole.
Caution: If the cap is not removed, air will not be able to
enter the dryer tube, adversely affecting the pressure depth
sensor.
8-20 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
7.
Use the diagnostics function in the Profile or Qstart software
to fire the sensor and check that the sensor is working correctly.
Replacing the Desiccant
When replacing the desiccant inside the pressure depth sensor dryer
tube, use indicating beads that are approximately 0.16 inches (4.1
mm) in diameter. Smaller beads may be able to escape the dryer
tube, enter the clear plastic tubing leading to the sensor connector.
The desiccant beads of the appropriate size for this dryer tube are
available through ADS (p/n 901-11055-00).
Replace the desiccant in the following way:
1.
Clip the cable ties securing the dryer tube to the monitor, when
applicable.
2.
Use a 5/8-inch nut driver to remove the inset nut at the free end
of the dryer tube (end of the tube opposite the brass barbed
fitting). Do not use pliers to remove this nut from the tube!
Free end of dryer tube with inset nut
Warning: Do not attempt to access the desiccant in the
dryer tube through the end of the tube with the brass
fitting! This fitting is not designed for removal.
Removing the fitting will damage the dryer tube and break
the moisture seal on that end of the tube.
3.
Use needle-nose pliers to gently remove the black foam
packing material just inside the opening.
4.
Pour out the old desiccant beads from the dryer tube.
5.
Refill an equivalent amount of new desiccant beads into the
tube.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-21
6.
Carefully replace the foam packing into the dryer tube.
7.
Replace and tighten the nut on the dryer tube.
8.
Secure the dryer tube to the monitor using cable ties, when
applicable.
9.
Use the diagnostics function in the Profile or Qstart software
to fire the sensor and check that the sensor is working correctly.
Note: Some desiccant may be reused following a special
process designed to remove the moisture from the beads.
Please consult the desiccant manufacturer for instructions
on performing this procedure, when applicable.
Replacing the SIM Card and Desiccant in the
GSM Module
Battery-powered FlowShark Triton monitors handle
communications through an ADS GSM Module (ADS p/n 80000052). This module contains a replaceable desiccant pack and SIM
card.
The desiccant pack requires replacement when a pink color is
visible through the center strip in the pack. The center strip in a
new, fresh pack should be blue in color.
The SIM card typically requires replacement only upon failure,
which is rare, or when a change in wireless carrier occurs.
Replace the SIM card (ADS p/n 507181) and/or desiccant (ADS p/n
507995) in the GSM module in the following way:
1.
Disconnect the GSM module from the monitor. Do not replace
the SIM card or desiccant while the module is attached to the
monitor or damage may occur to the monitor or the GSM
Module!
2.
Detach the mounting plate to which the GSM module is
secured from the manhole wall, and remove it from the
manhole.
8-22 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Note: Locate the GSM module in a dry, non-hazardous
area before opening the cover.
3.
Remove the electrical tape sealing the seam between the cover
and top of the GSM module enclosure.
4.
Loosen the four plastic Phillips head screws from the clear top
of the module, and then remove the top.
5.
(applicable only when replacing the desiccant) Replace the
desiccant in the following way:
 Remove the existing desiccant pack from the module and
discard.
 Inspect the inside of the module for any moisture. If
moisture is present, remove it with a clean, dry paper
towel.
 Insert a new desiccant pack (ADS p/n 507995) into the
module.
Place desiccant here
Inserting the desiccant into an open GSM module
6.
(applicable only when replacing the SIM card) Replace the
SIM card in the following way:
 Inspect the inside of the module for any moisture. If
moisture is present, remove it with a clean, dry paper
towel.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-23
 Slide back the clip on the SIM card carrier to unlock the
carrier.
Sliding back the clip to unlock the carrier
 Swing up the hinged clip to the carrier and remove the
SIM card from the slot.
Opening hinged clip and removing SIM card
8-24 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
 Record the number of the new SIM card (i.e., the IP
address) on the site report. You will need this address to
update the LIF in the Profile or Qstart software. The IP
address is printed directly on the SIM card or on a label
affixed to the card.
 Gently insert the new card into the slot on the SIM card
carrier in the GSM module. Orient the card so that the
beveled corner of the card will align with the beveled
corner of the carrier.
 Close the clip to the carrier, and slide the clip forward to
lock the SIM card into place.
7.
Check the gasket and all edges of the module enclosure seal to
make sure they are free of any debris.
8.
Replace the cover to the module, and then replace and tighten
the screws until the edges of the box are flush together.
However, do not over-tighten the screws!
9.
(applicable only when replacing the SIM card) Temporarily
re-connect the communication cable from the GSM module to
the COMM port on the monitor. Then, activate the diagnostic
codes to test communications and the module based on the
instructions under Obtaining Diagnostic Codes from the
Monitor on page 8-4. Once complete, disconnect the cable
before installing the module back into the manhole.
10. Wrap electrical tape tightly over the seam (between the cover
and the case) of the GSM module enclosure. This enhances the
seal and simplifies the removal of debris the next time the
module is opened.
11. Re-attach the GSM module to the manhole wall, and recoil and
secure the antenna cable to the cable tie mount using a cable
tie. Refer to Installing the GSM Module in Chapter 4,
Communication, for more information.
12. Attach the communication cable connector from the GSM
module to the COMM port on the monitor.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-25
13. Wrap rubber stretch tape around the entire cable connection,
extending the tape 1 to 2 inches onto the cable beyond the
connection.
Replacing EMU Components
ADS allows you to replace the following components in EMUs
supporting externally-powered FlowShark Tritons, when necessary:

GSM/GPRS Modem

SIM Card (ADS p/n 507181)
Note: Do not open the Communication Interface/Barrier
Box inside the EMU under any circumstances. In addition,
do not attempt to perform any component-level repair.
Replacing the Modem in the EMU
Replace the quad-band GSM/GPRS modem (ADS p/n 507959) in
the EMU in the following way:
1.
Disconnect the external power supply running to the EMU.
2.
Open the enclosure in which the EMU is installed.
3.
Loosen the four plastic screws on the cover of the EMU,
remove the cover, and then carefully set the cover aside to
avoid damage and prevent dirt from contacting the cover
gasket.
4.
Disconnect the antenna cable from the modem by unscrewing
the gold nut (at the connector end of the antenna cable) from
the modem connector.
8-26 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Disconnecting the antenna cable from the EMU modem
5.
Carefully slide the modem all the way out of the bracket in
which it is secured. It is secured only by friction. A power and
communication cable are connected to the back of the modem,
so slide it out slowly to avoid accidentally pulling the cables
out of the modem prematurely.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-27
Sliding the modem out of the bracket in the EMU
6.
Disconnect the ribbon (communication) cable and the black
(power) cable from the back of the modem.
Ribbon cable connected to modem
8-28 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Disconnecting the ribbon and black cables from the back of the modem
7.
Connect the ribbon and black power cables to the
corresponding ports in the back of the new modem.
8.
Carefully slide the modem back into the metal bracket in the
EMU, avoiding pinching the cables between the modem and
the back panel of the EMU.
9.
Insert a new SIM card or the SIM card from the original
modem into the slot on the new modem. Refer to the next
section, Replacing the SIM Card in the EMU Modem, for
instructions on removing an existing SIM card from a modem
and inserting a SIM card into the modem.
10. Restore external power to the EMU.
11. Enter or confirm the correct IP address is in Profile or Qstart
for the SIM card, and have a data analyst attempt to connect to
the monitor remotely to verify communication.
12. Replace and secure the cover to the EMU, and close the
enclosure in which it is installed.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-29
Replacing the SIM Card in the EMU Modem
Replace the SIM card (ADS p/n 507181) in the modem housed
within the EMU in the following way:
1.
Disconnect the external power running to the EMU.
2.
Open the enclosure in which the EMU is installed.
3.
Loosen the four plastic screws on the cover of the EMU,
remove the cover, and then carefully set the cover aside to
avoid damage and prevent dirt from contacting the cover
gasket.
4.
Slide the lock on the front of the modem holding in the SIM
card to the right.
Sliding the lock on the to the right
5.
Gently press in on the SIM card to release it from the slot. It
should slide out slightly from the slot.
6.
Remove the SIM card from the modem.
7.
Write down the IP address for the new SIM card.
8.
Insert the new SIM card into the slot in the front of the modem.
8-30 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Inserting the SIM card into the EMU modem
9.
Slide the lock to the left to secure the SIM card.
10. Restore external power to the EMU.
11. Contact a data analyst to enter the IP address for the new SIM
card in Profile or Qstart, and have the analyst attempt to
connect to the monitor remotely to verify communication.
12. Replace and secure the cover to the EMU, and close the
enclosure in which it is installed.
Replacing the SIM Card in the EMUX
ADS allows you to replace the SIM card (ADS p/n 507181) in the
EMUX supporting the FlowShark Triton, when necessary, in the
following way:
1.
Disconnect the external power running to the EMUX.
2.
Loosen and remove the two screws from the cover of the
EMUX, and then remove the cover.
3.
Carefully remove the SIM card from the clip holding the card
on the board inside the EMUX.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-31
4.
Record the IP address for the new SIM card.
5.
Slide the new SIM card into the clip until it is seated securely
in place.
6.
Restore external power to the EMUX.
7.
Contact a data analyst to enter the IP address for the new SIM
card in Profile, and have the analyst attempt to connect to the
monitor remotely to verify communication.
8.
Replace the cover onto the EMUX, and replace and tighten the
screws.
Replacing the Regulator and Fuses in the
Monitor
The FlowShark Triton monitor contains a removable power
regulator secured to a special dome that resides inside the monitor
enclosure and is attached to the monitor top. If a regulator failure
occurs, it typically involves a bad fuse on the regulator board
corresponding to communications or sensors. However, monitors
with regulators manufactured prior to 2012 do not possess
replaceable fuses. Therefore, fuse failures that occur with these
units require replacement of the whole regulator/dome assembly.
All monitors that require a new regulator must be returned to ADS
for regulator/dome assembly replacement. Do not attempt to
exchange a regulator in the field!
Monitors with regulators manufactured as of January 2012 contain
replaceable fuses that attach to the regulator board on the inside of
the dome. This new design allows for the replacement of individual
fuses when failures occur, eliminating the need to send a monitor to
ADS for an entire regulator/dome assembly exchange. Refer to the
Troubleshooting section beginning on page 8-38 to identify whether
a regulator or fuse may be the source of a particular problem that
has arisen within the FlowShark Triton system.
Note: Monitors manufactured as of 2012 contain
regulators with replaceable fuses.
8-32 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
The following section includes detailed instructions on replacing
fuses (when applicable) in FlowShark Triton monitors.
Replacing a Fuse in the Monitor
The regulator boards (manufactured as of 2012) in FlowShark
Triton monitors have three fuses (ADS p/n 508071, 508072, and
508073) that may be replaced independently upon failure. Refer to
the Troubleshooting section beginning on page 8-38 to identify
whether a fuse may be the source of a particular problem that has
occurred within the FlowShark Triton system and, if so, which fuse
may require replacement.
The 5-volt blue fuse corresponds to the sensors and can be blown
due to a shorted sensor. If this fuse is blown, the monitor cannot
detect the sensors. The 3.3-volt yellow fuse is associated with the
processor board. When blown, this fuse prevents the monitor from
logging data and performing successful communications. The red
(main input) fuse is related to the regulator board and rarely blows.
Note: If the troubleshooting procedures indicate that a
sensor may have shorted or a sensor may have shorted and
the 5-volt (blue) fuse on the power regulator in the monitor
corresponding to the sensor may have blown, do not
connect the potentially shorted sensor to another monitor
until confirming that the sensor is functional (i.e., not
shorted) using a voltmeter. Please contact ADS Client
Services for detailed instructions on determining whether a
sensor has shorted. If the sensor is shorted, it also will
blow the 5-volt fuse in the other monitor.
Since the fuses attach to the board on the inside of the power
regulator dome inside the monitor, access to and replacement of a
fuse first requires opening the monitor and removing the dome.
Replace a fuse(s) in the monitor in the following way:
1.
Collect the data from the monitor (remotely or on-site) to limit
the risk of losing data once the battery is disconnected.
2.
Remove the monitor from the hazardous area (i.e., at least 20
feet (6.1 m) away from the manhole).
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-33
3.
Remove the four bolts securing the monitor top to the canister
using a 13-mm nut driver.
4.
Wipe away any debris or moisture that could enter the chassis
once the unit is opened.
5.
Remove the top (with the attached power regulator dome) by
pulling it straight up from the canister.
6.
Place the top next to the canister upside down (with the dome
facing upward), and then disconnect the battery cable from the
dome cable.
Note: Keep the underside of the top, the regulator dome,
and the top gasket free of dirt, mud, and other debris.
Debris and dirt can compromise the seal of the monitor
once it is reassembled.
Placing the top next to the monitor (left) and disconnecting the battery pack
from the top (right)
7.
Remove the nut securing the dome to the monitor top using a
½-inch nut driver.
8-34 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Nut securing dome
Removing nut securing regulator dome to monitor top
8.
Carefully lift off the dome from the top. Notice the three fuses
seated on the regulator board on the inside of the dome.
Underside of monitor top (left) and inside of regulator dome (right)
9.
Remove the bad fuse(s) from the regulator board by gently, but
firmly, pulling and lifting it straight up from the board. Notice
that the label on each fuse displays a color bar (red, blue, or
yellow) that corresponds to the color coding on the board
adjacent to the fuse.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-35
Close up of regulator board showing the three color-coded fuses
Blue fuse removed from the regulator board
10. Carefully insert the new, replacement fuse(s) into the
corresponding holes in the dome without bending the fuse
filaments. Verify that the color strip on the fuse matches the
color on the regulator board adjacent to the holes. Make sure
the fuse(s) is seated firmly and securely.
8-36 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
11. Realign and reseat the dome against the monitor top, and
replace and tighten the nut securing the dome to the top.
12. Reconnect the battery cable to the cable exiting from the hole
in the top/dome assembly.
13. Coil the excess cabling around the inner wall of the canister,
and carefully lower the top/dome assembly back onto the
canister. Keeping the proper orientation between the canister
and the top is critical to maintaining the watertight and airtight
seal on the monitor. Once the top has been torqued down after
manufacture, the sealing gasket develops a memory profile of
the canister lip. Reassembling the two pieces in the same
orientation as before helps the gasket mate correctly with the
canister lip.
Note: Be careful to avoid pinching the battery cable
between the canister sealing lip and the gasket on the
monitor top during reassembly. The cable also can get
trapped between the two parts while tightening the bolts on
the monitor top, preventing an effective air/watertight seal
and potentially damaging the battery cable.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
A
CH
NN E L
A
CH
2
NN E L
8-37
1
0518
II 1 G
Ex ia IIB T4 Ga
Sira 09ATEX2027X
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST
ST ONLY
TE
M
AX
. 8 2 kP
Use only battery pack 106152
a
FLOWHAWK
TM
IETG
CO M M
W W W. I E
T G .C O . U K
Returning the monitor top to the proper orientation with the canister
14. Establish communication with the monitor remotely or on site
using the IS PC Communication Cable (ADS p/n 8000-0054) to
verify communication. Refer to Connecting Directly to the
Monitor in Chapter 4, Communication, for instructions on
attaching the IS PC Communication cable to the monitor and
laptop computer.
15. Finger-tighten the top bolts to make sure the top and gasket are
seated properly. Then, tighten the bolts about halfway to full
torque value by tightening the opposite bolts. Finally, tighten
the bolts to approximately 30 inch-pounds (2.50 foot-pounds/
3.39 Nm) to fully secure the top to the canister. If the monitor
will not seal, loosen the bolts and check for a trapped wire or
debris on either the gasket or the lip. You can increase the
torque value on the bolts incrementally to assist in sealing.
However, tighten the bolts evenly to prevent distorting the
gasket and do not exceed 45-inch pounds (5.0843Nm).
8-38 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Troubleshooting
The FlowShark Triton flow monitor contains several different
components that perform many different functions. Since a
malfunctioning component increases the risk of losing data,
isolating the problem component is essential to performing
troubleshooting activities efficiently. Minimizing monitor
downtime is critical.
Consider the following when trying to isolate the component or
subsystem exhibiting the problem:

Problems affecting only one of the sensor subsystems are
usually caused by one subsystem alone. The problem may exist
in the monitor processor board, sensor (or other input device),
or cabling.

Problems affecting more than one subsystem usually can be
traced to a problem with the processor board, power source, or
communication lines. Problems in one subsystem can create
problems in other subsystems when the power source or
communication lines are faulty.

Problems with communications, clock readings, time stamps,
and data storage intervals usually arise from faulty processor
board components, incorrect information entered on the user's
PC, or low batteries.

Failures occurring outside a connector (i.e., between a
connector and the field input or output device) may arise from
problems with the field unit or component cabling. Failures
occurring on the inside (i.e., between a connector and the
printed circuit board) may arise from problems with the
processor board.
Note: If possible, collect all monitor data prior to
swapping sensors or troubleshooting a monitor to prevent
possible data loss. In addition, remove the monitor from
the manhole before disconnecting cables from the monitor
to avoid possible hazards.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-39
Some problems that occur will not require a site visit, such as
incorrect equipment identification numbers or other system
parameters the user can re-enter on the local PC. However, some
problems will require a site visit. When this is necessary, inform
the data analyst any time a field crew is en route to a monitor site to
troubleshoot problems so that the analyst can attempt to collect the
monitor data before they arrive. If the problem is a faulty monitor
and the analyst cannot collect the data remotely, replace the monitor
and deliver the faulty monitor to the office so the analyst can
attempt to collect the data directly. Then, send the monitor to ADS
for repair.
This section provides general guidelines for troubleshooting and
correcting problems with the FlowShark Triton monitor and sensor
subsystems.
General Monitor Problems
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
the FlowShark Triton flow monitor.
Problem
Time stamp on the collected data is incorrect.
Possible
Causes
PC clock may have been set to incorrect time when the
monitor was activated.
Monitor time zone difference for the PC clock may not
have been set correctly when the monitor was activated.
Monitor clock may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the time on the PC clock and correct if necessary.
Reactivate the monitor to enable the clock.
Verify the time zone setting of the monitor. Correct and
reactivate if necessary.
Collect the data from the monitor and replace monitor if
defective.
8-40 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Problem
Time on the monitor clock is incorrect.
Possible
Causes
Monitor clock may be a faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the time on the PC clock and correct if
necessary.
Monitor time zone difference for the PC clock may not
have been set correctly when the monitor was activated.
Reactivate the monitor to enable the clock.
Verify the time zone setting of the monitor. Correct and
reactivate if necessary.
Collect the data from the monitor and replace monitor if
defective.
Problem
You receive a Device Time Out message in Profile or
Qstart.
Possible
Cause
Communications may be marginal.
Possible
Solutions
Re-attempt communication with monitor. Verify signal
strength. Check a Profile or Qstart data collect log or
check the TCP/IP Modem Status in Diagnostics. If the
signal strength indicated is less than -95 (for example:
-99), consider re-orienting the antenna and/or installing
the antenna in a pedestal above ground.
GSM module may be defective.
Test with a new GSM module. If communications
improve, replace the original with the new module.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the monitor if defective.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Problem
Gap exists within the collected data.
Possible
Causes
Monitor time may be incorrect.
Possible
Solutions
Check monitor time, and reset clock if necessary.
Monitor firmware file may be corrupt.
Attempt to collect data within the gap.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Problem
Data is missing at the beginning or end of the date
range following data collection.
Possible
Causes
Monitor activation may have failed.
Monitor time may be incorrect.
Monitor’s firmware file may be corrupt.
Possible
Solutions
Verify whether the monitor has been activated, and
activate if necessary.
Check monitor time, and reset clock if necessary.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
8-41
8-42 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Problem
Monitor independently discontinues logging data.
Possible
Causes
Battery pack may be dead or below minimum voltage
requirement (7.5 volts - internal), or external power
source may be down.
3.3-volt fuse on regulator may have blown.
Monitor memory may have been corrupted during
firmware upgrade, causing the monitor to record data
only during monitor communications.
Possible
Solutions
Replace battery pack.
Replace the 3.3-volt yellow fuse (when replaceable) on
the regulator or return the monitor to ADS for power
regulator replacement.
If the monitor is logging data only during monitor
communications following a firmware upgrade, contact
your ADS regional representative to clear the monitor
memory and reactivate the monitor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Problem
An I/O error message displays when communicating
with the monitor.
Possible
Causes
Communication quality might be marginal.
Antenna may be defective.
Processor board may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Re-attempt communication with the monitor.
Temporarily attach new antenna, and permanently
replace the existing antenna if the error message no
longer occurs.
Replace the monitor if defective.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-43
Communication Problems
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
wireless communications.
Problem
Monitor does not answer via wireless communication.
Possible
Causes
Signal strength to the modem may be insufficient.
Battery pack may be dead or below minimum voltage
requirement (7.5 volts - internal), or external power
source may be down.
Wireless network failure.
Monitor may have lost communication with network and
cannot re-establish communication.
Connection type may be incorrect in Profile or Qstart.
Antenna may be defective.
Monitor may be defective.
Modem may be defective.
3.3-volt fuse on regulator may have blown.
Leading zeros are included before or within the IP
address.
8-44 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Possible
Solutions
Check the diagnostic codes on the GSM module (using
magnet) while it is connected to the monitor to verify the
IP address is available. If it does not display,
disconnect the module from the monitor for at least 1
minute and then reattach the module. Once the LED is
no longer illuminating, reactivate the diagnostic codes to
verify whether the IP address is now available.
Relocate the antenna (consider a pedestal mount)
Replace the antenna.
Replace the monitor battery pack (when applicable) if it
is reading below the minimum voltage requirement.
Verify external power source (when applicable) is
supplying power.
Verify the connection type is set to GPRS in Profile or
Qstart.
Try connecting to other wireless units in the same area
(other wireless monitor sites). If all connections fail for
similar IP addresses and/or none of the wireless
connections are successful, there may be a wireless
network outage in your area. Contact your regional ADS
representative for them to investigate a possible outage.
Delete any leading zeros included before or within the IP
address.
Replace GSM/GPRS module, EMU modem, or EMUX,
as applicable.
(applies only if the software provides a “Getting Monitor
Attention” message while attempting to communicate)
Try to communicate with the monitor through a serial
(direct) connection. If direct communication fails,
remove the monitor from the hazardous area (at least
20 feet away from the manhole), disconnect the battery
pack, wait at least 1 minute, reconnect the battery pack,
and then attempt to communicate. If the monitor still
will not communicate, replace the 3.3-volt yellow fuse
(when replaceable) on the regulator or return the
monitor to ADS for power regulator replacement.
Replace the monitor.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-45
Problem
Modem connects but monitor does not respond.
Possible
Cause
Connection Type configuration has reverted to Serial.
Possible
Solutions
Verify that the communication type is set to GPRS.
3.3-volt fuse on regulator may have blown.
Inspect the communication cable connection between
the modem and monitor to determine if the cable is
disconnected or has been damaged.
Connect directly with the monitor using the 8000-0054
cable. Verify the monitor responds. If it does, the GSM
module might be faulty. If it does not, remove the
monitor from the hazardous area (at least 20 feet away
from the manhole), disconnect the battery pack, wait at
least 1 minute, and then reconnect the monitor battery
pack. If remote communication resumes, try to connect
several times to ensure communication is reliable.
Replace the 3.3-volt yellow fuse (when replaceable) on
the regulator or return the monitor to ADS for power
regulator replacement.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
8-46 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Problem
Monitor cannot communicate over a serial connection.
Possible
Causes
Serial connection to monitor or field computer may be
loose.
Direct Connect Cable may be damaged.
Serial port on the computer may not be generating
adequate power for the Direct Connect Cable to
facilitate communication with the monitor.
3.3-volt fuse on regulator may have blown.
Possible
Solutions
Verify cable connections to monitor and field computer
are secure.
Inspect Direct Connect Cable for damage.
Run a USB-to-serial adapter cable between the
computer’s USB port and the Direct Connect Cable.
(applies only if the software provides a “Getting Monitor
Attention” message while attempting to communicate)
Remove the monitor from the hazardous area (at least
20 feet away from the manhole), disconnect the battery
pack, wait at least 1 minute, reconnect the battery pack,
and then attempt to communicate. If the monitor still will
not communicate, replace the 3.3-volt yellow fuse (when
replaceable) on the regulator or return the monitor to
ADS for power regulator replacement.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-47
Ultrasonic Depth Subsystem
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
problems with the ultrasonic depth subsystem corresponding to the
Surface Combo Sensor and the Ultrasonic Depth Sensor.
Note: Contact your ADS representative for further
diagnosis prior to replacing a sensor.
Problem
Range from ultrasonic depth subsystem is slightly
inconsistent with manually measured range.
Possible
Causes
Physical offset may be incorrect.
Pipe height may be incorrect.
Electronic offset might be incorrect.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the physical offset, and adjust it if necessary.
Verify the pipe height.
Verify electronic offset and adjust if necessary.
8-48 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Problem
Range from ultrasonic depth subsystem is significantly
greater than manually measured range.
Possible
Causes
Physical offset may be incorrect.
Pipe height may be incorrect.
Electronic offset may be incorrect.
Sensor may not be level.
Foam or other substance may be absorbing the pulse.
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the physical offset.
Verify the pipe height.
Verify electronic offset and adjust if necessary.
Make sure the sensor is level and in good condition.
Check the hydraulic conditions in the pipe.
Fire the sensor at a shorter distance onto a hard surface
to confirm accuracy.
Replace the sensor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-49
Problem
Range from the ultrasonic depth subsystem is too short
(but not zero).
Possible
Causes
Pipe height may be incorrect.
Electronic offset may be incorrect.
Sensor may be dirty.
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the pipe height.
Verify electronic offset and adjust if necessary.
Clean the sensor.
Replace the sensor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Problem
Raw ultrasonic depth data shows depths greater than
the pipe diameter.
Possible
Causes
Physical offset may be incorrect.
Pipe height may be incorrect.
Electronic offset may be incorrect.
Pipe may be surcharged.
Sensor may be dirty.
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the physical offset.
Verify the pipe height.
Verify electronic offset and adjust if necessary.
Clean the sensor.
Replace the sensor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
8-50 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Problem
Depth data indicates a surcharged pipe, but the pipe is
free flowing.
Possible
Causes
Physical offset may be incorrect.
Electronic offset may be incorrect.
Pipe height may be incorrect.
Sensor may be dirty.
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Verify the physical offset and the pipe height.
Verify electronic offset and adjust if necessary.
Clean the sensor.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the monitor if defective.
Problem
Ultrasonic depth readings are erratic.
Possible
Causes
Noise may exist in the sewer pipe.
Sensor may be dirty.
Flow may be choppy or foamy.
Sensor may not be level.
Possible
Solutions
Check the flow conditions.
Clean the sensor.
Check if the sensor is level and correct if necessary.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-51
Problem
Individual ultrasonic depth readings (SDEPTH_3) from
Surface Combo Sensor are consistently equivalent to
the value obtained from the following equation: Pipe
Height – Physical Offset + 9.99.
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Replace the Surface Combo Sensor.
5-volt fuse on regulator may have blown.
Replace the 5-volt blue fuse (when replaceable) on the
regulator or return the monitor to ADS for regulator
replacement.
Caution: Do not connect a potentially shorted sensor to
another monitor until confirming that the sensor is
functional (i.e., not shorted) using a voltmeter. A
shorted sensor will blow the 5-volt (blue) replacement
fuse on the regulator of the monitor.
Problem
Sensor reports abnormal temperatures.
Possible
Causes
Sensor connection to monitor may be loose.
Temperature sensor may be faulty.
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Secure sensor connection to monitor if necessary.
Replace the sensor.
8-52 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Upward Depth Subsystem
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
the upward depth subsystem corresponding to the Peak Combo
Sensor and Slimline Peak Combo Sensor.
Note: Contact your regional ADS representative for
further diagnosis prior to replacing a sensor.
Problem
UpDepth data periodically reads 0.63 inches (16 mm).
Possible
Causes
Minimum flows are occurring within sensor deadband
(extending 1.0 inches (25 mm) up from bottom of Peak
Combo Sensor or Slimline Peak Combo Sensor) or the
sensor is receiving a strong return signal close to the
sensor face.
Sensor transmit/receive surfaces are dirty.
Sensor or cabling might be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Verify minimum flow depths are not occurring within
sensor deadband.
Set the deadband on the UpDepth sensor to a setting
other than Auto, but well below the expected minimum
flow depth. Fire the sensor several times to verify
whether the readings improve.
Ensure the sensor is installed as closely as possible to
the 6:00 position in the pipe, silt allowing.
Clean the sensor transmit/receive surfaces.
Inspect the sensor cables for integrity.
Check for moisture in the connector.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the monitor if defective.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Problem
UpDepth data seems erratic over a full depth range.
Possible
Causes
Sensor transmit/receive surfaces may be dirty.
8-53
Sensor may be rotated greater than 15 degrees from
center.
Sensor may be faulty.
Processor board may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Clean the sensor transmit/receive surfaces.
Check the sensor connections.
Ensure the sensor is installed as closely as possible to
the 6:00 position in the pipe, silt allowing.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the monitor if defective.
Problem
UpDepth readings are abnormally low.
Possible
Causes
Sensor transmit/receive surfaces may be covered with
silt.
Sensor may be physically offset in the flow and the
correct physical offset has not been measured and/or
downloaded to the monitor.
Possible
Solutions
Re-measure physical offset of the sensor.
Check the site conditions, and relocate the sensor if
necessary.
8-54 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Problem
Individual UpDepth_1 values consistently read -9.99.
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Replace the Peak/Slimline Peak Combo Sensor.
5-volt fuse on regulator may be blown.
Replace the 5-volt blue fuse (when replaceable) on the
regulator or return the monitor to ADS for regulator
replacement.
Caution: Do not connect a questionable sensor to
another monitor before verifying the integrity of the
sensor. A shorted sensor will blow the 5-volt (blue)
replacement fuse on the regulator in the monitor.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-55
Peak Velocity Subsystem
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
the velocity subsystem corresponding to the Peak Combo Sensor,
Surface Combo Sensor (Surcharge Velocity Sensor only), and
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor. Since the Surface Combo Sensor is
mounted at the top of the pipe, potential issues involving a sensor
that is out of the flow do not apply to the Surface Combo Sensor.
Note: Contact your regional ADS representative for
further diagnosis prior to replacing a sensor.
Problem
Monitor often provides a velocity reading of 0.
Possible
Causes
Sensor’s velocity transmit/receive surfaces may be dirty
or the velocity function is broken.
Minimum flows may be occurring within the sensor
deadband (extending 1.0 inches (25 mm) up from the
bottom of the Peak Combo Sensor or Slimline Peak
Combo Sensor).
Cabling between the processor board and the velocity
sensor may be bad.
Velocity parameters may require adjustment.
Possible
Solutions
Clean the sensor’s transmit/receive surfaces.
Verify that minimum flows are occurring outside the
sensor deadband.
Check the velocity parameters.
Inspect the sensor cables for tightness.
Check for moisture in the connector.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the monitor if defective.
8-56 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Problem
Velocity data does not fluctuate much (but is not 0).
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be dirty.
Minimum flows may be occurring within the sensor
deadband (extending 1.0 inches (25 mm) up from the
bottom of the Peak Combo Sensor or Slimline Peak
Combo Sensor).
Velocity function may be broken.
Possible
Solutions
Clean the sensor’s transmit/receive surfaces.
Verify that minimum flows are occurring outside the
sensor deadband.
Check the sensor connections.
Check the velocity parameters.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the velocity sensor.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Problem
Velocity data seems erratic or exhibits poor quality.
Possible
Causes
Sensor’s transmit/receive surfaces may be dirty.
8-57
Sensor may be close to extending out of the flow.
Designated value for the maximum velocity parameter
may be too high, creating too broad of a range.
Sensor may be faulty.
Processor board may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Clean the sensor’s transmit/receive surfaces.
Verify whether the flow depth exceeds the sensor
deadband at the same time and under the same
conditions as the erratic data. Rotate the sensor further
toward the center of the pipe if possible.
Reduce the maximum velocity in the device parameters
to narrow the range.
Check the sensor connections.
Check the velocity parameters.
Contact your regional ADS representative.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the monitor if defective.
Problem
Velocity readings are abnormally high.
Possible
Causes
Sensor’s velocity transmit/receive surfaces may be
covered with silt or other debris.
Sensor may be extending out of the flow.
Flow may be reversed or slower than (0.5 feet per
second (0.15 mps)
Possible
Solution
Check the site conditions, and relocate the sensor if
necessary.
8-58 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Problem
Individual PEAKVEL_1 or PEAKVEL_3 values
consistently read -9.99.
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Replace the Peak, Slimline Peak, or Surface Combo
Sensor.
5-volt fuse on regulator may have blown.
Replace the 5-volt blue fuse (when replaceable) on the
regulator or return the monitor to ADS for regulator
replacement.
Caution: Do not connect a questionable sensor to
another monitor before verifying the integrity of the
sensor. A shorted sensor will blow the 5-volt (blue)
replacement fuse on the regulator in the monitor.
Surface Velocity Subsystem
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
the surface velocity subsystem corresponding to the Surface Combo
Sensor.
Problem
Velocity readings are erratic or incorrect.
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be dirty or covered by debris.
Possible
Solutions
Clean the sensor transmit/receive surfaces.
Maximum Velocity setting may require adjustment.
Fine-tune Maximum Velocity setting in device
parameters.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-59
Problem
Individual SURFACEVEL_3 values consistently read 9.99.
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Replace the Surface Combo Sensor.
5-volt fuse on regulator may have blown.
Replace the 5-volt blue fuse (when replaceable) on the
regulator or return the monitor to ADS for regulator
replacement.
Caution: Do not connect a questionable sensor to
another monitor before verifying the integrity of the
sensor. A shorted sensor will blow the 5-volt (blue)
replacement fuse on the regulator in the monitor.
8-60 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Pressure Depth Subsystem
The following tables contain general troubleshooting techniques for
the pressure depth subsystem corresponding to the Peak Combo
Sensor, Surface Combo Sensor, and Ultrasonic Depth Sensor with
the pressure depth option.
Note: Contact your regional ADS representative for
further diagnosis before replacing a sensor.
Problem
Pressure depth readings are erratic.
Possible
Causes
Pressure vent tube may be pinched or blocked with
water.
Pressure dryer tube may not be functioning properly.
Black cap may still be on the dryer tube.
Possible
Solutions
Inspect color of desiccant in dry tube and replace the
dryer tube if necessary.
Inspect the vent tube along its entire length to ensure
the cable is not pinched and that the cable ties securing
the vent tube are not too tight.
Verify that the black cap has been removed from the
dryer tube.
Problem
Pressure depth readings display a good pattern, but are
consistently incorrect.
Possible
Cause
Sensor physical offset may be incorrect.
Possible
Solution
Verify the sensor offset and reactivate with the correct
settings if necessary.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
8-61
Problem
Individual PDEPTH_1 values consistently read 0 under
wet pipe conditions.
Possible
Causes
Sensor may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Replace the Peak Combo Sensor.
5-volt fuse on regulator may have blown.
Replace the 5-volt blue fuse (when replaceable) on the
regulator or return the monitor to ADS for regulator
replacement.
Caution: Do not connect a questionable sensor to
another monitor before verifying the integrity of the
sensor. A shorted sensor will blow the 5-volt (blue)
replacement fuse on the regulator in the monitor.
Temperature Subsystem
The following table contains general troubleshooting techniques for
the temperature subsystem corresponding to all sensors supporting
the FlowShark Triton.
Problem
Temperature readings are excessively low or incorrect.
Possible
Causes
Temperature sensor may be faulty.
Cable connecting sensor to monitor may be loose or
broken.
Processor board may be faulty.
Possible
Solutions
Examine the sensor connection to the monitor, and
verify that it is properly connected and secure.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the monitor if defective.
A-1
APPENDIX A
Specifications
This appendix contains specifications for the ADS FlowShark
Triton flow monitor and associated subassemblies, sensors, cables,
and communication hardware.
FlowShark Triton Flow Monitor (ADS p/n
8000-FST-60C)
Enclosure
Cylindrical 0.37-inch (6.39-mm) thick, seamless,
plastic canister with stainless steel threaded
inserts
Aluminum end-cap attached to canister with four
stainless steel bolts and a gasket interface
Meets NEMA6P/IP68 standard
Dimensions
17.75 inches (451 mm) long by 8.75 inches (222
mm) maximum diameter 6.63 inches (168 mm)
minimum diameter
Weight
30.3 pounds (13.7 kg) (with 12-volt battery pack)
Operating
Temperature
Power
-4° to 140° F (-20° to 60° C)
Internal: One 12-volt IS alkaline battery pack
External (optional): External DC power source
through an EMU
A-2
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Battery Life
15 months at 15-minute sample rate and weekly
communications
Actual battery life will vary depending on
operating temperature, number of active devices
operated, and frequency of communications.
Connectors
U.S. MIL-C-26482 series 1, for environmental
sealing, with gold-plated contacts and interfacial
seals
Inputs and
Outputs
•
2 configurable sensor inputs
•
1 communication connector for direct
interface with a computer or GSM modem
•
Air pressure valve (for testing purposes only)
Memory
832 kilobytes
Data Storage
150 days for 6 stored entities (Peak Combo
Sensor) at a 15-minute sample rate – Refer to
Calculating the Total Days of Storage Available
on page A-3 for details and instructions on
calculating the number of days of data that can
be stored in memory for a specific application.
Approvals
Hazardous Area – Approved for use in Class I,
Div. 1, Groups C & D, Zone 0 in US, and Zone 0
in the EU via SIRA/ATEX
Certified under IECEx (International
Electrotechnical Commission Explosion Proof)
Intrinsic Safety standards for use in Zone 0/
Class I, Div. 1, Groups C & D rated hazardous
areas.
(See Chapter 1 for a list of countries accepting
demonstrated compliance with the IECEx
scheme.)
Certificate of Compliance from the Canadian
Standards Association (CSA) for Intrinsically Safe
and Non-Incendive Systems – For Hazardous
Locations.
Specifications
A-3
Calculating the Total Days of Storage Available
This section includes a special equation to use in determining the
number of days of data that can be stored in the monitor memory
based on a specific application. Consider the following when
calculating the total days:
•
The monitor memory holds 832 kilobytes (or 851,968 bytes) of
data.
•
The log rate determines the number of readings taken per day.
At a 15-minute sample rate, the monitor will record 96 readings
a day for a single entity. At a 5-minute sample rate, the
monitor will record 288 readings a day for a single entity.
•
One entity reading consumes 8 bytes of monitor memory.
•
The following table lists the standard number of entities
recorded for each sensor device. The date/time stamp for a
reading is equal to one reading. Therefore, each total below
represents the actual entities plus one date/time stamp. A
date/time stamp must be included for each monitoring point
associated with the monitor.
•
Peak
Combo
Sensor
Surface
Combo
Sensor
Ultrasonic
Depth
Sensor
Ultrasonic
Depth Sensor
with Pressure
Option
Slimline
Peak
Combo
Sensor
7
6
3
4
6
Deduct 2 to 3 days from the total days of storage to compensate
for additional overhead in memory.
A-4
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Following is the equation for calculating the total days of storage
available in the monitor memory:
Data Storage Available in the Monitor (in Bytes)
=
Number of
Readings
Taken per
Day for
One entity
X
Memory
Consumed for
One Entity
Reading
(Date/Time
Stamp)
X
Number of
Entities Logged
by the Monitor
(based on the
selected
devices)
Total Days of
Storage in
the Monitor
Memory
For example, recording data at a 15-minute sample rate using a
Peak Combo Sensor offers approximately 150 days of data storage.
851,968 bytes
96 readings
X
8 bytes
X
=
7 entities (including
1 for the date/ time
stamp)
158 days (150
when accounting for
overhead)
Specifications
A-5
Intrinsically-Safe Sensors
Peak Combo Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS4-xx-35/1H)
This sensor supports upward ultrasonic depth, peak velocity, and
pressure depth.
Enclosure
ABS plastic shell, epoxy-filled
Dimensions
Enclosure: 6.76 inches (172 mm) long x 1.23
inches (31 mm) wide x 0.83 inches (21 mm) high
Cable
Standard size: 35 feet (10.7 m) or 100 feet (30.5
m) long x 0.30 inches (7.6 mm) nominal OD,
polyurethane jacket
Extension cables available up to 300 feet (91.4
m)
Operating/
Storage
Temperature
Operating: -4° to 140° F (-20° to 60° C)
Storage: -4° to 167° F (-20° to 75° C)
Note: This sensor will not produce accurate
readings in frozen flow.
Upward Ultrasonic Depth
Upward Depth
Accuracy
0.5% of reading or +/- 0.125 inches (3.2 mm),
whichever is greater
Deadband
Extending 1.0 inch (25 mm) up from the bottom of
the sensor
Frequency
250 kHz – 1 MHz
Range
60 inches (1524 mm)
Resolution
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
Drift
0
A-6
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Peak Doppler Velocity
Range
-30 to 30 feet per second (-9.1 to 9.1 m/sec)
Deadband
Extending 1.0 inch (25 mm) up from the bottom of
the sensor
Frequency
250 kHz
Resolution
0.01 feet per second (0.003 m/sec)
Accuracy
+/- 0.2 ft/sec (0.06 m/sec) or 4% of actual peak
velocity (whichever is greater) in flow velocities
from -5 to 20 ft/sec (-1.52 to 6.10 m/sec)
Pressure Depth
Pressure
Range
0.0 to 5.0 PSI (0.0 - 0.34 Bar): up to 11.5 feet (3.5
m)
0.0 to 15.0 PSI (0.0 - 1.03 Bar): up to 34.5 feet
(10.5 m)
0.0 to 30 PSI (0.0 – 2.07 Bar): up to 69.0 feet
(21.0 m)
Pressure
Accuracy
0 - 5.0 PSI (0 - 0.34 Bar): +/- 1.4 inches (36 mm)
0 - 15.0 PSI (0 - 1.03 Bar): +/- 4.1 inches (104
mm)
0.0 to 30 PSI (0.0 – 2.07 Bar): +/- 8.3 inches (211
mm)
Pressure
Resolution
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
Surface Combo Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS5-V2-xx-30)
This sensor supports downward ultrasonic depth, surface velocity,
surcharge peak velocity, and surcharge pressure depth.
Note: The new version of the Surface Combo Sensor
referenced here and throughout this manual is undergoing
final testing and evaluation. Contact ADS Client Services
for sensor availability. Specifications for the existing
Specifications
A-7
version of the Surface Combo Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS3V2-XX-30) are available in the previous version of the
FlowShark Triton Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual (QR 775013 A3).
Enclosure
ABS plastic shell, epoxy-filled
Dimensions
Cable
10.61 inches (269 mm) long x 2.03 inches (52
mm) wide x 2.45 inches (62 mm) high
Standard size: 30.0 feet (9.14 m) long x 0.45
inches (11 mm) nominal OD, polyurethane jacket
Extension cables available up to 300 feet (91 m)
Operating/
Storage
Temperature
Operating: -4° to 140° F (-20° to 60° C)
Storage: -4° to 167° F (-20° to 75° C)
Note: The sensor will not produce accurate
readings when ice is built up on the sensor.
Downward Ultrasonic Depth
Accuracy
0.125 inches (3.2 mm)
Deadband
1.0 inch (25.4 mm) from the sensor face or 5% of
maximum range, whichever is greater
Frequency
40 kHz
Range
Resolution
Drift
0.5 inches (12.7 mm) (or 5% of maximum range,
whichever is greater) to 10.0 feet (3.05 m)
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
0
A-8
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Surface Velocity
Accuracy
+/- 0.25 feet per second (0.08 m/s) or 5% of the
actual reading (whichever is greater) in flow
velocities from 1.00 to 15.00 ft/sec (0.30 to 4.57
m/s)
Note: Flow conditions may cause the designated
accuracy to vary and hinder or prevent the
effective use of surface velocity technology.
Deadband
3 inches (76 mm) from the bottom of the rear,
descended portion of the sensor
Minimum
Velocity
1 foot per second (0.30 m/sec)
Frequency
Range
Resolution
Varies based on the parameter settings
3 to 42 inches (7 to 1067 mm)
0.01 feet per second (0.003 m/sec)
Surcharge Peak Velocity
Range
-30 to 30 feet/second (-9.1 to 9.1 m/sec)
Frequency
250 kHz
Resolution
0.01 feet per second (0.003 m/sec)
Accuracy
+/- 0.2 ft/sec (0.06 m/sec) or 4% of actual peak
velocity (whichever is greater) in flow velocities
from -5 to 20 ft/sec (-1.52 to 6.10 m/sec)
Specifications
A-9
Surcharge Pressure Depth
Pressure
Range
0.0 to 5.0 PSI (0.0 - 0.34 Bar): up to 11.5 feet (3.5
m)
0.0 to 15.0 PSI (0.0 - 1.03 Bar): up to 34.5 feet
(10.5 m)
Pressure
Accuracy
Pressure
Resolution
0 - 5.0 PSI (0 - 0.34 Bar): +/- 1.4 inches (36 mm)
0 - 15.0 PSI (0 - 1.03 Bar): +/- 4.1 inches (104
mm)
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS3-V0-xx30)
This sensor supports downward ultrasonic depth and optional
pressure depth.
Housing
Dimensions
Cable
Marine-grade aluminum/epoxy
7.45 inches (189 mm) long x 4.125 inches (105
mm) wide x 0.86 inches (22 mm) high
Standard size: 30.0 feet (9.14 m) long x 0.45
inches nominal (11 mm nominal) OD,
polyurethane jacket
Extension cables available up to 300 feet (91 m)
Operating/
Storage
Temperature
Operating: -4° to 140° F (-20° to 60° C)
Storage: -4° to 167° F (-20° to 75° C)
Note: The sensor will not produce accurate
readings when ice is built up on the sensor.
A-10
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Downward Ultrasonic Depth
Accuracy
0.125 inches (3.2 mm)
Deadband
1.0 inch (25.4 mm) or 5% of maximum range,
whichever is greater
Frequency
40 kHz
Range
0.5 inches (12.7 mm) (or 5% of maximum range,
whichever is greater) to 10.0 feet (3.05 m)
Resolution
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
Drift
0.0 inches/mm
Pressure Depth (optional)
Pressure Range
0.0 to 5.0 PSI (0.0 – 0.34 Bar): up to 11.5 feet
(3.5 m)
0.0 to 15.0 PSI (0.0 – 1.03 Bar): up to 34.5 feet
(10.5 m)
Pressure
Accuracy
Pressure
Resolution
0 – 5.0 PSI (0 – 0.34 Bar): +/- 1.4 inches (36 mm)
0 – 15.0 PSI (0 – 1.03 Bar): +/- 4.1 inches (104
mm)
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
Specifications
A-11
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor (ADS p/n 8K-CS4-35)
This sensor supports upward ultrasonic depth and peak velocity.
Enclosure
ABS plastic shell, epoxy-filled
Dimensions
Enclosure: 5.36 inches (136 mm) long x 1.25
inches (32 mm) wide x 0.81 inches (21 mm) high
Cable
Standard size: 35 feet (10.7 m) long x 0.31 inches
(7.9 mm) nominal OD, polyurethane jacket
Extension cables available up to 300 feet (91.4
m)
Operating/
Storage
Temperature
Operating: -4° to 140° F (-20° to 60° C)
Storage: -4° to 167° F (-20° to 75° C)
Note: This sensor will not produce accurate
readings in frozen flow.
Upward Ultrasonic Depth
Upward Depth
Accuracy
0.5% of the reading or +/- 0.125 inches (3.2 mm),
whichever is greater
Deadband
Extending 1.0 inches (25 mm) up from the bottom
of the sensor
Frequency
250 kHz
Range
60 inches (1524 mm)
Resolution
0.01 inches (0.25 mm)
Drift
0
A-12
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Peak Doppler Velocity
Range
-30 to 30 feet per second (-9.1 to 9.1 m/sec)
Deadband
Extending 1.0 inches (25 mm) up from the bottom
of the sensor
Frequency
250 kHz
Resolution
0.01 feet per second (0.003 m/sec)
Accuracy
+/- 0.2 ft/sec (0.06 m/sec) or 4% of actual peak
velocity (whichever is greater) in flow velocities
from -5 to 20 ft/sec (-1.52 to 6.10 m/sec)
Direct Connect Cable (ADS p/n 8000-0054)
The direct connection cable supports on-site communications with
the FlowShark Triton monitor.
Size
Cable: 0.3 inches nominal. (7.6 mm nominal) OD
Length: 16.5 feet (5.03 m)
Construction
2-pair twisted, shielded, 4-conductor cable with
polyurethane jacket; in-line opto-isolation; PCB
potted in plastic housing
Connections
Factory fitted potted connector on monitor end,
DB9 connector on computer end
Specifications
A-13
Wireless GSM Module (ADS p/n 8000-0052)
The wireless GSM module supports the battery-powered FlowShark
Triton.
Modem
Size
GSM/GPRS cellular modem using GPRS TCP/IP
(Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
Cable: 0.3 inches (7.6 mm) nominal OD
Length: 6 feet (1.82 m)
Enclosure: 5.1 x 3.1 x 1.4 inches (130 x 79 x 36
mm)
Construction
Shielded, 10-conductor cable with polyurethane
jacket; in-line opto-isolation; PCB potted in plastic
housing
Connections
Monitor end: Factory-fitted potted connector
Antenna cable: SMA connector
Display
7-segment LED with clear cover
Power
Supplied by IS battery in monitor
Operating
Temperature
-4° to 140° F (-20° to 60° C)
A-14
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
External Modem Unit (ADS p/n 3800-0148)
The ADS EMU (external modem unit) supports the externallypowered FlowShark Triton monitor.
Enclosure
Dimensions
Weight
Operating
Temperature
External Power
Wireless Modem
Connections
Communication
Cable
Rectangular UL-Recognized NEMA 4X/6P
composite enclosure with stainless steel
hardware
18 inches (457 mm) high x 6 inches (152 mm)
wide x 7.5 inches (191 mm) deep
12 pounds (5.44 kg)
0° to 140° F (-18° to 60° C)
Requires an external DC power source providing
a minimum of 12 volts at 1 amp
Enfora Model GSM1308-50 Quad-band
GSM/GPRS (850/900/1850/1900 MHz)
Sealed NEMA 4X right-angle cable grip fitting for
communication cable
Available lengths: 85, 100, and 135 feet (26.0,
30.5, and 41.1 m)
Jacket: 0.318-inch (8 mm) OD heavy gauge
polyurethane direct burial
Conductors: 8-20 gauge and 4-18 gauge
Connectors: Factory-fitted, potted (monitor end);
field terminated strip connection (EMU end)
FCC ID
FCC ID MIVGSM0308
Antenna
Smarteq™ mini-wing (SMA/TNC)
Protocol
TCP/IP
Addressing
Fixed address via AT&T custom APN
Specifications
A-15
External Modem Unit/Multiplexer (ADS p/n
106226E)
The ADS external modem unit/multiplexer (EMUX) supports the
externally-powered FlowShark Triton monitor and SCADA or
process control systems.
Enclosure
Dimensions
Weight
Operating
Temperature
External Power
Wireless Modem
Connections
Communication
Cable
Rectangular NEMA 1 plastic enclosure with
stainless steel hardware
6.26 inches (159 mm) high x 6.08 inches (155
mm) wide x 2.5 inches (64 mm)
1.5 pounds ( 0.68 kg)
0° to 140° F (-18° to 60° C)
Requires an external DC power source providing
a minimum of 12 volts at 1 amp
Enfora Model GSM0308-71 Quad-band
GSM/GPRS (850/900/1850/1900 MHz)
•
Communication
•
Modbus
•
Antenna
•
External Power
Available lengths: 85, 100, and 135 feet (26.0,
30.5, and 41.1 m)
Jacket: 0.318-inch (8 mm) OD heavy gauge
polyurethane direct burial
Conductors: 8-20 gauge and 4-18 gauge
Connectors: Factory-fitted, potted (monitor end);
field terminated strip connection (EMU end)
FCC ID
FCC ID MIVGSM0308
A-16
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Antenna
Communication
Protocols
Addressing
Supports Smarteq™ mini-wing/slim (SMA/TNC) or
customer-supplied antenna with the following
specifications:
•
50 ohms
•
VSWR<1:1.5
•
maximum gain of 3 dBi
•
Male SMA connector
TCP/IP for wireless communication
Modbus for data transfer
Fixed address via AT&T custom APN
ADS Power Supply (ADS p/n 5000-0727)
The power supply supports external-powered FlowShark Triton
monitors.
Enclosure
Dimensions
Mounting Holes
Input Voltage
Output Voltage
Connection
NEMA 4X Polycarbonate
5.1 inches (130 mm) high x 5.1 inches (130 mm)
wide x 5.1 inches (130 mm) deep
Four 0.175-inch (4.4-mm) holes for panel
mounting
100-240 VAC, 50/60 MHz
12V DC, 1.2 A
AC: Supplied 6-foot line cord (U.S.) or via
hardware to AC input terminals
DC: Hardware to DC output terminals
B-1
APPENDIX B
Part Numbers
This appendix contains a parts list of the most commonly ordered and used
parts supporting the ADS® FlowShark® Triton flow monitoring system.
Monitors
8000-FST-60C
FLOWSHARK TRITON MONITOR (INCLUDES 12VOLT IS BATTERY PACK)
8000-FST-EP-60C
FLOWSHARK TRITON MONITOR, EXTERNAL
POWER (EXCLUDES 12-VOLT IS BATTERY PACK)
Sensors and Sensor Cables
8K-CS4-05-35
SENSOR, CS4, UPWARD DEPTH, PEAK VELOCITY,
PRESSURE SENSOR 0 – 5 PSI (0 – 0.34 Bar), 35-FT
(10.6-m) CABLE
8K-CS4-15-35
SENSOR, CS4, UPWARD DEPTH, PEAK VELOCITY,
PRESSURE SENSOR 0 – 15 PSI (0 – 1.03 Bar), 35-FT
(10.6-m) CABLE
8K-CS4-30-1H
SENSOR, CS4, UPWARD DEPTH, PEAK VELOCITY,
PRESSURE SENSOR 0 – 30 PSI (0 – 2.07 Bar), 100FT (30.5-m) CABLE
8K-CS3-V0-00-30
SENSOR, CS3, US DEPTH, 30-FT (9.14-m) CABLE
8K-CS3-V0-05-30
SENSOR, CS3, US DEPTH, PRESSURE SENSOR 0 –
5 PSI (0 – 0.34 Bar), 30-FT (9.14-m) CABLE
8K-CS3-V0-15-30
SENSOR, CS3, US DEPTH, PRESSURE SENSOR 0 –
15 PSI (0 – 1.03 Bar), 30-FT (9.14-m) CABLE
B-2 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
8K-CS5-V2-05-30
SENSOR, CS5, US DEPTH, SURFACE VEL,
PRESSURE SENSOR 0 – 5 PSI (0 – 0.34 Bar), 30-FT
(9.14-m) CABLE
8K-CS5-V2-15-30
(available late 2012)
SENSOR, CS5, US DEPTH, SURFACE VEL,
PRESSURE SENSOR 0 – 15 PSI (0 – 1.03 Bar), 30-FT
(9.14-m) CABLE
8K-CS4-35
SENSOR, CS4, UPWARD DEPTH, PEAK VELOCITY,
35-FT (10.6-m) CABLE
8000-0023-xxx (xxx
represents cable
length in feet)
SENSOR EXTENSION CABLE, FOR SENSORS without
PRESSURE; STANDARD LENGTHS: 25 FT (7.6m), 50
FT (15.2m), 75 FT (22.8m), 100 FT (30.5m). CUSTOM
LENGTHS TO 300 FT (91m)
8000-0025–xxx (xxx
represents cable
length in feet)
SENSOR EXTENSION CABLE, FOR SENSORS with
PRESSURE; STANDARD LENGTHS: 10 FT (3.0m), 25
FT (7.6m), 50 FT (15.2m), 75 FT (22.8m), 100 FT
(30.5m), 125 FT (38.1m), 150 FT (45.7m), 200 FT
(61.0m). CUSTOM LENGTHS TO 300 FT (91m)
Communication/External Power Parts
8000-0054
DIRECT CONNECT MODULE & 16-FT (4.8-m)
MONITOR CONNECTION CABLE
8000-0052
GSM COMMUNICATION MODULE, SMA ANTENNA
TERMINAL, 6-FT (1.82m) MONITOR CABLE
507181
SIM CARD, AT&T, FIXED IP
3800-0162
GSM HIRSCHMAN SLIM ANTENNA with 15-FT (4.8-m)
CABLE, SMA CONNECTOR
3800-0163
GSM SMARTEQ MINIWING ANTENNA with 15-FT (4.8m) CABLE, SMA CONNECTOR
8000-0140
MAGNET, RED (for activating diagnostic codes)
3800-0148
EMU (External modem unit)
3800-0181
EXTERNAL POWER KIT (includes internal chassis
cable and external 10-foot power cable)
106226E
EMU, EXTERNAL POWER, SCADA, GWMUX, IS
507959
MODEM, GPRS, QUAD BAND (replacement modem for
EMU)
5000-0727
12VDC POWER SUPPLY
Part Numbers
B-3
106227B-xx (xx
represents the cable
length in feet)
CABLE, COMM, FST TO EMU; STANDARD LENGTHS:
10 FT (3.0m), 85 FT (25.9m), 100 FT (30.5m), 135 FT
(41.1m) – other cable lengths up to 300 feet (91.4m) are
also available by request
8000-0054-01
CABLE, ASSY, FS TRITON TO TELOG
8000-0044-25
CABLE, EXT, COMM/GSM, 25 FT (7.6 m)
Monitor Replacement Parts
8000-0043-01
BATTERY PACK, IS, 12V, UNPOTTED with PCB
8000-0043-02
BATTERY PACK, IS, 12V, UNPOTTED without PCB
8000-0141
RETAINER, PLUG, URATHANE, 12-V IS BATTERY (for
use with 8000-0043-01/02)
8000-0042-01
PCB, BATTERY, w/ CABLE
3704-0032
REPLACEMENT VENT DRYER TUBE
507995
DESICCANT PACK, GSM MODULE
8000-0036
PROCESSOR BOARD ASSEMBLY
8000-0197
POWER REGULATOR ASSEMBLY, with
REPLACEABLE FUSES, IS, FST1
508071
FUSE, MOLDED, 315mA, TH, SLOW BLOW, RED
BAND
508072
FUSE, MOLDED, 140mA, 3.3-volt, TH, SLOW BLOW,
YELLOW BAND
508073
FUSE, MOLDED, 100mA, 5-volt, TH, SLOW BLOW,
BLUE BAND
Standard Size Installation Rings ( w/ spreader mechanism & Surface Combo
Sensor/Ultrasonic Depth Sensor bracket)
RING,SS [STAINLESS STEEL], [Pipe Diam. Range]
I25-0081
RING, SS, 6 IN (152mm)
I25-0082
RING, SS, 7 - 8.3 IN (178 - 211mm)
I25-0083
RING, SS, 9 - 10.3 IN (229 - 262mm)
I25-0084
RING, SS, 11 - 12.3 IN (279 - 312mm)
I25-0085
RING, SS, 12.5 - 14 IN (317 - 375mm)
B-4 ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
I25-0086
RING, SS, 313.5 - 15.75 IN (343 - 400mm)
I25-0087
RING, SS, 14.4 - 16.75 IN (368 - 425mm)
I25-0088
RING, SS, 16.75 - 18.75 IN (425 - 476mm)
I25-0089
RING, SS, 18.5 - 20.75 IN (470 - 527mm)
I25-0090
RING, SS, 20.5 - 22.75 IN (521 - 578mm)
I25-0091
RING, SS, 22.5 - 28.75 IN (572 - 730mm)
I25-0092
RING, SS, 38.5 - 36.75 IN (724 - 933mm)
I25-0093
RING, SS, 36.5 - 48.75 IN (927 - 1238mm)
I25-0094
RING, SS, 48.75 - 60.75 IN (1238 - 1543mm)
Other mounting hardware
1
2
I25-0001
BRACKET, SLIDING, ULTRASONIC (CS3)
8000-0307
BRACKET, SLIDING, SURFACE COMBO (CS5)
I40-0007
FLANGE, PIPE SPECIAL INSTALL, PRE-DRILLED,
8 FT (2.44m), SS
700-100238-00
SPECIAL INSTALL RING MATERIAL, SS, 12 IN
(304mm) LONG
I40-0009
FLANGE HANDLE (for mounting monitor in manhole) 2
IN (51mm) WIDE X 18 IN (457mm) LONG X 0.25 IN
(6mm) THICK
508058
BOLT, HEX, SS, M8 X 30MM2
517-8001254-00
WASHER, FLAT, SS2
517-8001274-00
WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, SS2
8000-0021
HOOK, SS, 2-PIECE W/ HARDWARE (FOR
MOUNTING MONITOR ON MANHOLE RUNG)
I10-0003
SPREADER MECHANISM FOR RING, COMPLETE, SS
I40-0010
BRACKET, SURCHARGE, with ULTRASONIC SLIDE
I10–0012
24-IN (610-mm) CRANK HANDLE, SS
This item replaces the previous power regulator assembly (ADS p/n 8000-0051), which did
not support fuse replacement.
This item is part of the mounting hardware included with the monitor for the flange handle
(ADS p/n I40-0009).
Part Numbers
Note: In all applications, only ADS IS-Certified Service
Technicians are authorized to perform FlowShark Triton
board and/or component-level repair.
B-5
C-1
APPENDIX C
Monitor Activity Codes
This appendix contains a list of the monitor activity codes that
display automatically on the ADS® GSM Module LED window
while the monitor is running. This list also includes descriptions of
the monitor activities corresponding to the codes.
Note: The LED window is available only on the GSM
Module supporting battery-powered ADS FlowShark®
Triton monitors. Externally-powered FlowShark Triton
monitors communicate through the modem in the EMU or
EMUX. The modem in the EMU does not have an LED
window. However, the EMUX has an LED window for
monitoring activities occurring through the ports on the
EMUX, such as communications and data transfer. Refer
to Appendix D, Modbus/EMUX Configuration and
Diagnostics, for more information.
Note: Some of the activities share a common code.
Code
Monitor Activity
r
Waiting to receive a message
t
Transmitting a message
d
Running display task
d
Running diagnostic task
P
Processing commands
C-2
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Code
Monitor Activity
A
Processing alarms
J
No active events
H
Hanging up
t
Reading temperature
b
Reading the (upward) ultrasonic depth
sensor or the ultrasonic depth sensor in the
Surface Combo Sensor
A
Reading all the sensor pairs from the
(upward) ultrasonic depth sensor (standalone or integrated sensor in the Surface
Combo Sensor)
P
Reading pressure depth (from the Peak
Combo Sensor or Surface Combo Sensor)
u
Reading updepth (from the Peak Combo
Sensor)
A
Calculating final updepth waveform (from
Peak Combo Sensor)
C
Reading peak velocity (from the Peak
Combo Sensor)
n
Measuring peak velocity (from the Peak
Combo Sensor)
S
Reading surface velocity (from the Surface
Combo Sensor)
s
Processing surface spectrums
0
NumReadings – updepth reading number
0
grabNums – number of vpeak grab
0
uPairs – number of ultrasonic pairs being
fired
S
Sleep
Monitor Activity Codes
Code
Monitor Activity
C
Deep sleep (monitor going to sleep)
A
Calling cycle modem power from sleep
b
Running BASIC task
C-3
D-1
APPENDIX D
Modbus/EMUX Configuration and
Diagnostics
This appendix contains essential configuration, diagnostic, and
reference information and instructions regarding communication
and data exchange involving the FlowShark® Triton, EMUX, and
RTU. It specifically addresses the following issues:
•
Setting up communication between the PC and EMUX
•
Using the onboard diagnostics to configure and program
Modbus/modem communications, perform monitor and system
tests, and view system parameters
•
Programming the RTU with Modbus data registers
•
Interpreting the EMUX LED indicators
Note: An RTU (remote terminal unit) is an example of
the kind of customer-supplied equipment that uses Modbus
acquired data. Many other types of equipment may be
connected to FlowShark Tritons; however, all will
communicate as described. A PLC (programmable logic
controller), an I/O (input/output) server, or other
instruments, such as the Telog® Ru-33, may be used in
place of an RTU. ADS® references the RTU in this
manual primarily because it is the most common type of
end-point hardware used with SCADA systems.
D-2
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Setting up PC-to-EMUX Communication
Performing on board configuration and diagnostics and
programming the Modbus data registers requires a physical
connection between the EMUX and a PC loaded with a terminal
emulator application setup with the appropriate communication
parameters.
Connecting the PC to the EMUX
Communication between the PC and EMUX requires the following
hardware and software:
•
PC or laptop computer with an RS-232 serial port. If the
computer has a USB port, but no RS-232 port, use a USB-toRS-232 adaptor.
•
DB-9 female-to-female straight-through serial cable
•
Terminal emulator program (e.g., HyperTerminal by
Hilgraeve) loaded on the PC/laptop
Connect the DB-9 cable to the RS-232 port on the PC/laptop and
the MODBUS port on the EMUX. Once this connection has been
established, provide power to the EMUX.
Setting the Terminal Emulator Communication
Parameters
The terminal emulator must have the appropriate parameters for
establishing communication with the EMUX. Therefore, once the
PC is connected to the EMUX and the EMUX is receiving power,
launch the terminal emulator program on the PC/laptop and
enter/modify the following communication parameters at the
appropriate location in the software:
•
Baud Rate 19,200
•
Parity None
•
Data Bits 8
Modbus/EMUX Configuration and Diagnostics
•
Stop Bits 1
•
Handshaking None
D-3
Running the Onboard Diagnostics
The EMUX requires limited configuration and diagnostics to ensure
successful operation and communication among the user, RTU,
EMUX, and the monitor. Perform these tasks by accessing the onboard diagnostics menus available on the EMUX through the
terminal emulator (e.g., HyperTerminal).
Once a connection with the EMUX has been established through the
terminal emulator, enter three consecutive bangs (!!!) to launch the
onboard diagnostics and configuration main menu.
HyperTerminal onboard diagnostics and configuration main menu
The main menu provides access to the 7 configuration/diagnostic
menus. To access one of these submenus, simply press the number
key corresponding to that menu name. Consider the following
guidelines for using the onboard diagnostics:
D-4
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
•
The system will exit the current menu or submenu following 30
seconds of inactivity. To return to the initial location before
the timeout occurred, enter three consecutive bangs (!!!) to
return to the main menu from the READY state or hit the
appropriate number key to return to a particular submenu from
the main menu.
•
Exit any submenu by entering a lower case “x”.
The following sections provide instructions on how to complete the
parameters or diagnostics in each submenu.
Modbus/Local (Host) Port Configuration
Selecting this submenu allows you to configure the local (host) port
and corresponding modes:
•
Baud Rate Select the number (1-3) corresponding to the
desired baud rate. An asterisk (*) will display beside the
selected option. The new baud rate will be initiated after
restarting the EMUX, which occurs through the System Tests
menu.
•
Intermessage timeout This parameter currently is not
configurable by the user. It defaults to 2.
•
Modbus Communications Mode Enter 5 to toggle
between the two available modes. The initial in parentheses (B
or P) indicates the current mode.
 Buffered Choosing this mode maintains the set of realtime data from the monitor on the EMUX. The unit
provides this data upon request from the RTU. This data is
updated in the EMUX based on the scan rate in the
monitor.
 Passthrough Choosing this mode causes all data
requests from the RTU to go directly to the monitor.
Modbus/EMUX Configuration and Diagnostics
•
D-5
Power Mode Enter 6 to toggle between the two available
power modes. The initial in parentheses (C or S) indicates the
current mode.
 Sleep Choosing this mode powers down the EMUX
following 60 seconds of inactivity. When powered down,
the LED will not be illuminated. The unit will awaken
when a request or activity occurs at one of the ports.
 Continuous Choosing this mode maintains the EMUX
in an active state, constantly scanning for inputs and
processing requests.
Modem Passthrough
Selecting this submenu enables you to interact with the modem in
the EMUX. HI indicates the unit is in passthrough mode, allowing
you to enter any commands the modem has the ability to process.
The unit does not reset automatically following a session, so make
sure the modem is in the desired mode for EMUX operation before
a time out occurs.
Hit Ctrl-C to exit passthrough mode.
The unit returns to the main menu following 3 minutes of inactivity
(i.e., no interaction between the user and the modem).
Program Modem
Selecting this submenu initiates modem programming and sets the
modem to listen mode. The modem must be in listen mode to
receive a message from another source. The programming/setting
process takes several minutes to complete. No on-screen indication
of the progress or feedback is included with this operation.
D-6
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Monitor Test
Selecting this submenu sends a monitor detection query to the
monitor communication port. If a monitor is detected, a Monitor
found ID = monitor ID message will identify the monitor. If a
monitor is not detected, a Failed to detect monitor message will
display.
Update Firmware via XMODEM
Selecting this submenu enables you to update the EMUX firmware
through the terminal emulator or another serial connection that
supports XMODEM.
Note: Currently, EMUX firmware updates cannot be
performed through wireless communication. Therefore,
perform all firmware updates using a serial connection.
From the appropriate screen on the terminal emulator, enter or
browse to the desired file for the update (.BIW) and select Xmodem
as the protocol. Then, initiate the update through the emulator.
Once the file transfer is complete, the EMUX will restart
automatically.
Enter three bangs (!!!) to return to the onboard diagnostics main
menu.
System Parameters
Selecting this submenu displays the system parameters configured
for the EMUX. These parameters can be updated only by activating
a monitor attached to the EMUX through Profile. The parameters
displayed should accurately reflect the configuration of monitor
communications with the EMUX.
Following is a brief description of each parameter:
•
Modbus ID This represents the ID used by the RTU to
indicate the specific EMUX/monitor from which to request the
data.
Modbus/EMUX Configuration and Diagnostics
D-7
•
Modbus response delay This represents the amount of
time, in milliseconds, following the request before the monitor
returns the requested data to the RTU through the EMUX.
•
Scan frequency This represents the interval at which the
EMUX requests the latest data from the monitor.
•
Cryout address This represents the address of the server
that will receive the monitor events.
•
Date and Time This represents the current date and time on
the EMUX clock.
System Tests
Selecting this submenu allows you to perform the following system
tests:
•
Restart Emux Enter a 1 to restart the EMUX. Restarting
involves initializing all of the runtime variables and reloading
the firmware.
•
Toggle CD to monitor Enter a 2 to set DTR on the EMUX
MODBUS port to control CD on the monitor. Pressing 2
repeatedly toggles the state. The first attempt may not change
the state of the pin, so you may have to press the key multiple
times to initiate the change on the monitor.
•
Uart Loopback Test Enter a 3 to test the UARTs to which
the user is not connected for onboard diagnostics. The screen
will indicate PASS or FAIL for each UART.
Modbus Data Registers
This section contains tables providing Modbus registers. The first
table lists the Modbus data register addresses corresponding to the
entities for which the FlowShark Triton provides output data. The
RTU requests data from the monitor using the designated registers,
and the monitor (through the EMUX) sends the current entity data
representing those registers back to the RTU. Therefore, the user
D-8
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
must program the RTU with the appropriate registers based on the
type of data desired.
The second table lists the Modbus registers associated with more
general FlowShark Triton information.
Note: The entities available are based on the sensors used
and the data logged. In addition, all values are floating
point, unless otherwise defined.
Register Addresses for Entity Data
The following table contains the entities currently available for
output and the associated register addresses. The register addresses
for the quality values corresponding to the current data display in
parentheses.
Description
Profile Entity
Peak Velocity
from Peak
Combo Sensor
PEAKVEL_1
Upward
Ultrasonic Depth
from Peak
Combo Sensor
UPDEPTH_1
Pressure Depth
from Peak
Combo Sensor
PDEPTH_1
Water
Temperature
from Peak
Combo Sensor
WATERTEMP_1
Surface Velocity
from Surface
Combo Sensor
SURFACEVEL_3
Smart Depth
from the Surface
Combo Sensor
SDEPTH_3
Standard Units of
Measure
Feet per Second
Registers
40000-40001
(40064-40065)
Inches
40002-40003
(40066-40067)
Inches
40004-40005
(40068-40069)
Celsius
40006-40007
(40070-40071)
Feet per Second
40016-40017
(40080-40081)
Inches
40018-40019
(40082-40083)
Modbus/EMUX Configuration and Diagnostics
Description
Profile Entity
Pressure Depth
from the Surface
Comb Sensor
PDEPTH_3
Air Temperature
from the Surface
Combo Sensor
AIRTEMP_3
Flow rate based
on QContinuity
FLOW1
Second Flow
rate based on
QContinuity
FLOW2
Peak Velocity
from the monitor
RAWVEL
Monitor Battery
Voltage (daily)
BTYVOLT
Flow Rate
Threshold from
monitor
QTHRESHOLD
Average Flow
Rate from
monitor
QMLI_AVG
Average Flow
Depth from
monitor
DMLI_AVG
Depth Threshold
from monitor
DTHRESHOLD
Pressure Sensor
Calibration Value
PRESSK
Unidepth
UNIDEPTH
Standard Units of
Measure
Inches
D-9
Registers
40020-40021
(40084-40085)
Celsius
40022-40023
(40086-40087)
Millions of Gallons
per Day
40024-40025
Millions of Gallons
per Day
40026-40027
Feet per Second
40028-40029
(40088-40089)
40090-40091)
(40092-40093)
Volts
40030-40031
(40094-40095)
Millions of Gallons
per Day
40032-40033
Millions of Gallons
per Day
40034-40035
Inches
40036-40037
(40096-40097)
(40098-40099)
(40100-40101)
Inches
40038-40039
(40102-40103)
n/a
40040-40041
(40104-40105)
Inches
40044-40045
(40108-40109)
D-10
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Register Addresses for Monitor Information
The following table contains the registers corresponding to more
general monitor information:
Description
Standard Units of Measure
Registers
Current Monitor Time
n/a
40128-40129
Last Monitor Scan Time
n/a
40130-40131
Scan (Wakeup) Rate
n/a
40132-40133
40134-40135
Reserved
Depth Conversion Coefficient
Inches
40136-40137
Velocity Conversion
Coefficient
Feet Per Second
40138-40139
Volume Conversion
Millions of Gallons per Day
40140-40141
Temperature Conversion Type
Fahrenheit
40142-40143
EMUX LED Window
This section defines the characters, symbols, or activities that may
display on the LED window on the front of the EMUX. The code
displayed typically refers to an activity occurring through one of the
ports on the unit (i.e., monitor COMM Port, modem ANTENNNA
Port, or host MODBUS port).
•
Chasing Lights (circulating segments) The EMUX is
actively scanning the ports waiting for input.
•
2 The EMUX currently is engaged in wireless modem
communication and data processing through the ANTENNA
port.
•
3 The EMUX is sending output/receiving input through the
MODBUS port.
•
r The EMUX is waiting for a response from the monitor
through the EMUX COMM port.
Modbus/EMUX Configuration and Diagnostics
D-11
•
t The EMUX is sending a message to the monitor through the
EMUX COMM port.
•
Flashing middle bar The monitor is not responding
following 20 requests from the EMUX.
•
Blinking dot in lower right corner The wireless modem
has a live connection, but currently is not processing data.
E-1
APPENDIX E
System Configuration and Setup to
Support the Telog Ru-33
Using a battery-powered ADS® FlowShark Triton® to support the
Telog® Ru-33 Recording Telemetry Unit (RTU) requires some
limited configuration and setup. These procedures involve
designating the appropriate identification information to enable
recognition and data exchange between the ADS and Telog units
and using an interface cable to connect the monitor to the RTU.
Note: The Telog Ru-33 must have firmware version
3.300 or later to effectively request data from the
FlowShark Triton monitor.
Connecting the units together primarily involves running the ADS
Triton-Telog Comm Cable from the battery-powered Ru-33 to the
battery-powered FlowShark Triton monitor. This application
requires installing both units in the manhole, a hazardous
environment. However, ADS offers an optional extension cable
(ADS p/n 8000-0044-25) that allows you to install the Telog unit
outside the hazardous environment.
Note: The Telog Ru-33 does not possess IS (intrinsicallysafe) certification. Therefore, an installation involving
connecting the Telog to the IS FlowShark Triton with both
units residing inside the manhole will not be considered
intrinsically safe. The installation will be considered
E-2
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
intrinsically safe only when the Ru-33 is installed outside
the manhole.
Configuring the Monitor to Support the Ru-33
Configuring the FlowShark Triton to support the Telog Ru-33
requires setting three parameters in Profile when establishing a new
location. Refer to Creating a Monitor Location in Chapter 6,
Configuration and Activation, for more information.
•
Scan frequency This represents the interval at which the
monitor takes readings. These readings are available for
retrieval directly from the monitor, but are overwritten with
new data at each new interval. Therefore, ADS recommends
using the same interval for both the scan rate in the monitor and
the rate at which the Telog unit requests the data from the
monitor.
•
Modbus ID This represents the Modbus slave ID that will be
used by the Ru-33 to indicate the specific monitor from which
to request the data. ADS recommends using 55 to identify the
FlowShark Triton.
•
Modbus Delay Response This represents the amount of
time, in milliseconds, following the request before the monitor
will return the requested Modbus output data to the Ru-33.
ADS recommends maintaining the 10 ms default setting.
Connecting the Monitor to the Ru-33
Connecting the FlowShark Triton to the Ru-33 requires the ADS
Triton-Telog Comm Cable (ADS p/n 8000-0054-01). First, connect
the black, metal connector (with gray, plastic boot) from the comm
cable to the COMM port on top of the FlowShark Triton. Then,
connect the black, plastic connector from the comm cable to the
sensor port on the Ru-33. The sensor port is the 9-hole port to the
System Configuration and Setup for Telog Ru-33 E-3
right of the antenna connector and to left of the small 5-pin
connector.
Triton-Telog Comm Cable
Antenna
connector
5-pin
connector
A
CH
NN E L
A
CH
2
NN E L
1
0518
II 1 G
Ex ia IIB T4 Ga
Sira 09ATEX2027X
9-hole port
Telog Ru-33
ST ONLY
TE
M
AX
. 12
MODEL: 8000 - FHK/FST
Use only battery pack 106152
I
PS
R
CO M M
W W W.A
D S E N V.C O M
COMM
FlowShark Triton
Connecting the Telog Ru-33 to the FlowShark Triton monitor using the
Triton – Telog Comm Cable
Note: Do not leave the Triton-Telog Comm Cable
connected to the FlowShark Triton monitor when the cable
is not also connected to an operational Telog Ru-33. This
may cause the FlowShark Triton to remain awake,
unnecessarily consuming battery power and, consequently,
draining the battery pack. Therefore, disconnect the
Triton-Telog Comm Cable from the FlowShark Triton
monitor whenever the Telog unit is disconnected from the
cable for an extended period of time, removed from the
manhole, or out of service.
In-1
Index
1
1/2-band mount, 3-41
12-volt IS battery pack, 2-3, 2-12
checking voltage, 8-8
reading voltage, 8-5
replacement, 8-10
3
3/4-band mount, 3-39
A
activating the monitor, 6-64, 6-85
logs, 6-85
activation logs, 6-100
activity codes, 8-5
adding a second monitoring point,
6-10
alarms
testing monitor cryouts, 8-8
antenna, 1-5
installation, 4-8
ATEX
compliance, 1-13
hazardous area, 1-13
standards, 1-2
special conditions for safe use,
1-6
auto collection, 6-8
B
band
securing the sensor cables, 3-44
battery pack, 1-4, 1-5, 2-12
low voltage designation, 6-59
replacement, 8-10
voltage
minimum, 8-8
board
voltage regulator, 2-12
C
cables
connecting the computer directly
to the monitor, 4-50
direct connect, 4-50
specifications, A-12
sensor
extension, 3-37
securing in the pipe/manhole,
3-54
securing to the band, 3-44
securing to the ring, 3-24
USB-to-serial adapter cable, 4-51
cellular network, 2-4
certifications, 1-10
ATEX, 1-13
CSA, 1-24
EC Type Examination Certificate,
1-17
IECEx, 1-21
modem, 1-13
In-2
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
SIRA, 1-17
special conditions for safe use, 1-6
channels, 2-10, 6-22, 6-35, 6-53
checking the sensors, 8-17
cleaning the sensors, 8-17
coefficient A, 6-40
coefficient B, 6-40
collecting data from a monitor, 6-87
COMM port, 2-11
communication, 1-4, 4-1
antenna, 1-5
direct, 2-3
EMU, 1-5, 4-25
communication cable
installation, 4-19, 4-21
modem replacement, 8-25
SIM card installation, 4-30
SIM card replacement, 8-29
specifications, A-14
unit installation, 4-19, 4-34
EMUX, 1-5
antenna installation, 4-45
communication cable
installation, 4-38
port activity codes, D-10
SIM card installation, 4-39
SIM card replacement, 8-30
specifications, A-15
unit installation, 4-38, 4-43
GSM module, 1-5
antenna installation, 4-8
SIM card installation, 4-12
specifications, A-13
testing monitor cryouts, 8-8
viewing diagnostic codes from
the monitor, 8-5
installing the GSM module, 4-5,
4-6, 4-17
installing the wireless antenna, 4-8
EMUX, 4-45
landline, 2-3
Modbus, 2-3, 2-7, 2-8
monitor activity codes, 8-5, C-1
monitor COMM port, 2-11
obtaining the IP address from the
monitor, 8-5
on-site, 2-7, 4-50
overview, 2-4
EMU, 2-6
EMUX, 2-7
GSM module, 2-5
Modbus, 2-8
Telog Ru-33, 2-8
parameters
low battery, 6-59
low signal strength, 6-59
modem selection, 6-59
port selection, 6-59
temperature range, 6-59
remote, 2-3
setting parameters, 6-59
Telog Ru-33, 2-8
troubleshooting, 8-43
verifying signal strength, 8-5
viewing logs, 6-100
wireless, 2-3, 2-4, 4-3
communication cable
EMU
locating underground utilities,
4-20
selecting cable route, 4-19
installation, 4-19, 4-21, 4-38
wiring to the EMU, 4-26
wiring to the EMUX, 4-41
compliance, 1-10
ATEX, 1-13
CSA, 1-24
hazardous area, 1-13, 1-21, 1-24
IECEx, 1-21
conditions for safe use, 1-7
conduit, 4-23
configuration, 6-3
creating a monitor installation
table, 6-11
creating a monitor location, 6-5
creating a second monitoring
point, 6-10
Index In-3
editing devices
Data Delivery, 6-56
Flow, 6-57
MLI, 6-58
Modem Setup, 6-55
Peak Combo Sensor, 6-21
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
6-21
Smart (Ultrasonic) Depth
Sensor, 6-51
Surface Combo Sensor, 6-34
Ultrasonic (Smart) Depth
Sensor, 6-51
EMUX, D-1
Modbus, 6-9, E-2
Modbus/local port, D-4
overview, 1-26
selecting and editing devices, 6-17
Telog Ru-33, 6-9, E-2
configuring the EMUX, D-1
configuring the monitor, 6-3
confined space entry, 3-3
confirmation, 8-4
connecting a laptop directly to
monitor, 4-50
connecting the monitor to a Telog
Ru-33, E-3
connectors
connecting sensors to the monitor,
3-57
monitor, 2-10
consumption of power, 5-3
contact information, 1-29
control drawing, 1-11
corbel, 4-23
cross check gain, 6-29, 6-41
cryouts, 8-8
CSA
certificates, 1-24
certification, 1-24
compliance, 1-24
hazardous area compliance, 1-24
standards, 1-3
customer service, 1-29
D
DAC gain, 6-24, 6-30, 6-36, 6-41,
6-46, 6-52
data collection, 6-87
auto, 6-8
logs, 6-100
manual, 6-8
Data Delivery
editing device, 6-56
data registers, 6-68, D-8
DC power consumption, 5-3
DC power requirements, 5-3
deadband, 6-23
delay response, 6-10
depth measurement
downward ultrasonic, 2-18, 2-22
pressure, 2-17, 2-20, 2-23
upward ultrasonic, 2-16, 2-24
depth processing, 2-19
depth type, 6-57
desiccant
GSM module, 4-15, 8-21
pressure depth sensor dryer tube,
8-19
replacing beads in dryer tube, 8-20
replacing the pack in the GSM
module, 8-21
devices
diagnostics, 6-70
editing, 6-17
Data Delivery, 6-56
Flow, 6-57
MLI, 6-58
Modem Setup, 6-55
Peak Combo Sensor, 6-21
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
6-21
Smart (Ultrasonic) Depth
Sensor, 6-51
Surface Combo Sensor, 6-34
Ultrasonic (Smart) Depth
Sensor, 6-51
In-4
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Peak Combo Sensor
editing pressure parameters,
6-24
editing temperature parameters,
6-31
editing ultrasonic parameters,
6-22
editing velocity parameters,
6-26
selection, 6-17
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor
editing temperature parameters,
6-31
editing ultrasonic parameters,
6-22
editing velocity parameters,
6-26
Surface Combo Sensor
editing (surcharge) peak
velocity parameters, 6-43
editing pressure parameters,
6-47
editing smart depth (ultrasonic)
parameters, 6-35
editing surface velocity
parameters, 6-38
editing temperature parameters,
6-49
Ultrasonic (Smart) Depth Sensor
editing smart depth (ultrasonic)
parameters, 6-51
editing temperature parameters,
6-53
diagnostic codes, 8-4
diagnostics
codes, 8-5
downward ultrasonic depth, 6-80
EMUX, D-1
pressure, 6-75
sensors, 6-70
smart depth, 6-80
surcharge velocity, 6-77
surface velocity, 6-77
temperature, 6-83
testing the monitor’s cryout
capability, 8-8
upward ultrasonic, 6-72
using magnet to display codes, 8-5
velocity, 6-77
direct communication, 4-50
overview, 2-7
direct connect cable
connecting to the monitor, 4-50
specifications, A-12
Doppler effect, 2-17
downward ultrasonic depth
editing sensor device parameters,
6-35, 6-51
measurement, 2-22
sensor diagnostics, 6-80
troubleshooting, 8-47
dryer tube, 3-59
desiccant, 8-19
end-cap, 3-59
replacement, 8-19
replacing the desiccant, 8-20
securing to the monitor, 3-59
duration, 6-40
E
electronic offset, 6-23, 6-25, 6-35,
6-49, 6-51
EMU, 1-5, 2-13
communication cable installation,
4-19, 4-21
choosing cable route, 4-19
locating underground utilities,
4-20
components, 4-25
external power, 2-3, 2-13
installation, 4-19, 4-34
tools and supplies, 4-26
wiring the communication
cable, 4-26
installing external DC power, 5-2
installing the SIM card, 4-30
Index In-5
modem
replacement, 8-25
overview, 2-6
replacing the SIM card, 8-29
specifications, A-14, A-15
wiring power supply, 5-4
EMU modem
replacement, 8-25
EMUX, 1-5, 2-13
activity codes, D-10
antenna
installation, 4-45
communication cable installation,
4-38
configuration and diagnostics, D-1
connecting the SCADA RTU,
4-47
data registers, D-8
external power, 2-3, 2-13, 4-47
firmware update, D-6
installation, 4-38, 4-43
tools and supplies, 4-39
wiring the communication
cable, 4-41
installing external DC power, 5-2
installing the SIM card, 4-39
installing the wireless antenna,
4-45
LED window
monitor activity codes, D-10
Modbus/local port configuration,
D-4
mounting, 4-43
overview, 2-7
programming the modem, D-5
replacing the SIM card, 8-30
RTU, 2-3, 2-7, 2-8
SCADA, 2-3, 2-7, 2-8
system parameters, D-6
system tests, D-7
wiring power supply, 5-4
events
testing monitor cryouts, 8-8
extension cables, 3-37
external power, 2-3, 2-13
consumption, 5-3
EMU, 2-3, 2-13
EMUX, 2-3, 2-13, 4-47
installation, 5-2
EMU, 5-2
EMUX, 5-2
power supply specifications, A-16
requirements, 5-3
wiring the power supply to the
EMU, 5-4
wiring the power supply to the
EMUX, 5-4
F
fast sample rate, 6-9
firmware upgrade, 6-97
logs, 6-100
Flow
editing device, 6-57
flow type, 6-22, 6-27, 6-57
fuses
replacement, 8-32
G
gain, 6-29, 6-41, 6-45
graphs
hydrograph, 6-91
scattergraph, 6-92, 6-93
GSM module, 1-5
activity codes, 8-4
diagnostic codes, 8-4
installation, 4-5, 4-17
installing a desiccant pack into the
module, 4-15
installing the SIM card, 4-12
installing the wireless antenna, 4-8
LED window, 8-4
monitor activity codes, 8-5, C-1
overview, 2-5
parts and supplies, 4-6
replacing the desiccant pack, 8-21
In-6
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
replacing the SIM card, 8-21
specifications, A-13
testing monitor cryouts, 8-8
viewing diagnostic codes from the
monitor, 8-5
GSM/GPRS communication, 2-4, 4-3
modem
information, 1-13
H
Halytech microSpider, 1-7
handling the sensors, 8-18
hazardous conditions, 1-2
hydraulics, 2-15, 3-4
hydrograph
depth and velocity data, 6-91
I
IECEx
certificates, 1-21
certification, 1-21
compliance, 1-21
hazardous area compliance, 1-21
standards, 1-2
special conditions for safe use,
1-6
infiltration, 4-23
inspection
monitor, 8-3
sensors, 8-17
installation
1/2-band mount
Peak Combo Sensor, 3-41
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
3-41
3/4-band mount
Peak Combo Sensor, 3-39
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
3-39
EMU, 4-19, 4-34
communication cable route,
4-19
installing the communication
cable, 4-19, 4-21
locating underground utilities,
4-20
tools, 4-26
wiring the communication
cable, 4-26
EMU communication cable, 4-19,
4-21
EMUX, 4-38, 4-43
installing the communication
cable, 4-38
tools, 4-39
wiring the communication
cable, 4-41
EMUX communication cable,
4-38
external DC power, 5-2
GSM module, 4-17
IS considerations, 1-6
manhole characteristics, 3-5
monitor, 7-1
manhole rim, 7-7
manhole wall, 7-4
rung, 7-3
mounting Peak Combo Sensor to
the ring, 3-23
mounting Slimline Peak Combo
Sensor to the ring, 3-23
mounting Surface Combo Sensor
to the ring, 3-29
mounting Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
to the ring, 3-29
overview, 1-26, 3-1
Peak Combo Sensor
1/2-band mount, 3-41
3/4-band mount, 3-39
pipe characteristics, 3-5
power supply, 5-4
EMU, 5-4
EMUX, 5-4
ring, 3-25
Index In-7
sensors, 3-7
mounting Peak Combo Sensor
to the ring assembly, 3-23
mounting Slimline Peak Combo
Sensor to the ring assembly,
3-23
mounting Surface Combo
Sensor to the ring assembly,
3-29
mounting to the ring, 3-21
mounting Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor to the ring assembly,
3-29
ring assembly, 3-11
standard mount, 3-45
surcharge mount, 3-51
SIM card
EMU, 4-30
EMUX, 4-39
GSM module, 4-12
site investigation, 3-4
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor
1/2-band mount, 3-41
3/4-band mount, 3-39
special, 3-5, 3-33
1/2-band mount, 3-41
3/4-band mount, 3-39
mounting the Peak Combo
Sensor, 3-38
mounting the Slimline Peak
Combo Sensor, 3-38
parts and supplies, 3-35
tools, 3-37
standard, 3-5, 3-7
mounting sensors to the ring,
3-21
parts and supplies, 3-8
ring assembly, 3-11
tools, 3-10
Surface Combo Sensor
standard mount, 3-45
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
standard mount, 3-45
surcharge mount, 3-51
wireless antenna, 4-8
EMUX, 4-45
installation table
creating, 6-11
IntelliServe
receiving test cryouts from the
monitor, 8-8
internal power
12-volt IS battery pack, 1-4, 2-12
interval, 6-56
intrinsic safety (IS), 1-2
certified tools, 1-6
maintenance, 1-8
IP address, 8-5
IS battery pack, 1-4, 2-12
IS certification
Peak Combo Sensor, 1-4
sensors, 1-3
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor, 1-4
Surface Combo Sensor, 1-4
IS sensors, 2-15
L
LED window
EMUX codes, D-10
GSM module, 8-4
monitor activity codes, 8-5, C-1
viewing monitor diagnostic codes
from the GSM module, 8-5
leveling
Surface Combo Sensor, 3-30
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, 3-30
location configuration, 6-5
location information file (LIF), 2-3,
6-3
logs
data collection, 6-100
diagnostic, 6-100
firmware upgrade, 6-100
monitor activation, 6-100
low voltage, 8-8
In-8
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
M
magnet, 8-5
maintenance
checking the sensors, 8-17
parts and supplies, 8-2
restrictions, 1-8
sensor inspection, 8-17
system components, 8-2
manhole
conditions, 3-5
corbel, 4-23
depth, 3-6
mounting the monitor
manhole rim, 7-7
manhole wall, 7-4
rung, 7-3
securing sensor cables, 3-54
manhole depth, 6-8
manual collection, 6-8
maximum velocity, 6-29, 6-40, 6-45
memory, 2-1
microSpider, 1-7
MLI
editing device, 6-58
Modbus, 2-3, 2-7, 2-8, 6-68
configuration, 6-9, D-1, E-2
connecting the RTU to the EMU,
4-47
defining output data registers,
6-68
delay response, 6-10
diagnostics, D-1
EMUX system parameters, D-6
local port configuration, D-4
output data registers, D-8
system tests, D-7
Telog Ru-33, 2-8, 6-9, E-2
verifying output data, 6-68
Modbus ID, 6-10
mode, 6-35, 6-51, 6-56
modem
ceritification, 1-13
EMU, 4-25
EMUX
program, D-5
GSM module installation, 4-5
replacement in EMU, 8-25
selection, 6-59
Modem Setup
editing device, 6-55
moisture in pressure depth sensor,
8-19, 8-20
monitor
12-volt IS battery pack
checking voltage, 8-8
replacement, 8-10
activation, 6-64, 6-85
logs, 6-100
activation logs, 6-100
activity codes, 8-5, C-1
collecting data, 6-87
configuration, 6-3
adding a second monitoring
point, 6-10
creating a monitor location, 6-5
creating an installation table,
6-11
selecting devices, 6-17
confirmation, 8-4
connecting sensors, 3-57
connectors, 2-10
control drawing, 1-11
diagnostic codes, 8-5
direct connection, 4-50
estimated battery life, 8-8
external DC power requirements,
5-3
external power, 5-1
fuses
replacement, 8-32
GPRS communication, 2-4
inspection, 8-3
Index In-9
installation, 7-1
manhole rim, 7-7
manhole wall, 7-4
rung, 7-3
memory, 2-1
mounting bracket, 7-4
new product warranty, 1-28
obtaining the IP address, 8-5
on-site communication, 4-50
out-of-warranty repairs, 1-29
overview, 2-4
ports, 2-10
power, 1-4
external, 5-1
processor board, 2-9
regulator
replacement, 8-31
replacing the fuses, 8-32
remote communication, 4-3
replacing the battery pack, 8-10
replacing the fuses, 8-32
replacing the regulator, 8-31
returns, 1-29
running sensor diagnostics, 6-70
securing the dryer tube, 3-59
sensors, 1-3
shipping for warranty work, 1-29
specifications, A-1
telemetry, 1-4
Telog Ru-33, E-1
testing cryout capability, 8-8
torque for bolts, 8-17
troubleshooting, 8-39
troubleshooting fee, 1-29
upgrading firmware, 6-97
viewing diagnostic logs, 6-100
voltage regulator board, 2-12
warranty, 1-28
wireless communication, 1-4, 2-4,
4-3
monitoring point
creating a second monitoring point
for a locaion, 6-10
mounting bracket for the monitor,
7-4
mounting the EMU, 4-34
mounting the EMUX, 4-43
mounting the monitor
manhole rim, 7-7
manhole wall, 7-4
rung, 7-3
N
new product warranty, 1-28
normal sample rate, 6-8
O
on-site communication, 4-50
out-of-warranty repairs, 1-29
overview
communication, 2-4
EMU, 2-6
EMUX, 2-7
GSM module, 2-5
Modbus, 2-8
on-site, 2-7
Telog Ru-33, 2-8
direct communication, 2-7
EMU, 2-6
EMUX, 2-7
GSM module, 2-5
Modbus, 2-8
monitor, 2-4
Peak Combo Sensor, 2-15
peak velocity, 2-17
pressure depth, 2-17
upward ultrasonic depth, 2-16
sensors
Peak Combo Sensor, 2-15
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
2-24
Surface Combo Sensor, 2-20
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, 2-18
In-10
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
2-24
peak velocity, 2-24
upward ultrasonic depth, 2-24
Surface Combo Sensor, 2-20
downward ultrasonic depth,
2-22
pressure depth, 2-23
surcharge peak velocity, 2-23
surface velocity, 2-22
Telog Ru-33, 2-8
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, 2-18
downward ultrasonic depth,
2-19
pressure depth option, 2-20
P
part numbers
monitor, B-1
sensors, B-1
system components, B-1
parts
GSM module installation, 4-6
maintenance, 8-2
replacement, B-1
special installation, 3-35
standard installation, 3-8
PC communication cable, 4-50
Peak Combo Sensor
1/2-band mount, 3-41
3/4-band mount, 3-39
connecting to the monitor, 3-57
diagnostics, 6-70
pressure, 6-75
temperature, 6-83
upward ultrasonic, 6-72
velocity, 6-77
editing device
pressure parameters, 6-24
temperature parameters, 6-31
ultrasonic parameters, 6-22
velocity parameters, 6-26
editing devices, 6-21
inspection, 8-17
installation
1/2-band mount, 3-41
3/4-band mount, 3-39
IS certification, 1-4
mounting sensor to the ring, 3-23
overview, 2-15
peak velocity measurement,
2-17
pressure depth measurement,
2-17
upward ultrasonic depth
measurement, 2-16
pressure sensor dryer tube
replacing desiccant, 8-20
replacing pressure sensor dryer
tube, 8-19
securing dryer tube to the monitor,
3-59
special installation, 3-38
specifications, A-5
troubleshooting
peak velocity, 8-55
pressure depth, 8-60
temperature, 8-61
upward ultrasonic depth, 8-52
peak velocity
editing sensor device parameters,
6-26, 6-43
measurement, 2-17, 2-23, 2-24
sensor diagnostics, 6-77
troubleshooting, 8-55
physical offset, 6-22, 6-35, 6-53
Surface Combo Sensor, 3-32
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, 3-32
ping amplitude, 6-24, 6-30, 6-42,
6-46
pipe
conditions, 3-5
dimensions, 3-5
securing sensor cables, 3-54
shape, 3-6
table, 6-11
pipe height, 6-22, 6-35, 6-53
Index In-11
ports, 2-10
connecting sensors to the monitor,
3-57
power, 1-4
12-volt IS battery pack, 2-3, 2-12
battery pack, 1-4, 2-3
replacement, 8-10
checking battery pack voltage, 8-8
consumption, 5-3
diagnostic codes, 8-5
external, 2-13, 5-1
EMU, 2-3, 2-13
EMUX, 2-3, 2-13, 4-47
installation, 5-2
power supply, 5-4
power supply specifications,
A-16
requirements, 5-3
internal
12-volt IS battery pack, 2-12
battery voltage, 8-5
checking battery pack voltage,
8-8
replacing the battery pack, 8-10
regulator
replacement, 8-31
replacing fuses, 8-32
replacing the regulator, 8-31
power supply
installation and wiring, 5-4
specifications, A-16
pressure depth
editing sensor device parameters,
6-24, 6-47
measurement, 2-17, 2-23
sensor diagnostics, 6-75
troubleshooting, 8-60
pressure depth sensor
replacing the desiccant in the dryer
tube, 8-20
replacing the dryer tube, 8-19
securing dryer tube to monitor,
3-59
processor board, 2-9
Profile software
activating the monitor, 6-64, 6-85
collecting data from a monitor,
6-87
creating a monitor location, 6-5
creating a second monitoring
point, 6-10
creating an installation table, 6-11
editing devices
Data Delivery, 6-56
Flow, 6-57
MLI, 6-58
Modem Setup, 6-55
Peak Combo Sensor, 6-21
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
6-21
Smart (Ultrasonic) Depth
Sensor, 6-51
Surface Combo Sensor, 6-34
Ultrasonic (Smart) Depth
Sensor, 6-51
launching, 6-3
low voltage, 8-8
Modbus, 6-9, E-2
registering, 6-3
running sensor (device)
diagnostics, 6-70
selecting devices, 6-17
setting communication parameters,
6-59
Telog Ru-33, 6-9, E-2
upgrading the monitor firmware,
6-97
viewing logs, 6-100
pump station, 3-5
PVC conduit, 4-23
Q
quadredundancy, 2-19
In-12
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
R
regulator
replacement, 8-31
replacing fuses, 8-32
regulator replacement, 8-31
repairs
out of warranty, 1-29
replacement
12-volt IS battery pack, 8-10
desiccant in dryer tube, 8-20
dryer tube, 8-19
EMU
modem, 8-25
SIM card in modem, 8-29
EMUX
SIM card in modem, 8-30
fuses, 8-32
GSM module
desiccant pack, 8-21
SIM card, 8-21
parts/part numbers, B-1
regulator, 8-31
returns
international, 1-29
rim mounting, 7-7
ring
assembly, 3-11
installation, 3-25
mounting Peak Combo Sensor,
3-23
mounting Slimline Peak Combo
Sensor, 3-23
mounting Surface Combo Sensor,
3-29
mounting the sensors, 3-21
mounting Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor, 3-29
securing the sensor cables, 3-24
RTU
connecting to the EMUX, 4-47
defining Modbus output data
registers, 6-68, D-8
rung mounting the monitor, 7-3
S
safe use
sample rate
fast, 6-9
normal, 6-8
scan, 6-9
SCADA, 2-3, 2-7, 2-8
connecting the RTU to the
EMUX, 4-47
defining Modbus output data
registers, 6-68
Modbus output data registers, D-8
setup, 6-68
verifying Modbus output data,
6-68
scan rate, 6-9
scattergraph
depth data, 6-92, 6-93
velocity data, 6-92
sealing fitting, 4-24
sensitivity, 6-27, 6-39, 6-44
sensor extension cables, 3-37
sensor temperature, 6-32, 6-53
sensors, 1-3
1/2-band mount
Peak Combo Sensor, 3-41
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
3-41
3/4-band mount
Peak Combo Sensor, 3-39
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
3-39
cleaning, 8-17
confirmation, 8-4
connecting to the monitor, 3-57
extension cables, 1-4
handling, 8-18
inspection, 8-17
installation, 3-7
ring assembly, 3-11, 3-21
standard mount, 3-45
surcharge mount, 3-51
IS certification, 1-3
Index In-13
monitor ports, 2-10
mounting to the ring, 3-21
overview, 2-15
Peak Combo Sensor, 2-15
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
2-24
Surface Combo Sensor, 2-20
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, 2-18
pressure depth option, 2-20
part numbers, B-1
Peak Combo Sensor
editing devices, 6-21
mounting to the ring, 3-23
overview, 2-15
peak velocity, 2-17
pressure depth, 2-17
running pressure diagnostics,
6-75
running temperature
diagnostics, 6-83
running upward ultrasonic
diagnostics, 6-72
running velocity diagnostics,
6-77
specifications, A-5
troubleshooting peak velocity,
8-55
troubleshooting pressure depth,
8-60
troubleshooting temperature,
8-61
troubleshooting upward
ultrasonic depth, 8-52
upward ultrasonic depth, 2-16
running diagnostics, 6-70
securing cables in the
pipe/manhole, 3-54
securing cables to the band, 3-44
securing cables to the ring, 3-24
securing dryer tube to the monitor,
3-59
selecting and editing devices, 6-17
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor
editing devices, 6-21
mounting to the ring, 3-23
overview, 2-24
peak velocity, 2-24
specifications, A-11
troubleshooting peak velocity,
8-55
troubleshooting temperature,
8-61
troubleshooting upward
ultrasonic depth, 8-52
upward ultrasonic depth, 2-24
Smart (Ultrasonic) Depth Sensor
editing devices, 6-51
special installation, 3-33
parts and supplies, 3-35
Peak Combo Sensor, 3-38
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
3-38
tools, 3-37
specifications
Peak Combo Sensor, A-5
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
A-11
Surface Combo Sensor, A-6
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, A-9
standard installation, 3-7
mounting Peak Combo Sensor
to the ring, 3-23
mounting sensors to the ring,
3-21
mounting Slimline Peak Combo
Sensor to the ring, 3-23
mounting Surface Combo
Sensor to the ring, 3-29
mounting Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor to the ring, 3-29
parts and supplies, 3-8
ring assembly, 3-11
tools, 3-10
storing, 8-18
In-14
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Surface Combo Sensor
downward ultrasonic depth,
2-22
editing devices, 6-34
leveling, 3-30
mounting to the ring, 3-29
overview, 2-20
physical offset, 3-32
pressure depth, 2-23
running pressure diagnostics,
6-75
running smart depth
diagnostics, 6-80
running surcharge velocity
diagnostics, 6-77
running surface velocity
diagnostics, 6-77
running temperature
diagnostics, 6-83
specifications, A-6
surcharge peak velocity, 2-23
surface velocity, 2-22
troubleshooting downward
ultrasonic depth, 8-47
troubleshooting surcharge peak
velocity, 8-55
troubleshooting surcharge
pressure depth, 8-60
troubleshooting surface
velocity, 8-58
troubleshooting temperature,
8-61
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
editing devices, 6-51
leveling, 3-30
mounting to the ring, 3-29
overview, 2-18
physical offset, 3-32
running smart depth
diagnostics, 6-80
running temperature
diagnostics, 6-83
specifications, A-9
troubleshooting downward
ultrasonic depth, 8-47
setting communication parameters,
6-59
sewer gases, 4-24
sewer system hydraulics, 2-15
shipping, 1-29
signal strength, 4-36, 8-5
low signal designation, 6-59
SIM card
installation
EMU, 4-30
EMUX, 4-39
GSM module, 4-12
replacement
EMU modem, 8-29
EMUX modem, 8-30
GSM module, 8-21
SIRA
certificates, 1-17
certification, 1-13, 1-17
site investigation, 3-4
hydraulics, 3-4
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor
1/2-band mount, 3-41
3/4-band mount, 3-39
connecting to the monitor, 3-57
editing device
temperature parameters, 6-31
ultrasonic parameters, 6-22
velocity parameters, 6-26
editing devices, 6-21
inspection, 8-17
installation
1/2-band mount, 3-41
3/4-band mount, 3-39
mounting sensor to the ring, 3-23
overview, 2-24
peak velocity measurement,
2-24
upward ultrasonic depth
measurement, 2-24
special installation, 3-38
specifications, A-11
Index In-15
troubleshooting
peak velocity, 8-55
temperature, 8-61
upward ultrasonic depth, 8-52
smart (ultrasonic) depth sensor
editing device parameters, 6-51
smart depth
editing sensor device parameters,
6-35, 6-51
sensor
diagnostics, 6-80
special conditions for safe use, 1-6
special installation, 3-5
1/2-band mount, 3-41
Peak Combo Sensor, 3-41
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
3-41
3/4-band mount, 3-39
Peak Combo Sensor, 3-39
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
3-39
parts and supplies, 3-35
Peak Combo Sensor, 3-38
sensors, 3-33
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
3-38
Surface Combo Sensor, 3-45
standard mount, 3-45
tools, 3-37
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, 3-45
standard mount, 3-45
surcharge mount, 3-51
specifications, A-1
direct connect cable, A-12
EMU, A-14
EMUX, A-15
GSM module, A-13
monitor, A-1
Peak Combo Sensor, A-5
power supply, A-16
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor,
A-11
Surface Combo Sensor, A-6
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor, A-9
standard installation, 3-5
mounting Peak Combo Sensor to
the ring, 3-23
mounting sensors to the ring, 3-21
mounting Slimline Peak Combo
Sensor to the ring, 3-23
mounting Surface Combo Sensor
to the ring, 3-29
mounting Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
to the ring, 3-29
parts and supplies, 3-8
ring, 3-25
ring assembly, 3-11
sensors, 3-7
mounting to the ring, 3-21
ring assembly, 3-11
standard
ring, 3-25
tools, 3-10
store data, 6-23, 6-26, 6-29, 6-33,
6-36, 6-41, 6-46, 6-49, 6-51, 6-53,
6-57
storing the sensors, 8-18
supplies
GSM module installation, 4-6
maintenance, 8-2
special installation, 3-35
standard installation, 3-8
support, 1-29
surcharge
mounting the Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor in the manhole, 3-51
surcharge detection, 6-37, 6-52
surcharge peak velocity
measurement, 2-23
sensor diagnostics, 6-77
troubleshooting, 8-55
surcharge peak velocity sensor
editing device parameters, 6-43
surcharge pressure depth
editing sensor device parameters,
6-47
sensor diagnostics, 6-75
troubleshooting, 8-60
In-16
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
Surface Combo Sensor
connecting to the monitor, 3-57
diagnostics, 6-70
pressure, 6-75
smart depth, 6-80
surcharge velocity, 6-77
surface velocity, 6-77
temperature, 6-83
editing device
(surcharge) peak velocity
parameters, 6-43
pressure parameters, 6-47
smart depth (ultrasonic)
parameters, 6-35
surface velocity parameters,
6-38
temperature parameters, 6-49
editing devices, 6-34
handling and storage, 8-18
inspection, 8-17
IS certification, 1-4
leveling, 3-30
measuring the physical offset,
3-32
mounting sensor to the ring, 3-29
overview, 2-20
downward ultrasonic depth
measurement, 2-22
pressure depth measurement,
2-23
surcharge peak velocity
measurement, 2-23
surface velocity measurement,
2-22
pressure sensor dryer tube
replacing desiccant, 8-20
replacing pressure sensor dryer
tube, 8-19
securing dryer tube to the monitor,
3-59
special installation
standard mount, 3-45
specifications, A-6
troubleshooting
downward ultrasonic depth,
8-47
surcharge peak velocity, 8-55
surcharge pressure depth, 8-60
surface velocity, 8-58
temperature, 8-61
surface velocity
editing sensor device parameters,
6-38
measurement, 2-22
sensor diagnostics, 6-77
troubleshooting, 8-58
T
telemetry, 1-4
Telog Ru-33, E-1
configuration, 6-9, E-2
overview, 2-8
Triton – Telog comm. cable, E-3
temperature
troubleshooting, 8-61
temperature sensor
diagnostics, 6-83
Peak Combo Sensor
editing device parameters, 6-31
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor
editing device parameters, 6-31
Surface Combo Sensor
editing device parameters, 6-49
Ultrasonic (Smart) Depth Sensor
editing device parameters, 6-53
time zone, 6-8
tools, 1-6
EMU installation, 4-26
EMUX installation, 4-39
GSM module installation, 4-6
special installation, 3-37
standard installation, 3-10
torque for monitor bolts, 8-17
transmit frequency, 6-29, 6-39, 6-45
Triton – Telog comm. cable, E-3
Index In-17
troubleshooting, 8-38
communication, 8-43
fee, 1-29
monitor, 8-39
Peak Combo Sensor
peak velocity, 8-55
pressure depth, 8-60
temperature, 8-61
upward ultrasonic depth, 8-52
peak velocity, 8-55
pressure depth, 8-60
Slimline Peak Combo Sensor
peak velocity, 8-55
temperature, 8-61
upward ultrasonic depth, 8-52
Surcharge Combo Sensor
surcharge peak velocity, 8-55
surcharge peak velocity, 8-55
surcharge pressure depth, 8-60
Surface Combo Sensor
downward ultrasonic depth,
8-47
surcharge depth, 8-60
surface velocity, 8-58
temperature, 8-61
surface velocity, 8-58
temperature, 8-61
ultrasonic depth, 8-47
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
downward ultrasonic depth,
8-47
upward ultrasonic depth, 8-47
U
ultrasonic depth
measurement, 2-16, 2-22, 2-24
troubleshooting, 8-47
Ultrasonic Depth Sensor
connecting to the monitor, 3-57
depth processing, 2-19
diagnostics, 6-70
smart depth, 6-80
temperature, 6-83
editing devices
smart depth (ultrasonic)
parameters, 6-51
temperature parameters, 6-53
inspection, 8-17
IS certification, 1-4
leveling, 3-30
measuring the physical offset,
3-32
mounting sensor to the ring, 3-29
mounting the Ultrasonic Depth
Sensor in the manhole, 3-51
overview, 2-18
pressure depth option, 2-20
pressure sensor dryer tube
replacing desiccant, 8-20
quadredundancy, 2-19
replacing pressure sensor dryer
tube, 8-19
special installation
standard mount, 3-45
surcharge mount, 3-51
specifications, A-9
troubleshooting
downward ultrasonic depth,
8-47
underground utilities
locating services, 4-20
upgrading the firmware in the
monitor, 6-97
upward ultrasonic depth
editing sensor device parameters,
6-22
measurement, 2-16, 2-24
sensor diagnostics, 6-72
troubleshooting, 8-52
urethane foam, 4-23
USB-to-serial adapter cable, 4-51
In-18
ADS FlowShark Triton Manual
V
velocity direction, 6-28, 6-39, 6-44
velocity measurement
peak, 2-17, 2-24
surcharge peak, 2-23
surface, 2-22
velocity type, 6-57
voltage regulator board, 2-12
W
wall mounting, 7-4
warnings, 1-10
warranty, 1-28
customer service, 1-29
international returns, 1-29
invalidation, 1-10
new product, 1-28
out-of-warranty repairs, 1-29
shipping, 1-29
troubleshooting fee, 1-29
wet well, 3-5
wireless antenna installation
EMUX, 4-45
in-road, 4-8
wireless communication, 1-4, 2-4,
4-3
antenna, 1-5
installation, 4-8
EMU, 1-5
installation, 4-19, 4-34
specifications, A-14
EMUX, 1-5
antenna installation, 4-45
installation, 4-38, 4-43
specifications, A-15
GSM module
installation, 4-17
specifications, A-13
installing the GSM module, 4-5
parts and supplies, 4-6
signal strength, 6-59
SIM card installation
EMU modem, 4-30
EMUX modem, 4-39
GSM module, 4-12
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement